Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
PAPER ONE
1
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Wednesday 19 MAY 1999 Morning 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A It decreases.
B It increases.
C It is constant.
D It is zero.
0625/1 S99
3 The graph shows how the speed of a car changes over 200 s.
20
speed
m/s
0
0 50 100 150 200
time/s
x x
apple 1 apple 2
What does this show about the mass and the weight of the apples?
PETROIL
32 V I S T
VA LV O I L
centre of mass
where why
A as high as possible to give the car more acceleration
B as high as possible to give the car more stability
C as low as possible to give the car more acceleration
D as low as possible to give the car more stability
The diagram shows the direction of the friction force acting on the object.
object sliding
object this way
table
friction force
A It has no effect.
B It increases the object’s weight.
C It slows the object down.
D It speeds the object up.
0625/1 S99
7 A student swings on a rope tied to a branch of a tree.
At which position is the student’s energy of motion (kinetic energy) the greatest?
A
D
B C
A B C D
geothermal coal-fired nuclear hydroelectric
hot rocks heat coal burned to heat nuclear fuel heats water from mountain
water, steam turns water, steam turns water, steam turns reservoir turns
turbine and generator turbine and generator turbine and generator turbine and generator
A B C D
h h h h
10 The diagram shows a drawing pin (thumb tack) and a wooden board.
force
drawing pin
wooden board
Why is this?
0625/1 S99
11 A liquid evaporates quickly.
How does its temperature change, and which of its molecules leave the surface?
temperature molecules
change leaving surface
A rises fastest-moving
B rises slowest-moving
C falls fastest-moving
D falls slowest-moving
12 A pupil looks through a microscope into a small, glass container in which tiny smoke particles
have been mixed with air. The container is very brightly lit and the pupil sees bright specks moving
randomly.
Which graph best shows how the temperature changes with time as the substance cools?
A B C D
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
15 A flask with a narrow tube contains some coloured liquid. The diagram shows the height of the
liquid column at 0°C, 100 °C and X °C.
80
70
60
50
millimetres 40
30
20
10
0
0 °C 100 °C X °C
What is temperature X?
A 40 °C B 50 °C C 60 °C D 80 °C
0625/1 S99
16 Four wires of equal length, made of different materials, are placed on heat-sensitive paper. The
four ends of the wire are put together, as shown, and are heated for three minutes.
heat-sensitive paper
heated here
Heat-sensitive paper changes colour when it gets hot. The diagram below shows the marks on the
heat-sensitive paper due to the conduction of heat energy along the wires.
C
A
D
100
% of heat
80
energy
reflected
60
40
20
0
white- red soil tar
washed brick
What is the best way to treat a flat roof so as to increase the amount of heat absorbed by the roof?
19 A barrier lies at the mouth of a harbour. It is closer to one side of the mouth of the harbour than the
other. Sea waves come towards the harbour and pass through the two gaps.
Which diagram shows the pattern that the waves make when they pass through the gaps?
waves moving
this way A B
sea
barrier
harbour
C D
0625/1 S99
20 Which diagram shows the path of a ray of light through a glass prism and into the air beyond?
A B C D
21 Which diagram shows how a converging lens in a camera forms an image on the film?
object image
object image
object image
object image
22 What is heard when the frequency of a sound wave is increased at constant amplitude?
A higher pitch
B lower pitch
C louder sound
D quieter sound
Which diagram shows the positions of the pins and the poles induced on them?
A B C D
N N N N
S S N N S S N S
N N S S N N S N
25 Different metals are separated by passing them under an electromagnet, which attracts and lifts
out some of the metals.
electromagnet
different metals
moving belt
0625/1 S99
26 Which diagram shows the directions of the forces between two charged particles?
A + +
B + –
C + –
D – –
BATTERY
9 VOLTS
28 The diagram shows how a student has connected some electrical components. The lamp does
not light because the circuit has not been completed.
crocodile clip
switch
battery lamp
connecting wire P
Q R S
crocodile clip
Where must the crocodile clips be connected, so that the lamp lights only when the switch is
closed?
A 0 B 1 C 2 D 3
A B
live live
heater heater
metal case metal case
C D
live live
heater heater
metal case metal case
0625/1 S99
31 The diagram shows an electrical hazard.
glass bulb
A B
C D
33 Which object makes use of the force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field?
A electric fan
B electric kettle
C lamp
D transformer
A B C D
3 2
straight wire
milliammeter
0625/1 S99
36 Particles given off by a hot cathode in a vacuum are attracted to a plate P. There is a high potential
difference between the cathode and plate as shown.
vacuum
hot
P
cathode
– +
A α-particles
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time
minute
A 50 minutes
B 100 minutes
C 200 minutes
D 400 minutes
0625/1 S99
40 The diagram represents the radioactive decay of a nucleus.
4
2 He
238
92 U
A
Z Th
A Z
A 238 93
B 238 92
C 236 88
D 234 90
Go to answers
0625/1 S99
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Tuesday 9 NOVEMBER 1999 Morning 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
1 The digital stopwatches show the finishing times of two runners in a race.
runner 1 runner 2
min s min s
: :
2 The graph shows how the speed of an object changes with time.
speed
m/s
0
0 2 4 6 8
time
s
A 2s B 4s C 6s D 8s
0625/1 W99
3
4 The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
cm3
30
20
10
distance F
moves size of F
A bigger bigger
B bigger smaller
C smaller bigger
D smaller smaller
40 m/s 30 m/s
A decreasing speed on a level road
m/s
30
B going at a constant speed uphill
30
m/s
40
C increasing speed downhill m/s
30 m/s 40 m/s
D increasing speed on a level road
What is the highest point the ball reaches before rolling backwards? Ignore the effects of friction.
steel ball
C A
A coal
B hot rocks
C tides
D waves
0625/1 W99
5
A electric bell
B loudspeaker
C microphone
D radio
10 A manometer is connected to a gas tap. Diagram X shows the liquid levels before opening the gas
tap. The gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure.
Which diagram shows what happens to the liquid levels after opening the gas tap?
gas tap X A B C D
liquid
before opening
gas tap
Sun
water
swimming pool
12 A closed container full of gas is left to stand on a bench for a long time.
13 Metal railway lines can be laid in sections with small gaps in between, as shown. The sections are
connected by metal plates.
gap
railway line
metal plate
A B C D
15 Two balloons are inflated at the same room temperature until they have the same volume of air
inside. They are then sealed. Balloon X is placed in a refrigerator for some time, while balloon Y
stays at room temperature. The diagram shows the balloons after this time.
balloon balloon
X Y
Assuming no air has leaked out of the balloons, which statement is correct?
16 On a day when the temperature is low, the metal handlebars of a bicycle feel colder than the
plastic handlegrips.
17 A man puts a saucer on top of a cup of tea to keep the tea hot.
saucer
cup
1 cm
1 cm
A 8 cm B 4 cm C 2 cm D 1 cm
P Q
wavefront
A direction
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
mirror
2m
1m
21 Which diagram shows a possible path for a ray of light passing through water in a beaker with a
mirror at the bottom?
A B C D
water
mirror
22 An electric bell is suspended in a bell-jar as shown. Switch S is closed and air is then pumped
from the jar. The sound of the bell becomes quieter.
electric
bell
bell-jar
to vacuum pump
23 A student shouts when standing by a cliff. A short time later the student hears an echo.
cliff
student
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
24 The diagram shows the circuit for an electromagnet. The core of the electromagnet can be made
from different materials.
When switch S is closed, which material attracts the largest number of iron nails?
A aluminium
B copper
C glass
D iron
0625/1 W99
11
Which diagram shows the positions of the pointers of the plotting compasses?
26 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.
––
––
––
negatively ––
––
charged ––
plastic sheet –– P
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
–– Q
––
charge on P charge on Q
A negative negative
B negative positive
C positive negative
D positive positive
27 The meter in the circuit measures the potential difference across the resistor.
meter
A amp
B ohm
C volt
D watt
2X
3X
A less than 2 Ω
B between 2 Ω and 3 Ω
C between 3 Ω and 5 Ω
D more than 5 Ω
0625/1 W99
13
A B C D
30 Which device can be used to switch off the current in a circuit when the current becomes too
large?
A capacitor
B circuit-breaker
C light-dependent resistor
D transformer
A B
fan fan
M M
heater heater
C D
fan fan
M M
heater heater
0625/1 W99 [Turn over
14
32 A straight wire carries an electric current at right angles to the page. The black dot in each
diagram shows where the wire passes through the page.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire?
A B C D
33 When electrical energy is transmitted over large distances, a high voltage is used.
A B
V V
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
V V
0 0
0 time 0 time
A B C D
0625/1 W99
15
1 cm
Which diagram shows the new appearance of the waveform on the screen?
A B
C D
A 2 mm of aluminium
B 2 mm of lead
C 2 cm of air
D 2 cm of concrete
40 Which statement about the numbers of particles in a neutral atom must be correct?
Go to answers
0625/1 W99
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
A 658.31 seconds
B 6 minutes 58.31 seconds
C 6.58 minutes 31 seconds
D 6 hours 58 minutes 31 seconds
2 A student lets 100 drops of water fall into a measuring cylinder which already contains some
water.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
new level
20 original level 20 of water
of water
10 10
3 Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a car moving at constant speed?
A B C D
speed
speed
speed
speed
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
0625/1 S00
3
4 A student investigates the speed of a trolley and finds that it is 50 cm/s, and one second later that
it is 150 cm/s.
A density
B mass
C volume
D weight
6 Which instrument can be used to give a direct measurement of the mass of a rock on the Moon?
A B C D
bathroom scales beam balance force meter top-pan balance
7 The diagrams show an empty beaker on a balance and some liquid in a measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
80
60
liquid 40
20
When all the liquid is poured into the beaker, the balance reading changes to 140 g.
A (140 ÷ 60) g/cm3 B (60 ÷ 40) g/cm3 C (40 ÷ 60) g/cm3 D (60 ÷ 140) g/cm3
0625/1 S00 [Turn over
4
8 The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces, F, act on the brick.
F
A B C D
F F F
F F F F
9 The diagram shows four ways of lifting a heavy box by using a lever.
effort
A B effort
box box
effort
effort
C D
box box
10 The diagrams show a diver climbing some steps and jumping off a diving board.
Where does the diver have the most gravitational potential energy (energy of position)?
A B C D
0625/1 S00
5
11 The diagrams show four schemes which use a barrier to convert tidal energy into electrical energy.
barrier barrier
A B
turbine high turbine high
water water
level level
low
water
level low
water
level
C D
high high
water water
level level
low
water
level
low
water
level
mercury
What is at X?
A B
dam wall water dam wall water
C D
dam wall water dam wall water
14 A fixed mass of gas is kept in a sealed cylinder, so that its volume does not change.
GAS
How does a change in the temperature affect the pressure of the gas?
0625/1 S00
7
Which of these molecules is the most likely to escape from the liquid by evaporation?
A (fast) B (slow)
liquid
D (fast) C (slow)
mercury
pure
melting
ice
water
17 Some ice is heated at a constant rate in a beaker. The ice melts and later the water boils for a
short while.
A B C D
temperature/ °C
temperature/ °C
temperature/ °C
temperature/ °C
0 0 0 0
time time time time
18 A person lifts a hot pan from a stove. Although the pan is hot, the handle is cool.
A aluminium
B copper
C iron
D wood
0625/1 S00
9
20 Plane waves produced in a ripple tank arrive at a barrier that has a small gap.
waves moving in
this direction
What causes the wave pattern that is produced beyond the barrier?
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
movement of cork
A candle flame moves backwards and forwards as a sound wave passes it.
movement of flame
What does this show about water waves and sound waves?
lens
A image
lens
B image
lens
C image
lens
D image
60° 80°
30° 30°
40°
50°
X
0625/1 S00
11
24 Two windows are double-glazed. Window X is made of two pieces of glass with a vacuum between
them. Window Y is made of two pieces of plastic with air between them.
glass plastic
vacuum air
window X window Y
window why?
A X Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
B X Sound cannot travel through glass.
C Y Sound cannot travel through air.
D Y Sound cannot travel through plastic.
25 The diagram shows a student standing 165 m in front of a wall. He claps his hands once.
wall
165 m
magnet coil
electrical supply
A Use a d.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
B Use a d.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
C Use an a.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
D Use an a.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
S N no effect X
S N Y
repulsion
X Y
A aluminium magnetised steel
B aluminium unmagnetised iron
C unmagnetised iron magnetised steel
D unmagnetised iron unmagnetised iron
0625/1 S00
13
28 Which diagram shows how a voltmeter and an ammeter are connected to find the value of the
resistance of resistor R?
A R V
B R V
A
R
C
V
V
D R
29 Two uncharged metal-coated polystyrene spheres, P and Q, are suspended side by side.
P Q
A B C D
P Q P Q P Q P Q
30 Component Y is placed in the circuit shown and is used to reduce the brightness of the lamp
gradually.
What is component Y?
A a fuse
B a relay
C a switch
D a variable resistor
0625/1 S00
15
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
A B
fuse
live live
fuse
neutral neutral
C D
live live
fuse
neutral neutral
fuse
33 An electric kettle takes 12 A of current from the mains supply. When the kettle’s cable needs to be
replaced, a 5 A cable is used that was originally attached to a small lamp. The original plug and
fuse from the kettle’s cable are used.
A electric bell
B electric fire
C fuse
D lamp
35 The diagram shows a transformer, with 100 V applied to the primary coil.
100 V
particles
from cathode
cathode
0625/1 S00
17
37 In the circuit shown, the brightness of the light reaching the light-dependent resistor increases.
light
light-dependant resistor
A ammeter
A It becomes zero.
B It decreases.
C It does not change.
D It increases.
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source plotted against time.
80
70
60
50
activity
40
counts/min
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/hours
After what time is the activity one quarter of its original value?
How many protons and neutrons are there in the nucleus of this nuclide?
protons neutrons
A 27 33
B 27 60
C 60 27
D 60 87
Go to answers
0625/1 S00
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Tuesday 7 NOVEMBER 2000 Morning 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
2 The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and at the finish of an experiment.
stopclock stopclock
at start at finish
60 60
S S
45 15 45 15
30 30
A 10 s B 25 s C 35 s D 45 s
0625/1 W00
3
3 A ball is thrown up into the air. The diagram shows the ball’s path.
Ignoring air resistance, which statement about the acceleration of the ball is correct?
A It is least at point X.
B It is zero at point Y.
C It is greatest at point Z.
D It is the same at points X, Y and Z.
4 Which graph shows the speed of a stone, dropped from the top of a building, until it hits the
ground? (Assume there is no air resistance.)
A B C D
speed
speed
speed
speed
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
D C
A 6 kg B 60 kg C 60 N D 600 N
0625/1 W00
5
8 A student tries to balance a 10 kg bag of rice on a pivoted beam, using a 5 kg bag of rice.
5 kg
10 kg
pivot
9 A hot-air balloon moves in the direction shown at constant speed and at constant height.
W, X, Y and Z are the forces acting on the balloon.
direction of
movement Y
X Z
water
dam
wall
generator
turbine
A chemical to electrical
B electrical to chemical
C electrical to kinetic
D kinetic to electrical
11 Forces are used to move objects P, Q, R and S through the distances shown.
5N P
10 N Q
5N R
10 N S
0625/1 W00
7
25 cm
mercury 75 cm
5 cm
A 25 cm B 75 cm C 80 cm D 100 cm
A
C
B
D
15 A lorry driver checks the pressure of the air in the tyres when the temperature is 5 °C. After a long
journey, the tyres are hot and the pressure of the air in the tyres has increased.
A Some air has leaked from the tyres during the journey.
B The air in the tyres is less dense.
C The average speed of the air molecules is greater.
D The tyres have expanded and have a larger volume.
16 Long pipes that carry steam often have bends in them, as shown.
17 A solid substance is heated. The graph shows the change in temperature of the substance with
time.
temperature
time
0625/1 W00
9
18 At the end of a long race, a runner is wrapped in a thin, plastic blanket that has a shiny, metallic
surface.
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
How does most of the heat reach her hands and legs?
hands legs
A convection convection
B radiation convection
C convection radiation
D radiation radiation
20 The diagram shows waves in a ripple tank passing from deep water to shallow water.
wavefront
speed frequency
A decreases decreases
B decreases unchanged
C increases increases
D unchanged increases
displacement Q
P
distance
S
amplitude wavelength
A P Q
B P R
C S Q
D S R
0625/1 W00
11
A B C D
A B C D
24 The diagram shows apparatus used to find what happens to the sound from an electric bell as air
is removed from the container.
electric
bell
container
to vacuum
pump
What happens to the sound of the electric bell heard from outside the container?
A It becomes louder.
B It becomes quieter.
C It becomes quieter, then louder.
D It remains the same.
0625/1 W00
13
600 m
not to scale
They find that it takes 2 seconds for the sound from the starting pistol to travel from one student to
the other.
soft iron
switch open
What is the condition of the soft iron when the switch is open and when the switch is closed?
27 When a magnet is brought near some metals, it induces magnetic poles in the metals.
Which diagram shows the poles induced when a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised
piece of iron and to an unmagnetised piece of aluminium?
iron
A S N
N magnet S
S N
aluminium
iron
B S N
N magnet S
(no poles)
aluminium
iron
C N S
N magnet S
N S
aluminium
iron
D N S
N magnet S
(no poles)
aluminium
28 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A B C D
V
V
V
0625/1 W00
15
29 Which diagram shows the directions of the electrostatic forces acting on two positively charged
spheres?
A B
+ + + +
C D
+ + + +
A B C D
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
36 W
36 W
5W
5W
A so that, if one lamp goes out, the others will remain lit
B so that the current in each lamp is the same
C so that the lamps operate at normal brightness, even when the battery runs down
D so that the voltage across each lamp is one quarter of the battery voltage
0625/1 W00
17
input output
(few turns) (many turns)
A current
B energy
C power
D voltage
35 Which diagram shows how a coil of wire and a magnet can be used to produce an electric current
through a meter?
magnet
A B C D
S S coil
movement glued
N on to
N magnet
coil
S S
N N
meter
capacitor
37 The charges on the x-plates and y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope cause the spot on the
screen to move to the position shown.
y-plate
screen
x-plate x-plate
spot
y-plate
A B C D
_ + + _
+ + _ _ + _ _ +
_ + _ +
0625/1 W00
19
38 A piece of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector. What are the possible
radiations that can pass through the paper?
39 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive substance changes with time.
800
700
600
500
activity
counts/min
400
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/min
e key
e = electron
p p p = proton
n n n = neutron
= nucleus
A 2 B 4 C 6 D 8
0625/1 W00
Go to answers
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
book
A 0 10 20 30 cm
B 0 10 20 30 cm
C 0 10 20 30 cm
D 0 10 20 30 cm
2 The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and finish of an experiment.
stopclock stopclock
at start at finish
60 60
s s
45 15 45 15
30 30
A 10 s B 25 s C 35 s D 45 s
0625/1/M/J/01
3
3 An apple falls from a tree. The diagram shows the apple at P, as it starts to fall, and at Q, just
before it hits the ground. The acceleration due to gravity is g. Air resistance can be ignored.
acceleration at P acceleration at Q
A 0 0
B 0 g
C g 0
D g g
4 In a race, a car travels 60 times round a 3.6 km track. It takes 2.4 hours.
spring
metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
6 A child of mass 40 kg sits on one end of a see-saw. The pivot is at the centre of the see-saw.
There are four sacks of sand, each with a different mass, as shown.
40 kg
see – saw
X
pivot
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
0625/1/M/J/01
5
8 The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces F act on the brick.
A B C D
F
F F F
F F F F
9 Four rings are screwed into a door, as shown. The door can be opened by putting a hook into
one of the rings and pulling.
B
A
C
pull
10 A stone is thrown into the air. The diagram shows the path of the stone through the air.
C
B
A B C D
0625/1/M/J/01
7
vacuum
A
mercury B C D
trough
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on snow.
X Y
Which boy is more likely to sink into the snow and why?
A X larger than Y
B X smaller than Y
C Y larger than X
D Y smaller than X
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure volume
A decreases decreases
B decreases remains the same
C increases decreases
D increases remains the same
15 To keep a bottle of milk cold without a refrigerator on a hot day, the bottle can be covered with a
damp cloth in a bowl of water.
damp cloth
bottle
milk
bowl
water
0625/1/M/J/01
9
0°C 100°C
When the thermometer becomes hotter, the liquid moves further along the stem.
Why is this?
A The glass contracts.
B The glass expands.
C The liquid contracts.
D The liquid expands.
17 Two copper rods, A and C, and two copper tubes, B and D, have the same external diameter.
A
B
C
D
18 On a cold night, two children sit next to a camp fire to warm their hands. Their hands are the
same distance from the fire. Child 1 holds his hands over the fire and child 2 holds her hands in
front of the fire.
How does the heat from the fire reach each child’s hands?
child 1 child 2
water
heating element
What are the main processes by which heat energy is transferred from the element to the water,
and throughout the water?
A conduction convection
B convection radiation
C radiation conduction
D radiation convection
0625/1/M/J/01
11
A B C D
At which two points are the molecules moving in the same vertical direction at the same time?
P Q
R T
S
A P and Q
B P and T
C Q and T
D R and S
Which diagram correctly shows the path of the ray of light and the critical angle c?
A B
C D
c
c
A B C D
electric electric
bell bell
glass glass
dome dome
0625/1/M/J/01
13
25 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high. What information
does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced?
amplitude frequency
26 The diagrams show a magnetised piece of steel being moved slowly to the left.
A B
d.c. a.c.
steel steel
C D
S magnet N magnet
N S
steel steel
27 The diagram shows some nails attracted to a metal rod by magnetic induction.
S permanent
magnet
N
metal
rod
nails
0625/1/M/J/01
15
29 A plastic strip is rubbed on a piece of cloth and then held near water running slowly from a tap.
The water moves towards the plastic strip.
tap
plastic strip
water
30 The diagrams show part of an electric circuit containing an ammeter and a voltmeter.
Which arrangement should be used to measure the p.d. across the resistor and the current
through it?
A B
A
A V V
C D
V
V
A
A
A B C D
32 Why are lamps in the lighting circuit of a house connected in parallel and not in series?
A It allows them to be switched on and off independently.
B It uses less electrical energy.
C The filaments are less likely to burn out.
D The p.d. across each lamp is reduced.
house
electric cable
0625/1/M/J/01
17
34 A wire is placed between the poles of a magnet and is briefly connected to a cell. It experiences
a downwards force.
downwards
force
magnet
The cell is now reversed so that it is connected the other way round.
What happens to the direction of the magnetic field of the magnet and to the direction of the
force on the wire?
A reversed reversed
B reversed unchanged
C unchanged reversed
D unchanged unchanged
input output
P S
voltage voltage
Which arrangement would make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
A 50 100 a.c.
B 50 100 d.c.
C 100 50 a.c.
D 100 50 d.c.
A B
output
input input
output
C D
37 The circuit shown contains a light dependent resistor (LDR) and an ammeter, in series with a
battery.
How does the circuit behave when more light shines on it?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
0625/1/M/J/01
19
radioactive
detector
source sheet of paper
39 The count rate of radiation produced by a radioactive sample is measured every minute. The
results are recorded in the table.
0 80
1 56
2 40
3 28
4 20
5 14
A 4 Li 3 Li 7 Li 3 Li
3 B 4 C 3 D 7
Go to answers
0625/1/M/J/01
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001 45 minutes
Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
cm3
10
2 The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
0 cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0625/1/O/N/01
3
3 An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 0
time time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 0
time time
After travelling along a fast road for 2 hours, the motorist uses a slow road for the remaining
hour of the journey.
start
finish
A 7 kg B 70 kg C 80 kg D 700 kg
8 A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension/load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
x y
A x B y C y+x D y–x
0625/1/O/N/01
5
9 Diagram X shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on a van when it is moving
forward at constant speed.
diagram X
(constant speed)
CIE
force Q force R
Diagram Y shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on the same van when it is
accelerating.
diagram Y
(accelerating)
CIE
force S force T
diagram X diagram Y
(constant speed) (accelerating)
10 A pole-vaulter runs up to a jump with his pole straight. He puts one end of the pole down on the
ground and the pole bends.
before after
pole
11 A ball is allowed to roll down a slope, as shown in the diagram. There is no friction.
At which point does the ball have the greatest energy of motion (kinetic energy)?
start
C
B
D
0625/1/O/N/01
7
finger
pinhead
pin
thumb
balloon
mercury
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances.
A -219 -183
B -7 58
C 98 890
D 1083 2582
16 In an experiment, a piece of melting ice and a beaker of boiling water are in a laboratory which is
at 20 °C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and of the boiling water?
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing
0625/1/O/N/01
9
17 The glass stopper in the neck of a glass bottle is too tight to come out.
A B C D
Which waves carry most heat to her hands, and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves electromagnetic
A infra-red no
B infra-red yes
C light no
D light yes
19 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Metal balls are
stuck with wax to rods made of different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
diagram X diagram Y
heat heat
D
A
before heating after heating
A B
C D
0625/1/O/N/01
11
P Q
0 0
0 distance 0
distance
R S
0 0
0 0
distance distance
22 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes through a glass prism in a periscope?
A B C D
visible light
How do the frequency and the speed of gamma rays compare with those of visible light?
0625/1/O/N/01
13
25 A lighted candle is put in front of a loudspeaker which is making a loud, steady note. The flame
vibrates because of the sound wave.
loudspeaker candle
Which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?
A longitudinal
B transverse
C longitudinal
D transverse
26 When a magnet is brought close to an unmagnetised piece of iron, the iron becomes
magnetised.
Which diagram correctly shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron?
A B C D
S S S S
magnet magnet
N N N N
N S
N S S N
S N
P magnet
rod X N S
Q
rod Y
S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
P attraction
Q attraction
R attraction
S repulsion
0625/1/O/N/01
15
A B
V
R
R
V A A
C D
A
R R
V
V A
30 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.
A B C D
31 A student uses four ammeters to measure the current in different parts of a circuit.
P Q
A A
R 10 Ω
A
S 20 Ω
A
In which circuit would all four lamps have the correct brightness?
A B
240 V 240 V
C D
240 V 240 V
0625/1/O/N/01
17
5 A fuse
soft iron
coil
How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
35 A wire carries an electric current between the poles of a magnet. This causes a force that
pushes the wire upwards.
force on wire
S N
current into
page
The poles of the magnet and the direction of the current are both reversed.
Which arrow now shows the direction of the force on the wire?
A
force on wire
N D B S
current out
C of page
0625/1/O/N/01
19
A B
resistance resistance
0 0
0 brightness of light 0 brightness of light
C D
resistance resistance
0 0
0 temperature 0 temperature
switch
X
capacitor
switch at X switch at Y
A charging charging
B charging discharging
C discharging charging
D discharging discharging
38 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
120
activity/
counts per 90
second
60
30
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/minutes
39 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms give out alpha-particles.
1st particle
atom
1
atom atom
5 2
atom atom
4 3
2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
0625/1/O/N/01
21
40 The diagram shows the particles in an atom. Charged particles are marked + or –.
A 4 B 5 C 9 D 13
Go to answers
0625/1/O/N/01
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
ap
er
s.c
om
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
PHYSICS 0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002
45 minutes
Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
When a car was first seen, the stop-start button was pressed. When the car passed the observer,
the stopwatch showed 01:06.
stop-start button
min s
01 : 06
A 1.06 seconds
B 6 seconds
C 66 seconds
D 106 seconds
2 A girl uses a rule to measure the length of a metal rod. Because the end of the rule is damaged,
she places one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown.
metal rod
damaged
end 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
cm
A 43 mm B 46 mm C 53 mm D 56 mm
0625/1/O/N/02
3
3 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff into the sea. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
A 10 m B 30 m C 90 m D 270 m
A Mass and weight are different names for the same thing.
B The mass of an object is different if the object is taken to the Moon.
C The weight of a car is one of the forces acting on the car.
D The weight of a chocolate bar is measured in kilograms.
pivot
Two bags of flour are removed. What mass will balance the remaining bags?
A 3 kg B 6 kg C 7 kg D 9 kg
7 The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid are shown in the
diagram.
cm3 cm3
100 100
liquid
50 50
0625/1/O/N/02
5
9 The diagram shows sections of four objects, all of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass
of each object has been marked with a cross.
A B C D
A decreasing decreasing
B decreasing increasing
C increasing decreasing
D increasing increasing
11 In a car engine, energy stored in the fuel is converted into thermal energy (heat energy) and
energy of motion (kinetic energy).
A chemical
B geothermal
C hydroelectric
D nuclear
vacuum
level X
level Y
mercury
level X level Y
D goes up goes up
13 Four flower vases have circular bases. They are filled with water so that they all have the same
weight.
A B C D
0625/1/O/N/02
7
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in
If the temperature of the gas does not change, what happens to the pressure of the gas?
A It drops to zero.
B It decreases, but not to zero.
C It stays the same.
D It increases.
17 A block of ice is heated at a constant rate. Eventually the melted ice boils.
100
temperature / °C
0 5 10
time / minutes
A 4 B 7 C 11 D 13
18 How does thermal energy (heat energy) travel through the vacuum between the Earth and the
Sun?
A by conduction
B by convection
C by radiation
D by radioactive decay
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench
0625/1/O/N/02
9
spring X
direction of
side to wave travel
side
movement
backward spring Y
and direction of
wave travel
forward
movement
spring X spring Y
A longitudinal longitudinal
B longitudinal transverse
C transverse longitudinal
D transverse transverse
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A diffracted.
B radiated.
C reflected.
D refracted.
22 One of the effects of passing a ray of white light through a prism is to split the light into colours.
prism
white light
coloured light
A deviation
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
23 A student looks at the letter P on a piece of paper, and at its reflection in a mirror.
A B C D
mirror mirror
paper paper
0625/1/O/N/02
11
25 Two sound waves P and Q are displayed on an oscilloscope with the same time-base and
Y-plate settings for each.
P Q
Which statement correctly describes the pitch and the loudness of the two sounds?
26 A piece of magnetised steel is placed inside a coil of wire that has a large alternating current
passing through it. The magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position P.
12 V a.c.
permanent
S N P Q soft-iron bar
magnet
What happens?
28 In which circuit does the ammeter read the total current through both resistors?
B
A
A
A
C D
0625/1/O/N/02
13
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four light bulbs.
voltage / V current / A
A 2 0.5
B 3 0.2
C 6 12
D 12 1.0
30 In the following circuits, the resistors have the same value and the cells are identical.
A B
C D
31 The diagram shows a circuit, with four possible positions to place a switch.
A lamp 1
B
C
D
lamp 2
At which labelled point should a switch be placed so that lamp 1 remains on all the time and
lamp 2 can be switched on and off?
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
What is device X?
A a fuse
B a relay
C a resistor
D an ammeter
33 A classroom has four lights, each fitted with a lamp marked 240 V, 100 W.
A B C D
240 V 240 V
240 V 240 V
0625/1/O/N/02
15
A B
e.m.f. e.m.f.
0 0
time time
C D
e.m.f. e.m.f.
0 0
time time
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.
current
force
magnet magnet
N S
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A downwards
B upwards
C to the left
D to the right
A electrons negative
B electrons positive
C protons negative
D protons positive
0625/1/O/N/02
17
100 Ω
100 Ω V
Diagram 1
90 Ω
100 Ω V
Diagram 2
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A It becomes zero.
B It decreases a little.
C It increases a little.
D It stays the same.
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
radiation
A It is alpha-particles.
B It is beta-particles.
C It is gamma-rays.
D It is a mixture of alpha-particles and gamma-rays.
40 Which line in the table gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nuclide 73 Li?
protons neutrons
A 3 4
B 3 7
C 4 3
D 7 3
0625/1/O/N/02
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2003
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
V
water
T
Q
U
S
What other distance needs to be measured in order to be able to calculate the volume of the
water?
A ST B SV C TU D TV
2 A stopwatch is used to time a race. The diagrams show the watch at the start and at the end of the
race.
start end
60 60
55 5 55 5
50 10 50 10
45 15 45 15
40 seconds 20 40 seconds 20
35 25 35 25
30 30
0625/01/M/J/03
3
3 The diagram shows a speed-time graph for a body moving with constant acceleration.
speed
0
0 time
A acceleration
B distance
C speed
D time
4 A tunnel has a length of 50 km. A car takes 20 min to travel between the two ends of the tunnel.
A 2.5 km / h
B 16.6 km / h
C 150 km / h
D 1000 km / h
X Y Y Z X Z
Which line in the table shows the correct order of the children’s weights?
8 A spring is suspended from a stand. Loads are added and the extensions are measured.
spring
stand
loads rule
A B C D
extension
extension
extension
extension
0 0 0 0
0 load 0 load 0 load 0 load
0625/01/M/J/03
5
A B C D
A hot rocks
B falling water
C oil
D waves
11 A labourer on a building site lifts heavy concrete blocks onto a lorry. Lighter blocks are now lifted
the same distance in the same time.
What happens to the work done in lifting each block and the power exerted by the labourer?
liquid
A ammeter
B barometer
C manometer
D thermometer
13 The diagrams show two divers swimming in the sea and two divers swimming in fresh water. Sea
water is more dense than fresh water.
0m 0m
A sea water C fresh water
2m 2m
4m 4m
B D
6m 6m
A the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with less energy than others
B the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with more energy than others
C the molecules at the surface with less energy than others
D the molecules at the surface with more energy than others
0625/01/M/J/03
7
15 Two metal boxes containing air are standing in a room. Box X is on top of a heater. Box Y is on a
bench. The boxes are left for a long time.
X Y
heater bench
Which line in the table best describes the average speed of the molecules in the containers?
box X box Y
A fast zero
B fast slow
C slow fast
D zero fast
16 The top of the mercury thread in a mercury-in-glass thermometer reaches point X at 0 °C and
point Z at 100 °C.
Z
Y
X
W
A point W
B point X
C point Y
D point Z
17 The same quantity of heat energy is applied to four different blocks. The temperature rise
produced is shown on each block.
A B
temperature
temperature
rise is
rise is
3 °C
6 °C
C D
temperature
temperature rise is
rise is 18 °C
9 °C
18 A person holds a glass beaker in one hand and fills it quickly with hot water. It takes several
seconds before his hand starts to feel the heat.
0625/01/M/J/03
9
water
lagging
tank
heater
What is the main process by which heat moves through the water?
A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
20 What causes refraction when light travels from air into glass?
What does the 200 m tell her about the radio wave?
A its amplitude
B its frequency
C its speed
D its wavelength
A camera B camera
film film
object object
C camera D camera
film film
object object
0625/01/M/J/03
11
→
direction of travel of sound wave
500 m
cliffs
island
He shouts for help, but all he can hear in reply is the echo of his shout from some cliffs.
What is the time interval between the boy shouting and hearing the echo?
500 2 × 500 340 2 × 340
A s B s C s D s
340 340 500 500
26 A student wishes to use a magnetising coil to make a permanent magnet from a piece of metal.
metal
A aluminium
B copper
C iron
D steel
27 A metal rod XY is placed near a magnet. End X is attracted when it is placed near to the north pole
of the magnet, and also when it is placed near to the south pole.
X Y
N N
attraction
X Y
S S
attraction
How does end Y behave when it is placed, in turn, near to the two poles of the magnet?
0625/01/M/J/03
13
28 When the potential difference (p.d.) across a piece of resistance wire is changed, the current
through the wire also changes.
Which graph shows how the p.d. and current are related?
A B C D
0 0 0 0
0 p.d. 0 p.d. 0 p.d. 0 p.d.
29 Two faulty ammeters and two perfect ammeters are connected in series in the circuit shown.
A1 A2 A3 A4
A1 2.9 A
A2 3.1 A
A3 3.1 A
A4 3.3 A
30 Which electrical component would not normally be found in a battery-operated torch (flashlight)?
A B C D
A 1 and 2
B 1, 2 and 3
C 1 and 3
D 2 and 3
A B
C D
0625/01/M/J/03
15
In which circuit are the lamps connected so that they all work at normal brightness?
A B C D
240 V 240 V 240 V 240 V
S
magnet
solenoid
V
35 The diagram shows a transformer with an alternating voltage of 100 V applied to the primary coil.
secondary coil
primary coil
spot of light
A B
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
C D
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
0625/01/M/J/03
17
thermometer
water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
What is component X?
A a capacitor
B a light-dependent resistor
C a reed relay
D a thermistor
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D X-rays
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
A 0.03 g
B 0.12 g
C 1.92 g
D 7.68 g
A 3 B 4 C 7 D 10
Go to answers
0625/01/M/J/03
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2003
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
1 Which of the following is not necessary when using a measuring cylinder to measure the volume
of a quantity of water?
2 A pendulum is set in motion and 20 complete swings are timed. The time measured is 30 s.
3 Five telegraph poles are positioned at equal distances along the side of a road.
A car accelerates until it is level with pole 4. The car then continues along the road at a steady
speed. The times taken to travel between one pole and the next are measured.
0625/01/O/N/03
3
4 A train travels along a track from Aytown to Beetown. The map shows the route.
Aytown
Beetown
The distance travelled by the train between the towns is 210 km. It moves at an average speed of
70 km / h.
5 A beam is pivoted at its centre. Two masses are suspended at equal distances from the pivot as
shown in the diagram.
pivot
block X 2 kg mass
When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
7 A student tries to find the density of a metal block. First he measures the weight with a
forcemeter (spring balance). Next he measures the sides of the block using a rule, in order to
calculate the volume of the block. Finally he divides the weight by the volume to find the density.
0625/01/O/N/03
5
9 The table below shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased.
load / N 0 10 20 30
Which graph correctly shows the extension of the wire plotted against load?
A B
60 3
extension / cm extension / cm
40 2
20 1
0 0
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
load / N load / N
C D
6 56.3
extension / cm extension / cm
4 54.1
2 52.1
0 50.0
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
load / N load / N
Which of the following values are enough to allow the power of the motor to be calculated?
11 A tidal power station is made by building a barrage across the mouth of a river. At high tide the
sea water is trapped behind the barrage.
barrage
turbine
trapped sea water
sea at low
tide
At low tide the water is allowed to flow back into the sea through a turbine.
12 Which diagram shows the child exerting least pressure on the ground?
A B C D
0625/01/O/N/03
7
13 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
A B C D
gas
14 Which line in the table correctly describes whether the molecules of a solid, liquid and gas are
moving or stationary?
Why is this?
16 The diagram shows how the atoms in a substance rearrange themselves during a change of
state.
A gas to liquid
B liquid to gas
C liquid to solid
D solid to liquid
17 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers. They are heated from 20 °C
to 30 °C by heaters of the same power. Liquid 2 takes twice as long to heat as liquid 1.
same mass of
different liquids
liquid 1 liquid 2
heaters of
same power
0625/01/O/N/03
9
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
A B
ice water
C D
water
water ice
ice wrapped
in lead wire
20 The diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright.
X Y
weight
21 Waves travel more slowly on the surface of water when the water is shallow.
A person drops a stone into a pool at X. The diagram shows the first wavefront on the surface of
the pool.
A X
C
wavefront
0625/01/O/N/03
11
22 Which diagram correctly shows the paths taken by red and blue light when a beam of white light
enters a glass prism?
A B
red blue
blue red
white white
light light
C D
blue red
red blue
white white
light light
23 Which diagram shows the correct order of the waves in the electromagnetic spectrum?
visible
infra ultra
radio red violet X-ray
A
increasing wavelength
visible
ultra infra
radio violet red X-ray
B
increasing wavelength
visible
ultra infra
X-ray violet red radio
C
increasing wavelength
visible
infra ultra
X-ray red violet radio
D
increasing wavelength
hammer
astronaut 1 astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A no sound at all
B a quieter sound
C a sound of the same loudness
D a louder sound
0625/01/O/N/03
13
26 A steel bar is magnetised by stroking it several times with the south pole of a magnet, as shown.
X Y
steel bar
X Y
A north north
B north south
C south north
D south south
27 A steel ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet that is lying on
the table.
Which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?
A B
S S
magnet magnet
N N
ball ball
C D
magnet S magnet S
N N
28 A student wants to find the resistance of resistor R using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
A B C D
V A V A
V
R R R R
A V A
29 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.
negatively
charged
plastic sheet
charge on P charge on Q
A negative negative
B negative positive
C positive negative
D positive positive
0625/01/O/N/03
15
30 Four students are asked to draw a circuit showing three lamps working in parallel, a cell, and a
switch that controls all three lamps.
A B
C D
A 0.5
B 2.0
C 9.0
D 18.0
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
Y X Y Z
circuit 1 circuit 2
34 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how why
A at high voltage for safety
B at high voltage to reduce energy loss
C at low voltage for safety
D at low voltage to reduce energy loss
35 In a cathode-ray tube, particles are given off from a hot cathode by thermionic emission.
A atoms
B electrons
C ions
D protons
0625/01/O/N/03
17
36 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and a -ray?
-particle -ray
A helium nucleus electromagnetic radiation
B helium nucleus electron
C proton electromagnetic radiation
D proton electron
x
yR → qpS +
A x=p
B y=q
C p=x–1
D q=y–1
39 Which line in the table shows the structure of the nucleus of a helium atom 24 He?
26 X.
40 A nucleus of substance X has the symbol 12
How many electrons orbit around the nucleus of a neutral atom of substance X?
A 12
B 14
C 26
D 38
Go to answers
0625/01/O/N/03
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2004
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
3 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
2 2 4
1 3 2
A cm3 / g
B g / cm2
C g / cm3
D kg / m2
A B C D
M
M
M M
9 An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
load / N 0 1 2 3
length / cm 15.2 16.2 18.6
extension / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4
A chemical
B gravitational
C kinetic
D strain
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. The barometer reading is h cm of mercury.
mercury
A approximately zero
B atmospheric pressure
C atmospheric pressure + h cm of mercury
D h cm of mercury
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on soft ground.
X Y
Which boy is more likely to sink into the soft ground and why?
A X larger than Y
B X smaller than Y
C Y larger than X
D Y smaller than X
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and to the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure volume
A decreases decreases
B decreases remains the same
C increases decreases
D increases remains the same
15 A balloon is inflated in a cold room. When the room becomes much warmer, the balloon becomes
larger.
How does the behaviour of the air molecules in the balloon explain this?
16 A substance is heated at a steady rate. It changes from a solid to a liquid, and then to a gas.
S
temperature
R
time
A P and R
B P and S
C Q and R
D Q and S
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
How can the engineer fit the washer onto the rod?
18 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Balls are stuck with
wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
diagram X diagram Y
A B C D
h e a t h e a t
before heating after heating
19 Thermometer X is held above an ice cube and thermometer Y is held the same distance below
the ice cube. After several minutes, the reading on one thermometer changes. The ice cube does
not melt.
thermometer X
ice cube
thermometer Y
thermometer reason
20 Water waves change direction when they move from shallow water to deep water.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
deep
water
shallow
water
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
21 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P. In two seconds, three wave crests are
produced on the surface of the water.
wave P
crests
normal
ray of
light
2
air 1
glass 3
angle angle
of incidence of refraction
A 1 3
B 1 4
C 2 3
D 2 4
lens
Which diagram shows the path of the rays after passing through the lens?
A B
C D
A infra-red radiation
B microwaves
C sound waves
D X-rays
P Z
Y
DANGER - X
BLASTING
V W
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other.
A XY.
B PV.
C ZY.
D WX.
29 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A B C D
V V
V
31 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.
A B C D
switch 1
lamp 1
switch 2 lamp 2
lamp 3
switch 3
lamp 4
A switch 1 only
B switch 1 and switch 2 only
C switch 1 and switch 3 only
D switch 2 and switch 3 only
33 The diagram shows a torch containing two 2 V cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic
case
brass
connecting switch
strip lamp
A B C D
A B
current current
C D
current current
36 A student carries out an experiment to see the effect of a magnetic field on a wire carrying a
current.
wire moves
upwards
N S
direction
of current
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + +
cathode rays
_ _ _ _ _ _
penetrates 1 cm
electric charge
of aluminium?
A negative yes
B negative no
C positive yes
D positive no
39 A small amount of a radioactive isotope contains 72 billion unstable nuclei. The half-life of the
isotope is 4 hours.
A 6 billion
B 9 billion
C 18 billion
D 24 billion
39
40 How many nucleons are in a nucleus of 19 K ?
A 19 B 20 C 39 D 58
Go to answers
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2004
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
1 A floor is covered with square tiles. The diagram shows a ruler on the tiles.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cm
A 3 cm B 6 cm C 9 cm D 12 cm
2 The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the beginning and at the end of an experiment.
stopclock stopclock
at beginning at end
0 0
s s
45 15 45 15
30 30
A 10 s B 25 s C 35 s D 45 s
A B C D
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
4 A racing car is fitted with an on-board computer. Every time the car passes the starting line, the
computer records the distance travelled in the next 2 seconds.
Which set of data shows that the car is increasing in speed during the 2 seconds?
A B
distance distance
time / s time / s
travelled / m travelled / m
0 0 0 0
1 100 1 90
2 200 2 180
C D
distance distance
time / s time / s
travelled / m travelled / m
0 0 0 0
1 80 1 100
2 190 2 180
spring
metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
6 The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
25
cm3
20
15
10
5
7 A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension / load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
x
y
A x B y C y+x D y–x
8 Three horizontal forces act on a car that is moving along a straight, level road.
air resistance
Which combination of forces would result in the car moving at constant speed?
9 A child pushes a toy car along a level floor and then lets it go.
At which position does the cyclist have the least gravitational (potential) energy?
D
A
finger
pinhead
pin
thumb
A The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
B The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
C The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
D The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
12 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
A B C D
A boiling
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation
14 The diagram represents gas molecules contained in a cylinder. The piston is moved slowly
downwards and the temperature of the gas stays the same.
piston
cylinder
gas molecule
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A pure alcohol.
B pure distilled water.
C pure melting ice.
D pure mercury.
What will happen to the level of water at X as the cool water becomes warmer?
A It will fall.
B It will rise.
C It will rise then fall.
D It will stay the same.
A light waves
B sound waves
C water waves
D X-ray waves
19 Waves move from deep water to shallow water where they are slower.
A B C D
20 Which type of radiation lies between visible light and microwaves in the electromagnetic
spectrum?
A infra-red
B radio waves
C ultra-violet
D X-rays
A B C D
A 10 Hz to 10 000 Hz
B 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz
C 10 kHz to 10 000 kHz
D 20 kHz to 20 000 kHz
24 A 100 metre race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke comes
out of the gun as shown.
starter finishing
judge
100 m
When does the finishing judge see the smoke and hear the bang?
A immediately immediately
B immediately after about 0.3 s
C after about 0.3 s immediately
D after about 0.3 s after about 0.3 s
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
A B
N S N S
C D
N S N S
arrangement result
27 A circuit is set up with a gap between two terminals X and Y. The four strips of material shown in
the diagram are connected in turn across the gap.
A B C D
wood glass steel rubber
X
28 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
A B
V
R
R
A A
C D
A
R R
V
A V
2Ω
2Ω
ammeter 1 ammeter 2
reading = 2 A A A reading = ?
A 0A B 1A C 2A D 4A
31 In which position in the circuit shown should a switch be placed so that both lamps can be
switched on or off at the same time?
A
B
C
D
A B
C D
Which of these fuses would be best to use in the plug fitted to the hair-drier lead?
input output
P S
voltage voltage
Which arrangement could be used to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
A 100 50 a.c.
B 100 50 d.c.
C 50 100 a.c.
D 50 100 d.c.
contact core
spring
A aluminium
B copper
C iron
D steel
A electrons
B ions
C neutrons
D protons
226
88 X → QP Y + 4
2α
P Q
A 230 90
B 230 86
C 222 90
D 222 86
39 During a fire in a laboratory storeroom, some radioactive material was spilled. A firefighter
detected radiation through the lead-lined walls of the storeroom. The radiation was emitted by the
radioactive material.
lead-lined
storeroom
firefighter
detector radioactive
material
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D X-rays
A 0 B 6 C 8 D 14
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2005
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
1 A decorator wishes to calculate the area of a bathroom tile so that he can estimate the amount of
adhesive that he needs to buy.
3 A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows how the car’s speed changes with time.
speed
m/s
20
0
0 10 time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a steady speed?
A 10 m B 20 m C 100 m D 200 m
A The mass of a bottle of water at the North Pole is different from its mass at the Equator.
B The mass of a bottle of water is measured in newtons.
C The weight of a bottle of water and its mass are the same thing.
D The weight of a bottle of water is one of the forces acting on it.
5 Two blocks X and Y are placed on a beam as shown. The beam balances on a pivot at its centre.
Y
X
pivot
6 The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3 cm3
200 200
100 100
liquid
7 A girl and a boy are pulling in opposite directions on a rope. The forces acting on the rope are
shown in the diagram.
girl boy
200 N 150 N
rope
Which single force has the same effect as the two forces shown?
8 Objects with different masses are hung on a 10 cm spring. The diagram shows how much the
spring stretches.
10 cm
20 cm
30 cm
100 g
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
A capacitor
B generator
C motor
D transformer
A chemical energy.
B electrical energy.
C gravitational energy.
D internal energy.
11 A ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown.
ball C
starts
here B
12 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm
13 A farmer has two carts. The carts have the same weight, but one has four narrow wheels and the
other has four wide wheels.
In rainy weather, which cart sinks less into soft ground, and why?
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in
A It drops to zero.
B It decreases, but not to zero.
C It stays the same.
D It increases.
D
temperature
C
time
pressure gauge
air
flask
water
heat
What does the pressure gauge show as the air in the flask becomes hotter?
A a steady pressure
B a decrease in pressure
C an increase in pressure
D an increase and then a decrease in pressure
18 An iron bar is held with one end in a fire. The other end soon becomes too hot to hold.
hand fire
iron bar
A by conduction
B by convection
C by expansion
D by radiation
A
B
clamp C
ice
table D
A
B
D
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A diffracted.
B radiated.
C reflected.
D refracted.
22 Which diagram correctly shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block?
A B
C D
24 cm 10 cm 8 cm
A 8 cm B 10 cm C 18 cm D 24 cm
24 A fire alarm is not loud enough. An engineer adjusts it so that it produces a note of the same pitch
which is louder.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A larger larger
B larger same
C same larger
D same same
25 To estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. He hears an echo
from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0 s.
sound
climber
valley
A aluminium
B copper
C iron
D steel
27 A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction and a plotting compass is placed at each end.
brass rod
N
plotting
compass
Which diagram shows the positions of the needles of the plotting compasses?
aluminium
silver
iron
plastic
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
29 In which circuit does the voltmeter read the potential difference across the lamp?
A B
V V
C D
6V
switch
X
A X
Y
A
Z
A
X Y Z
A 2A 3A 5A
B 3A 2A 5A
C 3A 3A 3A
D 5A 2A 3A
32 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the p.d. across it can be varied from 0 to 6 V.
A B
6V 6V
C D
6V 6V
5 A fuse
34 Which graph shows the output voltage from a simple a.c. generator?
voltage
A 0
time
voltage
B 0
time
voltage
C 0
time
voltage
D 0
time
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An a.c. voltage
of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V
primary coil
secondary coil
50 turns
100 turns
36 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together, and are free to move.
A It decreases.
B It decreases then increases.
C It increases.
D It does not change.
– +
A B C
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D all have the same ionising effect
A 0 mg B 40 mg C 100 mg D 200 mg
40 In the symbol below, A is the nucleon number and Z is the proton number.
Z
X
What is represented by the symbol?
A an electron
B a neutron
C a nuclide
D an X-ray
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
20
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
October/November 2005
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
cm3
50
40
50
30
40
20
10
30
speed
m / s 20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
What distance does the car travel during this part of the journey?
movement
of man
man
8.0 m
A 4.0 s B 6.0 s C 10 s D 16 s
five bags
of rice 10 kg mass
pivot
A 3.5 kg B 7.0 kg C 10 kg D 14 kg
6 The same mass of four different liquids is placed in some measuring cylinders.
Which measuring cylinder contains the liquid with the greatest density?
A B C D
2 2 5 5
7 The diagram shows a flat metal plate that may be hung from a nail so that it can rotate about any
of four holes.
holes holes
What is the smallest number of holes from which the flat metal plate should be hung in order to
find its centre of gravity?
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
A B C D
F F F F
9 Which type of power station does not use steam from boiling water to generate electricity?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C nuclear
D oil-fired
energy at X energy at Y
A B C D
table
10 N 10 N 10 N 10 N
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
A 25 cm B 75 cm C 80 cm D 100 cm
A The skin cools because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
B The skin cools because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
C The skin warms because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
D The skin warms because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
14 A suspension of pollen grains in water is observed under a microscope. The pollen grains are
seen to be moving all the time.
A B C D
15 A knife is being sharpened on a rotating sharpening-stone. A spark flies off and lands on the
operator’s hand. The spark is a very hot, very small piece of metal. The operator feels nothing.
A –218 –183
B –39 357
C 44 280
D 119 444
cooling
unit
A conduction only
B convection only
C radiation only
D conduction, convection and radiation
A B C D
20 In a ripple tank, water waves move towards a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier
water
waves
A B
C D
21 A ray of light passes from glass into air at an angle of incidence of 40o. The glass has a critical
angle of 42 o.
A B
air air
glass glass
40o 40o
C D
air air
glass glass
40o 40o
ray 1
ray 1
ray 2
ray 2
What could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?
A a converging lens
B a parallel-sided glass block
C a plane mirror
D a triangular prism
screen
image
lens
candle
The screen and the lens are moved back and forth and various focused images are produced on
the screen.
24 Two astronauts without radios can only communicate in space if their helmets are touching.
There is no air in space.
25 When the horn on a ship is sounded, the passengers hear an echo from a cliff after 4.0 s.
26 How many of the following methods could be used to demagnetise a piece of steel?
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
P magnet
rod X N S
Q
rod Y
S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
P attraction
Q attraction
R attraction
S repulsion
A B
A
V A
V
C D
V
V
A A
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
voltage / V current / A
A 110 5.0
B 110 10
C 230 5.0
D 230 10
30 Which component can store energy for use in time delay circuits?
A capacitor
B potentiometer
C resistor
D thermistor
31 When the circuit shown is connected with switch S open, the 6 V lamp glows.
6V
6 V lamp
A It becomes brighter.
B It remains the same.
C It becomes dimmer.
D It goes off.
32 Why are the electric lamps in a house lighting circuit normally connected in parallel?
33 In the circuit shown, one of the fuses blows and all the lamps go out.
B C
D
a.c. d.c.
output output
input input
35 The diagrams show a straight wire carrying a current into the paper.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern due to this current?
A B C D
36 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil which is connected
to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring
centre-zero
ammeter
What does the ammeter show when the magnet vibrates slowly up and down?
A electrons negative
B electrons positive
C protons negative
D protons positive
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
radiation
A It is α-particles.
B It is β-particles.
C It is γ-rays.
How many neutrons and protons does the nucleus have after emitting the β-particle?
neutrons protons
A 144 92
B 144 93
C 145 91
D 145 93
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2006
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
1 A measuring cylinder contains some water. When a stone is put in the water, the level rises.
cm3 cm3
200 200
150 150
100 100
50 50
stone
10
speed
m/s 8
0
1 2 3 4 5
time / s
A 2m B 10 m C 25 m D 50 m
A 10 m B 30 m C 90 m D 135 m
5 A simple balance has two pans suspended from the ends of arms of equal length. When it is
balanced, the pointer is at 0.
pivot arm
pointer
pan X pan Y
Four masses (in total) are placed on the pans, with one or more on pan X and the rest on pan Y.
A 1 g, 1 g, 5 g, 10 g
B 1 g, 2 g, 2 g, 5 g
C 2 g, 5 g, 5 g, 10 g
D 2 g, 5 g, 10 g, 10 g
6 A person measures the length, width, height and mass of a rectangular metal block.
Which of these measurements are needed in order to calculate the density of the metal?
A mass only
B height and mass only
C length, width and height only
D length, width, height and mass
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
A chemical
B light
C nuclear
D sound
10 A labourer on a building site lifts a heavy concrete block onto a lorry. He then lifts a light block the
same distance in the same time.
A less for the light block less for the light block
B less for the light block the same for both blocks
C more for the light block more for the light block
D the same for both blocks more for the light block
A
B
12 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
A B C D
gas
Why is this?
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal (heat)
energy.
A B C D
copper bar
heat
A It becomes lighter.
B It becomes longer.
C It becomes shorter.
D It bends at the ends.
X water
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench
21 Water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in deep water.
Which diagram shows what will happen to plane waves in deep water when they enter shallow
water?
A B
deep shallow deep shallow
C D
deep shallow deep shallow
X
N
W E
The man’s voice will be heard sooner and more clearly if the wind is blowing towards the
A north.
B south.
C east.
D west.
25 Sounds are made by vibrating objects. A certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot hear
any sound.
26 A student investigates which end of a magnetic compass needle is attracted to a bar magnet.
A Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the north pole of the magnet.
B Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the south pole of the magnet.
C One end of the compass needle is attracted by the north pole and the other end by the south
pole.
D The compass needle is not attracted by either end of the magnet.
27 From which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made?
coil core
A copper copper
B copper iron
C iron copper
D iron iron
28 What are the symbols used for the units of current and resistance?
A A W
B A Ω
C V W
D V Ω
29 When a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminium foil hanging from a nylon
thread, the foil is repelled by the comb.
Why is this?
A B C D
31 Four lamps and four switches are connected to a power supply as shown in the circuit diagram.
When all the switches are closed, all the lamps are lit.
When one of the switches is then opened, only one lamp goes out.
A B
C D
Which of the four labelled points in the circuit is the only one where the current is less than 2 A?
A
A
C D
N S
coil X coil Y
24 V 6V
What are suitable numbers of turns for coil X and for coil Y?
A 240 60
B 240 240
C 240 960
D 960 60
Which line in the table shows the charge and the temperature of the anode?
A negative cool
B negative hot
C positive cool
D positive hot
38 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms each give out an α-particle.
1st particle
atom
1
atom
atom 2
5
atom atom
4 3
2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
A atom 2
B atom 4
C atom 5
D impossible to tell
radioactive source
2m
Geiger counter
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D radio waves
How many protons, electrons and neutrons does the atom contain?
A 7 7 3
B 3 7 3
C 3 4 4
D 3 3 4
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2006
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
2 A cyclist is riding along a road when an animal runs in front of him. The graph shows the cyclist’s
motion. He sees the animal at P, starts to brake at Q and stops at R.
speed
P Q
R
0
0 time
What is used to find the distance travelled after he applies the brakes?
5 km
Q 10 km
T
5 km
10 km
R
P
A 10 km / hour
B 20 km / hour
C 30 km / hour
D 60 km / hour
A acceleration
B density
C mass
D weight
100
90
measuring
cylinder
80
70
60
50
liquid
40 digital
30 balance
20
10
The student records the volume of the liquid from the scale on the measuring cylinder. He then
puts the measuring cylinder containing the liquid on a balance and records the mass.
What else needs to be measured before the density of the liquid can be calculated?
6 The diagram shows four blocks, each made of glass of density 2.6 g / cm3.
15 cm
10 cm
5 cm
2 cm
A B C D
7 A heavy beam is resting on two supports, so that there are three forces acting on it.
R1 R2
8 The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
A B C D
A hydroelectric
B nuclear
C tides
D waves
The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y.
hill
11 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer
board
soft ground
mercury
X
Y
Z
A VW B WY C XY D XZ
Which diagram represents the change in arrangement of the particles in the water as it
evaporates?
15 A block of ice is heated until it has all melted. The water that is produced is then heated until it
boils.
Which line in the table states what happens to the temperature of the ice while it is melting, and
to the temperature of the water while it is boiling?
A increases increases
B increases stays the same
C stays the same increases
D stays the same stays the same
16 A thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown. When placed in steam, the mercury
level rises to 22 cm. When placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2 cm.
cm
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
mercury
8
6
4
2
0
A 6 °C B 8 °C C 30 °C D 40 °C
conduction convection
What would be the best place to position the heating element in order to obtain the best
circulation of the liquid through the tube?
A B liquid
D C
19 In a ripple tank experiment, plane water-waves meet a straight barrier with a wide gap in it.
wave
motion
barrier
A B
C D
displacement
0
distance
X Y
A B C D
21
3 9
23 A police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. A pedestrian notices that,
although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, the pitch varies.
Which line in the table describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A constant varying
B constant constant
C varying constant
D varying varying
24 A sports field is next to a large school building. At the far side of the sports field, a student sees a
groundsman hammer a pole into the ground.
school building
student
hammer
pole
about 400 m
The student hears two bangs each time the hammer hits the pole.
25 A student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate the magnetic field around a bar
magnet.
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
A B
N S N S
C D
N S N S
26 The ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end Q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.
R T
Q S U
A rod 1 only
B rod 1 and rod 2 only
C rod 1 and rod 3 only
D rod 3 only
27 A student wishes to measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery and the potential
difference (p.d.) across a resistor.
She has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.
A a voltmeter only
B an ammeter only
C an ammeter and a voltmeter
D a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter
A α-particle
B electron
C neutron
D proton
29 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
30 Which graph shows how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature?
A B
resistance / Ω resistance / Ω
0 0
0 temperature / °C 0 temperature / °C
C D
resistance / Ω resistance / Ω
0 0
0 temperature / °C 0 temperature / °C
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
A C D
33 An electric heater is connected to the mains using insulated copper wires. The wires become
very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
rotation
magnet
S
commutator
N
carbon brush
battery
A a d.c. motor
B an a.c. generator
C a magnetising coil
D a transformer
12 V
voltage
input
0
time
A B
12 V 12 V
voltage voltage
output output
0 0
time time
C D
12 V 12 V
voltage voltage
output output
0 0
time time
heater particles
cathode
anode
A atoms
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an α-particle and of a γ-ray?
α-particle γ-ray
38 The count rates of four radioactive sources were measured at the same time on three
consecutive days.
A 100 50 25
B 200 140 100
C 300 300 300
D 400 200 100
1 2 3
1H H
1 1H
Which of these nuclides have the same number of protons in their nuclei?
A 1 and 2 only
B 2 and 3 only
C all of them
D none of them
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/06
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2007
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*4300881997*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB07 06_0625_01/3RP
© UCLES 2007 [Turn over
2
1 The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
0 cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
100
distance
travelled / m
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
time / s
A 2.4 s B 2.8 s C 65 s D 70 s
3 Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
A both stones hit the floor at the same time the acceleration of free fall is constant
B both stones hit the floor at the same time they fall at constant speed
C the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight
D the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight
A C
When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
7 Each of the solids shown in the diagram has the same mass.
A B C D
2 cm
1 cm 2 cm
1 cm
2 cm 2 cm 2 cm 2 cm
1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm
How many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force?
• a change in direction
• a change in shape
• a change in mass
• a change in speed
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
9 A light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. It stands on three wheels, one at the front and two
further back.
A B C D
10 Which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station?
A chemical energy
B gravitational energy
C internal energy (thermal energy)
D nuclear energy
11 Which line in the table gives an example of the stated form of energy?
pressure to
be measured
water
The water in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is more dense.
A It becomes zero.
B It decreases, but not to zero.
C It stays the same.
D It increases.
13 A cylinder is filled with a gas and then sealed, so that the gas has a fixed volume.
The gas molecules are given energy so that their average speed increases.
What happens to the pressure and to the temperature of the gas in the cylinder?
pressure temperature
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
diagram 1 diagram 2
random
movement
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
15 The graph shows how the temperature of hot liquid wax changes with time as the wax is allowed
to cool.
At which labelled point on the graph are both liquid wax and solid wax present?
temperature
A
B C
0
0 time
16 1 kg of water and 1 kg of aluminium are heated to the same temperature and then allowed to cool
in a room.
Why does the aluminium cool more quickly than the water?
17 Bread can be cooked by placing it below, but not touching, a heating element.
heating element
bread
Which process transfers thermal energy from the heating element to the bread?
A conduction
B convection
C insulation
D radiation
18 The diagram shows a refrigerator. The cooling unit is placed at the top. The cooling unit cools the
air near it.
cooling unit
What happens to the density of this air as it cools and how does it move?
A direction
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
20 Plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. They travel more quickly in
the deeper water.
shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water
A B
C D
Which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?
man
A B C D
air
water
stone
mirror X
30°
mirror Y
Which property of the sound wave increases when the music is made louder?
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
640 m
spectator
The spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol two seconds after seeing the flash from the
gun.
25 Small particles of metal are scattered near a bar magnet to show the pattern of the magnetic
field.
A aluminium
B brass
C copper
D iron
core
pins
coil
A B
N
C
D S
A 50 0.1
B 50 0.2
C 100 0.1
D 100 0.2
29 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth and becomes positively charged.
A B
output
output
C D
output
output
relay lamp 2
switch S
lamp 1
lamp 1 lamp 2
A on on
B on off
C off on
D off off
32 Which diagram shows a circuit that will allow the lamps to be switched on and off independently?
A B C D
A B C D
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope,
which shows a graph of voltage output against time.
N S oscilloscope
contact
contact
A B C D
12 V a.c.
A 2.4 V B 12 V C 60 V D 240 V
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + +
cathode rays
– – – – – –
38 What are the most penetrating and the least penetrating types of radiation?
A α-particles β-particles
B β-particles α-particles
C γ-rays α-particles
D γ-rays β-particles
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
40 The data below relates to the nucleus of a particular neutral atom of nitrogen.
Which row represents the correct number of neutrons and electrons in this atom?
A 10 7
B 10 10
C 17 7
D 17 10
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/07
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2007
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*9483001639*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB07 11_0625_01/3RP
© UCLES 2007 [Turn over
2
A B C D
6 cm
4 cm
3 cm
2 cm
3 A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.4 s later hears an echo from a wall.
4 What are the correct units for force and for weight?
force weight
A kg kg
B kg N
C N kg
D N N
Mercury 40
Venus 90
Earth 100
Mars 40
Jupiter 250
6 A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly-shaped solid.
7 A metal drum has a mass of 200 kg when empty and 1000 kg when filled with 1.0 m3 of
methylated spirit.
A 0.0050 kg / m3
B 0.11 kg / m3
C 800 kg / m3
D 1000 kg / m3
8 An empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. The glass remains stable.
B
C
9 An aeroplane is in equilibrium.
weight
10 A student adds loads to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each load.
0
0 1 2 3 4 load / N
A measured length
B original length
C (measured length – original length)
D (measured length + original length)
What has the chemical energy been converted to when she is at the top of the stairs?
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.
P
L
mercury
level L pressure at P
A falls increases
B falls stays the same
C rises increases
D rises stays the same
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances A, B, C and D.
A –219 –183
B –7 58
C 98 890
D 1083 2582
16 The diagram shows four blocks of steel. The same quantity of heat is given to each block.
A B C D
17 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.
wooden wheel
iron circle
Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?
19 Spoons made of different materials were placed in four cups of coffee poured from the same jug.
20 Which line gives an example of a longitudinal wave and describes its vibrations?
example of a
vibrations
longitudinal wave
Which dotted line shows the position of the still water surface after the waves have passed?
A
B
C
D
22 A student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism as shown in the diagram. He sees a
spectrum of colours emerging from the prism.
narrow beam X
Y spectrum
of white light
Z of colours
X Y Z
If the object moves towards the mirror in the direction shown by the arrow, in which direction does
the image move?
D
C
B
A
I
24 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
25 The graph represents a sound wave. The horizontal (x) axis represents time.
The graphs below are shown to the same scale. Which graph represents the new sound wave?
A B
y y
x x
C D
y y
x x
26 Which materials are suitable for making a permanent magnet and the core of an electromagnet?
A iron iron
B iron steel
C steel iron
D steel steel
27 Three charged balls, P, Q and R, are suspended by insulated threads. Ball P is negatively
charged.
insulated thread
P – Q
Q R
Q R
A positive positive
B positive negative
C negative positive
D negative negative
3.0 V
I/A R/Ω
A 1.5 1.5
B 1.5 2.0
C 6.0 2.0
D 4.0 12.0
29 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
X
0
V 0 current
A a capacitor
B a closed switch
C a metallic resistor
D an open switch
12 V
31 The diagram shows a battery connected to three identical resistors. Four ammeters A, B, C and
D are connected in the circuit.
A A A D
A
B
A
C
32 In the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened.
voltmeter 1
V
V V
voltmeter 2 voltmeter 3
Immediately after the switch is opened, which voltmeters will read zero?
A voltmeter 1 only
B voltmeter 2 only
C voltmeter 3 only
D voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3
33 A householder asks an electrician to install a mains electrical socket in her bathroom so that she
may use a hairdryer there. The electrician refuses to do this because it would be dangerous.
A The current drawn by the hairdryer would cause overheating in the cables.
B The handling of electrical equipment in damp conditions could cause an electric shock.
C The hot air produced by the hairdryer would cause the fuse to melt.
D The temperature in the bathroom would damage the insulation.
34 A mains electrical circuit uses insulated copper cable and the cable overheats.
To prevent the cable overheating, how should the cable be changed, and why?
35 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how why
36 Which parts of an a.c. generator slide past each other when the generator is working?
electron top
beam
screen
Y2 X2
heater
Y1 X1
radioactive detector
source sheet of paper
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
A B
– –
n + +
+ + +
+ n n key
n = a neutron
– –
+ = a proton
–
– = an electron
C D (not to scale)
– –
– –
n n
+n+ +n+
n n n n
+ +
– –
– –
–
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/07
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2008
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*1101906355*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB08 06_0625_01/3RP
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
The diagrams show the height of the liquid in the tube when the liquid is cold and when it is hot.
cold hot
5 5
tube
4 4
3 3
2 2
scale 1 1
cm cm
liquid
flask
C
speed
A D
time
3 The circuit of a motor racing track is 3 km in length. In a race, a car goes 25 times round the
circuit in 30 minutes.
A 75 km / hour
B 90 km / hour
C 150 km / hour
D 750 km / hour
4 The force of gravity acting on an astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft is less than when she is on
the Earth’s surface.
Compared with being on the Earth’s surface, how do her mass and weight change when she
goes into orbit?
A decreases decreases
B decreases unchanged
C unchanged decreases
D unchanged unchanged
5 When two blocks X and Y are placed on a uniform beam, the beam balances on a pivot at its
centre as shown.
Y
X
pivot
6 The diagram shows a rectangular metal block measuring 10 cm × 5.0 cm × 2.0 cm.
10 cm
5.0 cm
2.0 cm
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 measuring 40
cylinder
30 30
liquid
20 20
10 balance 10
200 g 250 g
A yes yes
B yes no
C no yes
D no no
A B C D
M M M M
10 A stone is thrown from the edge of a cliff. Its path is shown in the diagram.
3
ground
In which position does the stone have its greatest kinetic energy and in which position does it
have its least gravitational energy?
A 1 2
B 2 3
C 3 1
D 3 3
11 A worker is lifting boxes of identical weight from the ground onto a moving belt.
At first, it takes him 2 s to lift each box. Later in the day, it takes him 3 s.
12 A manometer is used to indicate the pressure in a steel vessel, as shown in the diagram.
liquid
manometer
steel vessel
What value does the liquid manometer give for the pressure in the vessel?
A It is zero.
B It is between zero and atmospheric pressure.
C It is equal to atmospheric pressure.
D It is greater than atmospheric pressure.
A B C D
4m 3m
2m 6m
3m 4m 1m 4m
2m 2m 2m 6m
14 Which line in the table describes the properties of solids and of liquids at a fixed temperature?
solids liquids
A definite volume and definite shape no definite volume but definite shape
B no definite volume but definite shape definite volume and definite shape
C definite volume and definite shape definite volume but no definite shape
D no definite volume but definite shape no definite volume and no definite shape
15 Air is pumped slowly into a car tyre to increase the pressure. The temperature of the air does not
change.
number of molecules
average speed at which
hitting 1 cm2 of the
molecules hit the tyre
tyre each second
A increases increases
B increases unchanged
C unchanged increases
D unchanged unchanged
bulb
Where must the bulb be placed so that 0 °C can be marked on the stem?
A in boiling water
B in cold water
C in a freezer
D in melting ice
17 A sample of a solid is heated for 12 minutes and its temperature noted every minute.
time / min 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
temperature / °C 11.5 16.1 22.1 31.0 31.1 31.1 31.1 31.3 45.0 65.2 66.2 66.3 66.3
A all solid
B in the process of melting
C all liquid
D in the process of boiling
A B
C D
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
A B
ice
water water
ice wrapped
in lead wire
C D
ice
water
water
ice wrapped
in lead wire
20 The diagram represents water waves about to move into shallow water from deep water.
wavefront
deep water
shallow water
Which property of the waves remains the same after the waves move into shallow water?
A frequency
B speed
C wavefront direction
D wavelength
U Q
S
T R
A B C D
mirror glass prism
23 Light from the Sun passes through a prism and a spectrum is produced on a screen.
screen
narrow slit
light from P
red
the Sun
violet
A infra-red
B microwave
C ultra-violet
D visible light
24 Two thin converging lenses X and Y are used as shown to give a focused image of an illuminated
slit. The rays shown are parallel between X and Y.
X Y
screen
slit image
source
of light
30 cm 20 cm 15 cm
What are the correct values for the focal lengths of X and of Y?
A 50 35
B 30 20
C 30 15
D 20 20
A speed = distance
time
C speed = time
distance
air
bell box walls
gap
The bell is ringing but no sound at all is heard outside the box.
A a solid
B a liquid
C a gas
D a vacuum
27 Which line in the table shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous materials?
iron steel
A ferrous ferrous
B ferrous non-ferrous
C non-ferrous ferrous
D non-ferrous non-ferrous
solenoid
bar magnet
power
supply
current through
movement of bar magnet
solenoid
A B C D
31 In the circuit shown, the switches S1 and S2 may be open (off) or closed (on).
V
+ switches shown
12 V open (off)
– S2
S1
Which line in the table shows the voltmeter reading for the switch positions given?
S1 S2 voltmeter reading / V
A open open 12
B closed closed 12
C open closed 0
D closed open 12
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
What is device X?
A a fuse
B a switch
C a resistor
D an ammeter
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
X Y Z
Z
circuit 1 circuit 2
34 The wire XY shown in the diagram is connected to a sensitive voltmeter with a centre zero. XY is
then moved quickly once through the magnetic field.
S
V
N
movement
A The needle moves briefly in one direction and then returns to the centre.
B The needle moves quickly in one direction and stays deflected.
C The needle vibrates rapidly from side to side whilst XY is moving.
D The needle stays still.
soft-iron core
primary coil
secondary coil
60 turns
30 turns
240 V
a.c.
What is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer?
36 In order to produce a beam of cathode rays, a heated filament is placed near to an anode in an
evacuated glass vessel.
anode
heated filament
What is the type of charge on the anode and why is this charge chosen?
charge reason
diagram 1 diagram 2
100 Ω 90 Ω
100 Ω V 100 Ω V
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A It becomes zero.
B It decreases a little.
C It increases a little.
D It stays the same.
A electron nucleus
B electron outer orbits
C helium nucleus nucleus
D helium nucleus outer orbits
39 A sample of radioactive uranium has mass 1 g. Another sample of the same material has
mass 2 g.
37
40 A particular nuclide has the symbol 17 Cl .
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/08
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2008
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*7002360314*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB08 11_0625_01/3RP
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
1 Two digital stopwatches X and Y, which record in minutes and seconds, are used to time a race.
The readings of the two stopwatches, at the start and at the end of the race, are shown.
start end
start end
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
The table shows the distances travelled and the time taken during each of four stages
P, Q, R and S.
stage P Q R S
During which two stages is the car travelling at the same speed?
5 The weight of an object is to be found using the beam balance shown in the diagram.
object
?
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan,
with the following results.
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
7 Two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance.
liquid X
volume = 200 cm3 liquid Y
volume = 100 cm3
B density of X = density of Y
C density of X = 2 × density of Y
D density of X = 4 × density of Y
A B
F F F
F
pivot pivot
C F D
F F F
pivot pivot
9 A train is travelling along a horizontal track at constant speed. Two of the forces acting on the
train are shown in the diagram.
forwards
force from engine
friction 60 000 N
20 000 N
A force of air resistance is also acting on the train to give it a resultant force of zero.
A 40 000 N backwards
B 80 000 N backwards
C 40 000 N forwards
D 80 000 N forwards
dam
water
turbine
generator
water
Whilst in contact with the table, some of its energy is converted into internal energy.
What is the highest possible point the ball could reach after bouncing?
4m A
height
B
ball released
from this height
C
2m
D
0
table
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.
mercury
Q
brick
table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force pressure
A unchanged unchanged
B increased unchanged
C unchanged increased
D increased increased
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
15 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. The graph shows how
the temperature of each liquid changes with time.
temperature
liquid 1
liquid 2
0
0 time
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
lid
hot drink
When the lid is removed, the rate of heat loss from the drink increases.
A convection only
B evaporation only
C both convection and evaporation
D neither convection nor evaporation
19 A cupboard is placed in front of a heater. Air can move through a gap under the cupboard.
wall
cupboard
heater
floor
Which line in the table describes the temperature and the direction of the air that moves through
the gap?
wavefront
shallow deep
water water
A amplitude
B frequency
C wave energy
D wavelength
A B C D
barrier barrier barrier
deeper shallower
water water
A B
glass glass
white white
light light
C D
glass glass
white white
light light
Through which point will the ray shown pass, after refraction by the lens?
lens
A
O P D B
A absorbed
B dispersed
C reflected
D refracted
25 In an experiment to measure the speed of sound, a student uses a stopwatch to find how long a
sound takes to travel from X to Y. She does this six times.
X Y
time / s
first 0.5
second 0.7
third 0.6
fourth 0.4
fifth 0.9
sixth 0.5
What value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?
coil
electrical
supply
steel bar
Which type of electrical supply should the student use and what should he do with the steel bar?
27 Two metal bars are held together. At least one of the bars is a magnet. The bars repel each
other.
A only one of the bars is a magnet two magnets always attract each other
B only one of the bars is a magnet induced magnetism in the other bar makes it repel
C they are both magnets there must be like poles facing each other
D they are both magnets there must be opposite poles facing each other
28 When there is an electric current in a metal wire, what flows through the wire?
A atoms
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
voltage / V current / A
A 110 5.0
B 110 10.0
C 230 5.0
D 230 10.0
6V
switch
X
What happens when the switch is closed (the current is switched on)?
P Q
3Ω 5Ω
R S
3Ω
3Ω 5Ω
5Ω
lowest highest
resistance resistance
A P Q R S
B R S P Q
C S P Q R
D P R Q S
A B
C D
A hairdryer takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can safely carry up to 5 A.
Which fuse is best to use in the plug fitted to the hairdryer lead?
34 Two different systems are used to transmit equal amounts of electrical power from one building to
another.
One system uses low voltage and the other uses high voltage. Both systems use identical wires.
Which line in the table is correct about which system wastes least energy and why?
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.
current
force
magnet magnet
N S
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A downwards
B upwards
C to the left
D to the right
36 A cathode-ray beam passes through an electric field between charged parallel plates.
+
cathode-ray beam
37 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.
38 The diagram shows an experiment to monitor the radiation from a radioactive gas. The counter
readings are corrected for background radiation.
counter
000.0
radioactive gas
The table shows how the counter reading varies with time.
39 Which material is commonly used as a lining for a box for storing radioactive samples?
A aluminium
B copper
C lead
D uranium
238
40 A uranium 92 U nucleus emits an α-particle.
A 238 88
B 236 90
C 234 92
D 234 90
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2009
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*7150187285*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB09 06_0625_01/3RP
© UCLES 2009 [Turn over
2
10
speed
m/s 8
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
A 2m B 10 m C 25 m D 50 m
3 A car travels 100 km. The highest speed of the car is 90 km/h, and the lowest speed is
30 km/h. The journey takes two hours.
A 30 km / h B 50 km / h C 60 km / h D 90 km / h
4 Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct?
5 The table shows the weight in newtons of a10 kg mass on each of four planets.
Earth 100
Jupiter 250
Mercury 40
Venus 90
18 N
2.0 kg
A Earth
B Jupiter
C Mercury
D Venus
A its mass
B its motion
C its shape
D its size
8 A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. Three
forces of size P, Q and R act on the plank.
P R
plank
A P+Q=R
B P+R=Q
C P=Q=R
D P=Q+R
Which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?
A coal
B geothermal
C hydroelectric
D nuclear
10 Four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.
pavement
slipway
sea wall
beach
11 The diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram
shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. There is a vacuum above the
mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube?
vacuum A
B
C
glass
tubes
D
dish
mercury dish
12 A student fills two containers with water (density 1.0 g / cm3) and two with oil (density 0.8 g / cm3),
as shown in the diagrams.
A B C D
water oil
water oil
13 In an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. The temperature of the
remaining liquid changes because of this.
What is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change?
A condensation decreases
B condensation increases
C evaporation decreases
D evaporation increases
14 A piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. Initially the piston is halfway along the
length of the cylinder.
The piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. The temperature of the gas
remains constant.
initial position
final position
How are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston?
density pressure
A decreases decreases
B decreases unchanged
C increases decreases
D increases unchanged
D
temperature
C
time
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy
(heat).
A B C D
After the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest
temperature be?
B C
A D
wood copper
19 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the
broken line.
A B
fast slow fast slow
C D
fast slow fast slow
1 2
ripple tank
drum
3 4
A 1 only
B 1, 2 and 4
C 2 and 3 only
D 2 and 4 only
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
22 The diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through a principal focus F of a lens.
Which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?
lens
ray
of
lig
ht
A
F F’
D C
23 A small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.
land sea
waves
small
boat
harbour
harbour
walls
Some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
P Z
Y
DANGER - X
BLASTING
V W
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other. The second bang is an echo.
From which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo?
A XY B PV C ZY D WX
25 The north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end P of an iron bar PQ, as shown. As a result,
magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar.
S N P Q
A north north
B north south
C south north
D south south
A α-particle
B electron
C neutron
D proton
28 Using the circuit shown, the current I is found for various voltages V. The temperature of the
resistor does not change.
variable direct
voltage
V
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
4.0 V
X A A Y
3.0 Ω 5.0 Ω
A B
C D
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
A C D
32 Either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that
could cause overheating.
X cable
live
electrical
Y appliance
supply
neutral
cable
If a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is
used, in which position should it be connected?
position position of
of fuse circuit-breaker
A X X
B X Y
C Y X
D Y Y
33 The current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25 A. The flexible cable to the lamp is designed for
currents up to 5.0 A, so it can safely carry the 0.25 A taken by the lamp.
Which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable?
34 A wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. There
are four compasses near the wire.
Which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?
A C
wire with
current out
of page
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An alternating
voltage of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V
A α-particles
B electrons
C protons
D tungsten atoms
screen
bottom Y plate
How many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the α-particle?
39 The graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.
2500
count rate
counts / min
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / days
16
40 7N is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.
A 7 B 9 C 16 D 23
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/11/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2009
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*7565115686*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB09 11_0625_01/4RP
© UCLES 2009 [Turn over
2
1 A stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100 m. The timekeeper forgets to reset the watch
to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100 m.
60 60
55 5 55 5
50 10 50 10
45 15 45 15
40 seconds 20 40 seconds 20
35 25 35 25
30 30
stopwatch at stopwatch at
end of first end of second
athlete’s run athlete’s run
3 A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows the car’s speed plotted against time.
speed
m/s
20
0
0 10 time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed?
A 10 m B 20 m C 100 m D 200 m
A density
B mass
C volume
D weight
What happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?
mass weight
A decreases decreases
B decreases stays the same
C stays the same decreases
D stays the same stays the same
liquid
4 cm
6 cm
5 cm
mass = 40 g total mass = 220 g
The box has a mass of 40 g when empty. When filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220 g.
A 220 g / cm3
(5 × 6 × 4)
(220 − 40)
B g / cm3
(5 × 6 × 4)
C (5 × 6 × 4) g / cm3
220
(5 × 6 × 4)
D g / cm3
(220 − 40)
7 Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
8 The object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown.
3N 2N
object
microphone
A chemical electrical
B electrical chemical
C electrical sound
D sound electrical
10 The table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs.
A 40 10
B 40 20
C 60 10
D 60 20
11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm
12 The diagrams show two swimming pools. One contains fresh water and the other contains salt
water. Salt water is more dense than fresh water.
A C
B D
fresh water (less dense) salt water (more dense)
14 A small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer
tube.
15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are
needed.
A room temperature
B the temperature inside a freezer
C the temperature of pure melting ice
D the temperature of pure warm water
16 The table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene.
glycerine 18 °C 290 °C
benzene 5.4 °C 80 °C
A 0 °C B 50 °C C 100 °C D 150 °C
X water
Which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves electromagnetic
A infra-red no
B infra-red yes
C visible light no
D visible light yes
A
B
D
X Y
Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the
region between X and Y.
A B C D
X Y
Which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle?
air
glass C
i D
ray of
light
A
B
f f
C
D
A 20 Hz – 2000 Hz
B 20 Hz – 20 000 Hz
C 200 Hz – 2000 Hz
D 200 Hz – 20 000 Hz
24 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no air in
space.
hammer
astronaut 1 astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A a louder sound
B a quieter sound
C a sound of the same loudness
D no sound at all
25 A permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. The copper is not attracted by the
magnet.
26 Four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown
in the diagram.
A D
S N N S
27 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
28 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
29 The diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. Three ammeters M1, M2 and
M3 are connected in the circuit.
M1 A A M3
A
M2
reading on M2 / A reading on M3 / A
A 0.5 0.0
B 0.5 0.5
C 0.5 1.0
D 1.0 1.0
30 The diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic
case
brass
connecting switch
strip lamp
A B C D
thermometer
water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
What is component X?
A a capacitor
B a light-dependent resistor
C a relay
D a thermistor
32 A certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. The appliance normally uses a
current of 3 A, but the current briefly rises to 4 A at the instant the appliance is switched on. The
cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6 A.
A 1A B 3A C 5A D 13 A
33 On a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. A builder holds a
mains-operated electric drill in one hand. With his other hand he holds on to the scaffolding.
The power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill.
34 Which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current
(d.c.)?
A a generator
B a motor
C a relay
D a transformer
100 V 10 V
What are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil?
A 100 1000
B 200 110
C 400 490
D 800 80
beam
A downwards
B upwards
C into the page
D out of the page
37 To create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect
between the cathode and anode?
A 6 V a.c.
B 6 V d.c.
C 600 V a.c.
D 600 V d.c.
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
2 mm of 10 mm lead
plastic of aluminium
X Y Z
238
40 How many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of 92 U ?
neutrons protons
A 92 146
B 146 92
C 146 238
D 238 92
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2010
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*0334676086*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB10 06_0625_11/4RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
1 A scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. Only a rule
and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.
cm3
cm
measuring
cylinder
2 A student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. The runner runs two
laps (twice around the track). The diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner
starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.
What is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?
3 Two distance / time graphs and two speed / time graphs are shown.
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
P Q R
0 2 cm 12
A 12 cm / s
20
B 12 − 2 cm / s
20
C 20 cm / s
12
D 20 cm / s
12 − 2
5 Two blocks of metal X and Y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.
N0 N0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
X
Y
A They have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.
B They have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.
C They have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.
D They have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.
6 The graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet P and on planet Q.
400
planet P
weight / N
300
planet Q
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80
mass / kg
A 40 200
B 40 400
C 80 200
D 80 400
3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
A 2g B 6g C 14 g D 24 g
A When an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
B When an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.
C When an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
D When an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.
9 An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
load / N 0 1 2 3
length / cm 15.2 16.2 18.6
extension / cm 0 1.0 2.1 3.4
A chemical chemical
B chemical internal (thermal)
C electrical chemical
D electrical internal (thermal)
What other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?
12 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer
board
soft ground
pressure to
be measured
h
mercury
The mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.
A It becomes zero.
B It decreases, but not to zero.
C It stays the same.
D It increases.
14 The diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.
A They expand.
B They hit the walls less often.
C They move further apart.
D They move more quickly.
15 A liquid is left in an open dish. After several days there is less liquid in the dish.
A The least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
B The least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
C The most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
D The most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
16 A thermometer has a scale which starts at –10 °C and ends at 110 °C.
°C
What is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?
A –10 100
B –10 110
C 0 100
D 0 110
17 A student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. The graph shows how the
temperature of the wax changes as it cools.
X
temperature
/ °C
Y
melting point
of wax Z
0
0
time
18 Hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. This is because some methods of heat
transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.
19 A teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.
She holds a smoking taper at point P.
In which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?
P
A C
chimney chimney D
A B C D
88:88
21 A navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.
navigation
buoy
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. The angle i is bigger
than the critical angle.
Which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?
normal
ray of
D
light
i
glass
air
C
A
B
23 Which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?
A B
camera camera
object object
image image
lens lens
C D
camera camera
object object
image image
lens lens
24 What is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?
25 A police car siren emits two different sounds P and Q. These are produced alternately. The
diagram represents the sounds emitted.
P P P
displacement
Q Q
time
Which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?
A P P
B P Q
C Q P
D Q Q
iron
N S
A N S S N
B N S N S
C S N S N
D S N N S
electromagnet
N S
steel iron
What happens?
28 The table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.
length / m diameter / mm
A 0.50 1.0
B 0.50 2.5
C 0.75 1.0
D 0.75 2.5
29 A circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor R. The meter readings are 2.0 A and
3.0 V.
A
V
X
output
What is component X?
A a light-dependent resistor
B a relay
C a thermistor
D a variable resistor
A B
C D
32 Which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?
A lamp
neutral wire
fuse
fuse
live wire switch
B lamp
neutral wire
fuse
live wire
C lamp
neutral wire
switch
live wire
D lamp
neutral wire
fuse switch
33 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.
A a fire
B a fuse will blow
C an electric shock
D no current will flow
34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.
soft iron
coil
How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
35 A transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.
Connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?
A to convert the 8000 V a.c. output of a power station to 160 000 V for long-distance power
transmission
B to convert the 160 000 V d.c. supply from a power line to 8000 V for local power transmission
C to use a 12 V d.c. supply to operate a 240 V razor
D to use a 240 V a.c. mains supply to operate a 12 V motor
A a beam of electrons
B a beam of neutrons
C a beam of protons
D electromagnetic waves
Which row shows the charge on the anode and the temperature of the cathode?
cathode
anode charge
temperature
A negative cool
B negative hot
C positive cool
D positive hot
A large no
B large yes
C small no
D small yes
A 0 B 88 C 138 D 226
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2010
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*0588341704*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB10 11_0625_11/3RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
10 cm3 10 cm3
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2 stone
1 1
2 Four athletes run twice around a track. The table shows their times at the end of each lap.
A 22.99 47.04
B 23.04 47.00
C 23.16 47.18
D 23.39 47.24
3 The diagram shows the speed / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
5 km
Q 10 km
T
5 km
10 km
R
P
6 The reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0 N.
N0 spring N0
balance
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
holder
for discs
two
discs
eight
discs
7 A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.
Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?
Which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?
A a change in direction
B a change in mass
C a change in shape
D a change in speed
9 The extension / load graph for a spring is shown. The unloaded length of the spring is 15.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
When an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4 cm.
A a capacitor
B a generator
C a motor
D a transformer
11 A car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. The car stops several times on the
journey and its engine becomes hot.
13 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
A B C D
15 A block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. The
water evaporates from the newspaper.
Which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water
molecules that remain in the newspaper?
A B
solid liquid gas
C D
17 A beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.
No water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. After 15 minutes some ice is still
visible.
ice ice
water
A B
temperature temperature
/ °C / °C
0 0
0 5 10 15 0 5 10 15
time / min time / min
C D
temperature temperature
/ °C / °C
0 0
0 5 10 15 0 5 10 15
time / min time / min
18 A piece of wood has some iron nails pushed through it. One side of the wood is covered with heat
sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. The wood is heated as shown for a
few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.
iron blue
heat
nails dots
A absorber of heat.
B conductor of heat.
C convector of heat.
D emitter of heat.
19 An electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. The diagram shows four
possible positions for the box.
A B C D
heater heater
box box
plastic block
tank
LEFT
She looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.
A B C D
23 A scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of
the block. However, some light does leave the top.
glass block
X
ray of
light
The scientist changes angle X and stops the ray of light leaving the top.
Which row in the table describes the change to angle X and the name of the effect produced?
wave P wave Q
displacement displacement
time time
How do the frequency and pitch of P compare with the frequency and pitch of Q?
frequency of P pitch of P
25 A ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. An echo is heard
0.4 seconds later.
If the speed of sound in the water is 1200 m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?
27 A chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. The chains are then
carefully removed from the magnet.
magnet
steel iron
resistor
current
p.d.
The p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.
Which row shows two changes that will both increase the current in the resistor?
change change
29 The diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.
ammeter ammeter
A A
X Y
R1 R2 R3
A ammeter X only
B ammeter Y only
C both ammeter X and ammeter Y
D neither ammeter X nor ammeter Y
30 Which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?
A a capacitor
B a potentiometer
C a resistor
D a thermistor
R
P
2Ω
Q
4Ω
V1 20 Ω
12 V
V2 R
reading on V1 reading on V2
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
How does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for
the appliance?
34 Some electrical equipment is connected to a 230 V supply. It is kept inside a metal case which is
not earthed. The case is fixed to a plastic support. A strand of wire has become loose and
touches the metal case as shown.
cable
strand of wire
electrical
equipment
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope.
N S oscilloscope
contact
contact
A B C D
V V V V
t t t t
36 A village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the
village.
Cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.
cathode
rays
In which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?
A downwards
B upwards
C into the page
D out of the page
The number of emissions per second, N, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain
time.
A 0 B N/2 C N D 2N
S detector
5 cm
40 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
central
mass
orbiting
particles
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
A neutron α-particles
B neutron electrons
C nucleus α-particles
D nucleus electrons
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2011
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*3129497903*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB11 06_0625_11/4RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
1 The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
10 20 30
mm
cm 1 2 3
A 19 mm B 29 mm C 19 cm D 29 cm
2 An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40 s later hears the echo from a wall.
5 The diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. The weight of the basket
can be ignored.
centre of mass
of beam
pivot
W
baby
basket
A less than W
B more than W
C W
D impossible to tell
2.0 cm
balance
7.2 g
7 Objects with different masses are hung on a spring. The diagram shows how much the spring
stretches.
10 cm
20 cm
30 cm
100 g
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
A gravitational the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track
B internal the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube
C kinetic the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a
high diving board
D strain the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat
A hydroelectric
B nuclear fission
C tides
D waves
10 Two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. All the bales of hay have the
same mass.
bale of hay
As sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a
given time.
How does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?
A increases decreases
B increases increases
C no change decreases
D no change increases
brick
table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force pressure
A increased increased
B increased unchanged
C unchanged increased
D unchanged unchanged
mercury
point X point Y
A The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
B The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
C The pressure at point X is less than the pressure at point Y.
D The pressure at point X is the same as the pressure at point Y.
What happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the
cylinder as the temperature rises?
average speed of
gas pressure
the gas molecules
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises
14 When a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.
From where do the molecules escape and what is the effect on the temperature of the liquid?
°C
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
–10
What are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the Celsius scale?
A –10 110
B 0 20
C 0 100
D 20 100
After a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8 °C.
A 0 °C B 2 °C C 4 °C D 8 °C
17 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.
Balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.
diagram 1 diagram 2
A B C D
18 Food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.
Where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?
For each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?
A no no yes
B no yes no
C yes no no
D yes yes yes
In two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.
wave P
crests
Why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?
A The frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
B The frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
C The speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
D The speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
screen
image
lens
candle
Various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen
backwards and forwards.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
24 A student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. He can only hear one
of the sounds.
A 2 Hz B 10 Hz C 2 kHz D 30 kHz
25 Which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?
26 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
27 An ammeter and an 18 Ω resistor are connected in series with a battery. The reading on the
ammeter is 0.50 A. The resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.
18 Ω
A 9.0 N B 9.0 V C 36 N D 36 V
29 Which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?
what the
circuit
capacitor does
31 The diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the
thermistor.
The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.
resistance
temperature
As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the
reading on the voltmeter?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
32 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a
fault.
electrical supply
33 Which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
time time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
time time
34 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. The coil is
connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring
moving magnet
N
centre-zero ammeter
stationary coil S
What does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?
B C D
power
supply
Y vacuum
screen
X
X Y
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage
d.c. power supply.
C
+ + + + + +
D
cathode B
rays
38 Which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of α-particles and
β-particles?
A 0 mg B 40 mg C 100 mg D 200 mg
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
A B
– –
n + +
+ + +
+ n n key
n = a neutron
– –
+ = a proton
–
– = an electron
C D (not to scale)
– –
– –
n n
+n+ +n+
n n n n
+ +
– –
– –
–
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2011
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*1240126518*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB11 11_0625_11/3RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
object
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
cm
2 The graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.
speed
0
U V W X Y time
A 10 m B 27 m C 30 m D 90 m
4 The weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.
object
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan.
These are the results.
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
A B
8 cm 3 cm
1 cm 3 cm
2 cm 2 cm
C D
5 cm
2 cm
4 cm
3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
6 A student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.
Which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?
7 A uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. The rod is not attached to the pivot. Forces are then
applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. The weight of the rod can be ignored.
A B
100 N
C D
100 N
8 Which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?
A B C D
5N 4N 6N 5N
10 N 5N 10 N 7N
2N 3N 4N 3N
9 A student adds weights to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each weight.
0
0 1 2 3 4 weight / N
A measured length
B original length
C (measured length – original length)
D (measured length + original length)
F p
d
loa
The work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.
A p B q C r D p+q
gas
supply
initial level 10 cm
of water 10 cm
water
When it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.
The difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20 cm.
12 A chair is placed on protective cups to prevent damage to the carpet underneath it.
chair
carpet
protective cups
How do the cups change the area of contact with the carpet and the pressure on it?
A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased
13 Evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. During this
process the temperature of the liquid falls.
14 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A pure alcohol.
B pure distilled water.
C pure melting ice.
D pure mercury.
16 The diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical
beaker of oil for several minutes.
water oil
electric heater
The temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. The rise in
temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.
Why is this?
cooling
unit
thermometer
hot water
copper can
wool
One can is insulated with wool. The temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute
for several minutes. Graphs of the results are plotted.
A B
temperature temperature
insulated
insulated uninsulated
uninsulated
time time
C D
insulated
temperature temperature
uninsulated
uninsulated
insulated
time time
A infra-red
B radio
C sound
D water
radio
waves
house
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A diffracted.
B radiated.
C reflected.
D refracted.
21 The diagram shows a ray of light travelling from X. Angle P is less than the critical angle.
P
glass A
air
B
D
C
23 A student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. She plans to measure the time between
making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.
cliff
student
24 The diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. The scales are the same in each
diagram.
time time
sound 1 sound 2
N S
iron bar
Which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the
forces between the bar and the magnet?
A N S attraction
B N S repulsion
C S N attraction
D S N repulsion
26 Four nails, A, B, C and D, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.
nail
N S
bar magnet
paper clips
One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can
support is recorded. The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining
attached to the nail is recorded. Each nail is tested in turn.
A 2 0
B 2 1
C 4 3
D 5 2
27 Which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?
A A W
B A Ω
C C W
D C Ω
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
29 The diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, X, Y and Z, all connected
correctly.
X Z
X Y Z
A B
4Ω 2Ω 2Ω
C D
4Ω
4Ω 4Ω
4Ω
31 The diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps L1 and L2.
X L1
K
Y L2
The contact K is halfway between X and Y and the lamps are equally bright.
What will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact K is moved a short distance
towards X?
lamp L1 lamp L2
A brighter brighter
B brighter dimmer
C dimmer brighter
D dimmer dimmer
Which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?
33 Which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a
current out of the page?
A B
current out
of page
C D
current out
of page
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
output voltage
With the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V.
core
input output
A aluminium
B copper
C iron
D steel
36 Cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. They consist of particles that are found in atoms.
What is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?
37 Two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power
supply. A beam of cathode rays is passed into the space between the two plates, as shown.
high-voltage
power supply
+ –
metal plate
B
A
C metal plate
cathode rays D
Which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?
A keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible
B keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible
C keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible
D placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
2000
activity
/ counts per
second
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3
time / hour
1
A hour B 1 hour C 1 1 hours D 3 hours
2 2
26
40 A nuclide of substance X has the symbol 12 X .
A 12 B 14 C 26 D 38
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2012
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*9772978782*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB12 06_0625_11/3RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
can rolled
mark on
can
0 cm 5 10 15 20 25 30 cm
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 In a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6 km track. This takes 2.4 hours.
A density
B energy
C pressure
D weight
5 A geologist places a small rock on the left-hand pan of a balance. The two pans are level as
shown when masses with a total weight of 23 N are placed on the right-hand pan.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N.
rock masses
A 0.25 g / cm3
B 1.5 g / cm3
C 2.5 g / cm3
D 4.0 g / cm3
7 Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
8 The diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100 N, applied to it. The handle is free to
move.
100 N
100 N
100 N
handle
pivot
thread
X Z
Y
An incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.
A chemical
B gravitational potential
C internal
D strain
12 The diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.
Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
gas
mercury
20 cm
12 cm
A 56 cm of mercury
B 68 cm of mercury
C 84 cm of mercury
D 96 cm of mercury
13 Brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope.
14 The molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly.
15 Which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with temperature and so could be used in
making a thermometer?
16 A heater supplies 80 J of energy to a block of metal. The temperature of the block rises by 20 °C.
What happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10 °C?
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top, as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench
A hertz
B metre
C metre per second
D second
A longitudinal longitudinal
B longitudinal transverse
C transverse longitudinal
D transverse transverse
22 The diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. The waves curve
round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.
harbour wall
waves
harbour
gap
boat
What is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are
less likely to reach the boat?
position
object of image
eye
A no yes yes
B yes no no
C yes no yes
D yes yes no
24 A student draws three rays of light from point P through a converging lens.
P ray X
F F
ray Z ray Y
A ray Y only
B ray Z only
C ray X and ray Y
D ray X and ray Z
25 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
26 The diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. The scales are the same
for all the diagrams.
A time
B time
C time
D time
A cooling it in a freezer
B earthing it with a copper wire
C placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)
D striking it repeatedly with a hammer
A ampere
B ohm
C volt
D watt
30 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
X
0
V 0 current
A a capacitor
B a closed switch
C an open switch
D a resistor of constant resistance
A B
C D
R
V
T
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C It remains at 0 V.
D It remains at 12 V.
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
160
time taken
140
to break the
circuit / s 120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current 18 A?
A the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
B the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit does not break
C the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
D the circuit does not break the circuit does not break
35 The diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. Two unmagnetised iron bars hang
freely near opposite ends of the coil.
coil
X Y
36 A wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. There is a current in the wire in the
direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.
magnet
current
N
wire S
force
Three other arrangements, P, Q and R, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.
P Q R
S N S
N S N
Which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original
arrangement?
cathode
anode
β-particle
nucleus
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
2 mm of 10 mm of 50 mm
plastic aluminium of lead
X Y Z
A B C D
key
– – – –
neutron
++ ++ + proton
+ ++
+ – electron
– – –
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
PHYSICS 0625/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2012
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*8913251826*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
IB12 11_0625_11/3RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
1 A pendulum is set in motion and timed. The time measured for 20 complete swings is 30 s.
2 Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
A both stones hit the floor at the same time acceleration of free fall is constant
B both stones hit the floor at the same time they fall at constant speed
C the heavier stone hits the floor first acceleration increases with weight
D the heavier stone hits the floor first speed increases with weight
C
speed
A D
time
4 A large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.
What does this show about the masses and the weights of the bag of feathers and the steel
block?
A It shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.
B It shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.
C It shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.
D It shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.
A 0 kg
B between 0 kg and 70 kg
C 70 kg
D greater than 70 kg
A 2.0 16
B 8.0 10
C 10 8.0
D 16 2.0
7 The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
A B C D
8 A see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel.
A boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is
balanced.
x y
boy girl
A chemical energy.
B electrical energy.
C gravitational energy.
D thermal (heat) energy.
boxes
platform
Which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?
11 A skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10 000 J of gravitational potential
energy.
She skis down the slope. At the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000 J.
How much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved
down the slope?
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
A 25 cm B 75 cm C 80 cm D 100 cm
13 A heavy table has six legs. The area of cross-section of each leg is X.
The legs of the table make marks in a carpet. These marks become deeper with increased
pressure.
What would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight?
14 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
Looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky
manner.
eye
microscope
light
pollen grains
in water
15 A swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.
Why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?
D
temperature
C
time
18 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the
night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.
Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to
be stored by the block?
A large large
B large small
C small large
D small small
19 After a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls.
A Air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.
B Air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection.
C The wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.
D The wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.
20 A boy sits near a campfire. He pokes the fire with an iron bar. His hand becomes hot.
iron bar
In which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand?
A
D
22 A swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. He notices that five
complete wavelengths pass him in 20 s.
object
image
F F
can be formed
nature of image
on a screen?
A not real no
B not real yes
C real no
D real yes
back of
mirror
PAL
A B C D
PAL PAL
PAL LAP
25 A girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
26 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.
What information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave
produced?
amplitude frequency
S N P Q
Which row states and explains the behaviour of poles P and Q of the soft iron bars?
P and Q reason
28 Some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a
second.
A an electromagnet only
B a permanent magnet only
C either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet
D neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet
A a beam of atoms
B a beam of electrons
C a beam of molecules
D a beam of neutrons
12 V
P R
P Q R
Which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?
A 1 and 2 only
B 1 and 3 only
C 1, 3 and 4 only
D 2, 3 and 4 only
V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
reading on P reading on Q
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
34 An electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. The wires
become very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
35 Which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
0 0
time time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
36 The diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet.
magnet
N S
wire
The current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a
constant value in the opposite direction. This is shown on the graph.
current
0
0 time
A The force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.
B The force on the wire is constant in size and direction.
C There is no force acting on the wire at any time.
D There is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.
cathode rays
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
– +
38 How does the ionising effect of α-particles compare with that of β-particles and γ-rays?
A α-particles are less strongly ionising α-particles are less strongly ionising
B α-particles are less strongly ionising α-particles are more strongly ionising
C α-particles are more strongly ionising α-particles are less strongly ionising
D α-particles are more strongly ionising α-particles are more strongly ionising
39 The table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. The measurements were
taken at noon on four consecutive days.
A 100 48 27 11
B 200 142 99 69
C 300 297 292 290
D 400 202 99 48
A It contains 6 neutrons.
B It contains 6 electrons.
C It contains 8 protons.
D It contains 14 nucleons.
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
2
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
Monday 24 MAY 1999 Afternoon 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
0 cm 5 10 15 20 25 30
Fig. 1.1
A child measures the time the insect takes to walk from the 5 cm mark to the 25 cm mark. It
takes 50 s to do this.
0625/2/S99
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 (a) A uniform beam AB of weight W is balanced at its midpoint on a pivot. Two weights W1
topiccentreofmass
topiccentre
topicmass
and W2 are then hung at equal distances from the midpoint of the beam.
A B
pivot
W2 W1
Fig. 2.1
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which way would W1 have to be moved so that the beam is again balanced?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) W2 is removed from the beam. This means that the only forces acting downwards on
the beam are the weight W of the beam and W1.
A B
W W1
Fig. 2.2
On Fig. 2.2, mark a possible position for the pivot to be placed so that the beam is
again balanced. [2]
(b) State how the molecules of substance X move in the solid state and in the gaseous
state.
4 Here are some statements about energy. Complete the statements using words from the
topicwork
topicworkandpower
topicpower
following list.
(b) When a ball falls from rest, its .............................................. energy increases
(c) The source of energy, in which hot rocks under the Earth’s surface heat water
0625/2/S99
5 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the graph you would expect to get if you plotted values of the
topiccircuits
potential difference V across a metallic conductor at constant temperature and the
current I through it.
[2]
V/V
0
0 I/A
Fig. 5.1
(b) How would you use the graph to find the resistance of the conductor?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
glass prism
narrow beam
of white light
Fig. 6.1
(a) What name do we give to the process by which the white light is split up into colours?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What name do we give to the band of colours seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What colour is seen at the edge of the band of colours closer to A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A thin sheet of clear red plastic is put in the path of the light before the light reaches
the prism. What is now seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
7 For
Examiner's
Use
7 A student wraps a length of fine wire around a wood block and hangs the block between
topicforce
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicfield
topicconductor
topicmagnetic
the poles of a magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
fine wire
wood block
Fig. 7.1
(a) What is seen to happen when the student passes a current through the fine wire?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) radioactive sources emitting -rays should be stored in lead boxes with thick sides,
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) the radiation symbol should be displayed on the cupboard or drawer in which
radioactive materials are kept.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
500 sheets
of paper
0.3 m 0.2 m
0.05 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the volume of the pile of 500 sheets,
volume = ............................................
(ii) the density of the paper.
density = ............................................
[6]
(b) An object of mass 1 kg has a weight of 10 N. Calculate the weight of one pile of paper.
0625/2/S99
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) The pressure exerted by the pile of paper when it is on a table is given by
force
pressure = –––– .
area
(d) Another pile of the same paper contains only 250 sheets.
(i) How does the mass of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) How does the density of the paper in this pile compare with that of paper in the
first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) How does the weight of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) How does the pressure exerted by this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, describe carefully the steps you would take in order to measure
the extension of the spring when the load is hanging on it. You may draw a diagram if
this helps you to answer the question.
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
[5]
(b) You also have a range of other loads which you can hang on to the spring. Equal
increases in load cause equal increases in length. Using the maximum load from this
range, the spring returns to its original length when this load is removed. On Fig. 10.2,
sketch the extension / load graph you would expect to obtain with the spring as the load
is increased. Label this line “GRAPH 1”. [2]
extension
0
0
load
Fig. 10.2
0625/2/S99
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) The first spring is replaced with a second spring and the experiment is repeated. The
second spring does not stretch as much as the first spring when the same load is hung
on it.
Fig. 10.3
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The first spring is replaced by the second spring, and the same force F stretches
the spring. How does the motion of the trolley compare with your answer to (d)(i)?
Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) On your diagram in (i), mark clearly, using the letter h, the length you would
measure to determine the physical quantity named in (ii). [2]
0625/2/S99
13 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a
container.
30
25
20
15
gas
10
5
mercury
Fig. 11.1
............................. cm [1]
(ii) What does the difference in height of the mercury levels indicate?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State whether the gas pressure is greater than or less than the atmospheric
pressure and how you know this.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) What would happen to the two mercury levels if the gas pressure increased
slightly?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) The mercury manometer is replaced by another manometer that contains a liquid
of lower density. How, if at all, does this affect the difference between the liquid
levels?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
cathode anode B C
screen
A
filament
H
G F E D
Fig. 12.1
(i) Between which two points would you connect a low potential difference in order to
heat the cathode?
0625/2/S99
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) When the time base of a cathode-ray oscilloscope is turned on, there is a horizontal
trace across the screen, as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Fig. 12.2
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) A microphone is connected to another cathode-ray oscilloscope, with the time base
switched to a suitable setting. First, a lady with a high-pitched voice sings into the
microphone. Then a man with a low-pitched voice sings into the microphone. Describe
how the traces seen on the screen would differ.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/S99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
Friday 12 NOVEMBER 1999 Morning 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
2 cm
8 cm
5 cm
Fig. 1.1
[3]
0625/2/W99
3 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) The water is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.2. On Fig. 1.2, mark
the level of the water surface in the measuring cylinder when this has been done. [1]
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Fig. 1.2
Y
B
C
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark the position of the centre of mass of the shape, using a clear dot (●).
[1]
(b) On Fig. 2.1, draw a line through C which would be vertical if the shape were to be
freely hung from C. [1]
0625/2/W99
5 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Magnet A is put on a smooth (frictionless) horizontal table, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
topicmagnet
N S
magnet A
Fig. 3.1
N S N S
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 3.2
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
N S S N
magnet A magnet C
Fig. 3.3
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
N S
magnet A iron bar
Fig. 3.4
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
N S
magnet A plastic rod
Fig. 3.5
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
7 For
Examiner's
Use
4 A person walks from A to E, a journey which goes over the top of the hill BCD, as shown in
topicenergytransformations
topicenergy
in Fig. 4.1.
topictransformations
A B D E
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) During which part of the walk does the person do most work? Tick one box.
AB
BC
CD
DE
(ii) Explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) The person now runs over the hill from A to E. How does the average power
developed by the person compare with that when the person walked? Tick one box.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
battery
switch
bell
Fig. 5.1
(a) Draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
(b) A second bell is now connected in parallel with the first bell.
(i) Copy your circuit diagram from (a) and add the second bell.
(ii) Why will the battery run out more quickly when the switch has been pushed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/W99
9 For
Examiner's
Use
6 A ray of yellow light enters a rectangular glass block at A and leaves it at B, as shown in
topicdispersion
Fig. 6.1.
glass block
ray of
yellow light
Fig. 6.1
(b) At B on Fig. 6.1, draw carefully the ray of light which emerges from the glass block. [2]
element
Fig. 7.1
Explain why the heating element is placed near the bottom of the kettle.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
................................................................... [3]
9 (a) Light from an illuminated slit passes through two lenses A and B and forms a focused
topicdensity
topicpressure
topicvolume
topiclens
topicrefraction
image on a screen, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
screen
lens lens
A B
slit
source
of
light
Fig. 9.1
0625/2/W99
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) In Fig. 9.2, O is an object placed with its base on the axis of a lens, and PF is the focal
length of the lens.
P F
Fig. 9.2
(i) Use your rule to draw two rays from the top of the object, through the lens, which
meet at the top of the image. [5]
(ii) Draw in the image, and label it I. [1]
(iii) Put ticks in the boxes alongside the statements which correctly describe your
image.
real
upright
inverted
Fig. 10.1
(b) Explain why the coils of a transformer are made of copper, rather than some other
metal.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A transformer has 500 turns in its primary coil, and 1500 turns in its secondary coil.
Energy losses from the transformer are so small that they may be neglected.
V N
(i) Use the equation ––s = ––s to calculate the potential difference across the
s e c o n d a r y
Vp Np
coil when an alternating potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the secondary coil when a
steady (d.c.) potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(d) Another transformer has the same number of turns on its primary coil as it has on its
secondary coil. An alternating potential difference is supplied across the primary coil.
State the size of the output potential difference compared with the input potential
difference.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
13 For
Examiner's
Use
11 (a) In the table below, write two different physical properties which may be used to
topicthermometer
measure temperature. An example has been given to help you.
OF
[4]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In the table below, state the upper and lower fixed points used when calibrating a
liquid-in-glass thermometer with a centigrade temperature scale.
[5]
temperature / °C
0
time / min
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1,
(i) label the melting point and the boiling point of the substance,
(ii) indicate the time when the substance is completely liquid.
[3]
0625/2/W99
15 For
Examiner's
Use
12 A football is inflated by pumping air into it.
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
topicray
(a) Describe the behaviour of an air molecule in the middle of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Using a diagram, describe the behaviour of the molecule near the inside surface of the
football.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Use your answer to explain how air molecules create the pressure on the inside of the
football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) When the football is left in the Sun’s rays, it gets hot. Describe what happens to the air
molecules, and how this affects the pressure of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/W99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
“When potatoes are bought in a market, the weight of a bag full of potatoes is affected by the
density of the potatoes. A lady fills her bag when she buys 5 kg of large potatoes. A man
buys 5 kg of small potatoes. He puts them in a bag of the same size as the lady’s, but his bag
is not filled.”
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest one reason why the man’s 5 kg of potatoes occupies less volume than the
lady’s potatoes.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
Fig. 2.1
(a) State three processes by which the dish and its contents could lose heat to the
surroundings.
1. ...................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Describe one way of reducing the heat loss to the surroundings.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 You are given an iron bar, a reel of insulated wire, a battery and some wire cutters.
topicmagnet
(a) In the space below, describe how you would make an electromagnet. You may use a
labelled diagram if it helps you to answer the question.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) How would you check that your electromagnet actually works?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
T torch
S
water
39° 55°
A B
Fig. 4.1
(a) At S, the direction of the beam changes. State the name we use to describe this change.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the same pool and the same points A, B, S and T. The critical angle for
the water is 50°.
S
water
39° 55°
A B
Fig. 4.2
(i) A beam of light is directed up from B to S. On Fig. 4.2, carefully draw the path of
the ray from B to S and then out into the air.
(ii) 1. A beam of light is directed up from A to S. Describe what happens to the beam
at S.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 A man is watching a thunderstorm which is directly over a village. Some distance behind the
topiclight
topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicspeed
village is a mountain.
cloud mountain
lightning
village
man
Fig. 5.1
(a) Thunder is created at the same time as the lightning flash but, after the man sees a
lightning flash, he has to wait a short time before he hears the thunder.
Why is there this delay?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) When he listens carefully, the man realises that, for each lightning flash, he can hear a
loud sound of thunder followed by a quieter one.
(i) After studying Fig. 5.1, explain why he hears two sounds for each lightning flash.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
6 Some smoke is mixed with the air in a glass box. The box is lit brightly from the side and its
topicbrownian
topicbrownianmotion
topicmotion
contents studied from above through a microscope.
bright light
Fig. 6.1
(a) Bright specks are seen moving in continuous and jerky random movement.
air molecules
smoke molecules
smoke particles
0625/2 S00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) What is the explanation for the jerky random movement? Tick one box.
(b) The contents of the glass box exert a pressure on the glass walls.
Tick any of the following sentences which might help explain this pressure.
reservoir
dam
(iii) The water rotates the
pipe
………………………………
(i) This water has so that the generator
produces
………………………
energy because ………………………………
of its height. energy.
Fig. 7.1
1. ...................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 This question deals with the decay of a radioactive source.
topicradioactivity
The radioactive source has a count rate of 640 counts/minute at the start of an experiment.
This value has been plotted on Fig. 8.1.
600
500
counts / minute
400
count rate
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / minutes
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) What would you expect the count rate to be after 20 minutes?
............................................... counts/minute
(b) (i) What would you expect the count rate to be after a further 20 minutes
(i.e. 40 minutes after the start of the experiment)?
............................................... counts/minute
(c) Plot two further points which might be expected if the decay curve were perfect. [1]
(d) Draw a smooth curve through all five points on your graph. [1]
90 minutes
100 minutes
120 minutes
(f) In a real experiment, the values found for the count rates might not all lie exactly on a
smooth curve. One reason for this might be experimental error. State one other reason.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
A B C D
Fig. 9.1
(i) Which leg is least likely to mark the floor underneath it? ...............
(ii) Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) A hot flat metal sheet is placed on a horizontal surface.
A C
Fig. 9.2
As the hot metal sheet cools, what happens to the quantities in the list below?
Tick one answer for each.
length AB
width BC
thickness CD
area touching the
horizontal surface
mass of sheet
weight of sheet
density of metal
pressure on
horizontal surface
[6]
shown.
V
uniform
resistance
wire
A 0.5 m B 0.5 m C
crocodile clip
Fig. 10.1
voltmeter reading 12 V
(b) The laboratory technician now connects the crocodile clip to C, to measure the
resistance of 1 m of the wire. The wire has constant thickness.
(i) In the spaces below, write the readings he obtains. Ignore the effects of the
resistance of the ammeter, voltmeter and battery.
0625/2 S00
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) What is the resistance of wire AC?
(ii) What length of wire does the laboratory technician need for the 64 Ω resistor?
gamma (γ)
infra-red
radio
sound
ultra-violet
visible
X-rays
(a) Which one of these is the only one which is not part of the electromagnetic spectrum?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Which one of these makes us feel warm when the Sun shines?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) (i)
Fig. 11.1
On the moon, two astronauts cannot hear each other, even when they shout,
unless they have their radios switched on.
1. Why cannot they hear each other even when they shout?
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
(ii) Which type of wave is used to carry messages from the astronauts to mission
control on Earth?
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 The hammers A and B shown in Fig. 12.1 consist of steel hammer-heads of different weights
fitted to identical wooden handles.
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topicray
topiccathode
A B
hammer handle
-head
nail
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i) Which hammer-head causes the greater moment about the end of the handle
when the hammer is held horizontally, as shown in Fig. 12.1?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Which hammer-head requires the greater work to lift it a distance of 30 cm from the
position shown?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) If you wanted to estimate the power developed when lifting hammer A through 30 cm,
what two other quantities would you need to measure?
1. ...................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) One of the hammers hits the nail and comes to rest without bouncing.
(i) What form of energy did the hammer lose when it came into contact with the nail?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State two forms of energy into which this “lost” energy is changed.
1. ...........................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
Friday 10 NOVEMBER 2000 Morning 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
Fig. 1.1 shows the car at four places during the journey. The arrows represent the size and
direction of the horizontal forces on the car.
driving friction
force force
Fig. 1.1
at rest,
speeding up,
going at steady speed,
slowing down. [4]
0625/2 W00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows three types of water tap (faucet).
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
PUSH KNOB
DOWN
Fig. 2.1
In the box underneath each tap, write YES if a person would need to cause a moment
on the handle in order to make the water flow, or NO if the person would not need to
cause a moment. [3]
(b) A old person has taps of type A in the kitchen. The person has difficulty operating the
tap. What could be done to make it easier to operate the tap?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
35
30
25
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
time/s
Fig. 3.1
State one of the speeds at which the gear is changed. ............ m/s
0625/2 W00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) On another occasion, the motorcycle is made to increase its speed at a constant rate for
10 s. The speed/time graph for this is shown in Fig. 3.2.
20
15
speed
10
m/s
5
0
0 5 10
time/s
Fig. 3.2
C “Evaporation occurs where the liquid touches the bottom of the container.”
[4]
(b) Sometimes after shaving, men splash a liquid, called an aftershave, over their faces.
This makes their faces feel fresher as the aftershave evaporates.
(i) Which of the statements in part (a) explains why the aftershave, even though it is at
room temperature, cools the skin.
statement ................
(ii) Suggest why the aftershave cools the skin better than water at room temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2 W00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Complete the following sentence.
topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicspeed
topicthermal
topicthermalcapacity
topiclight
(b) Fig. 5.1 gives details about an empty beaker and the same beaker with different
substances in it.
energy needed
to raise 125 J 1175 J 325 J
temperature
by 1°C
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................
5. Use your answers above to suggest why, on a sunny day, the temperature of
the sand on a beach rises faster than the temperature of the sea.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[6]
mirror
P
Fig. 6.1
(a) One ray, LP, from the lamp has been drawn.
(iii) Mark, using an X for each, two angles which are equal.
[3]
(b) Carefully mark, using a clear dot, the position of the image of the lamp. [1]
(c) If you were looking into the mirror from point L, you might see something like Fig. 6.2
“looking back at you”. (Apologies if you are better-looking than this!)
Fig. 6.2
(i) Mark clearly with the letter R, the image of your right ear.
0625/2 W00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) A ray of red light passes through a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicforce
topicconductor
red red
light light
Fig. 7.1
What name do we use for the change of direction of the ray as it enters the glass?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the same prism, with white light passing through it.
The path of red light is shown.
white red
light light
Fig. 7.2
(c) Light from the Sun is now passed through the prism. The path of red light is shown in
Fig. 7.3.
Sun's red
light light
Fig. 7.3
We can detect infra-red rays using a thermocouple. On Fig. 7.3, mark with the letter T a
position where the thermocouple could detect the infra-red rays after they have passed
through the prism. [1]
0625/2 W00 [Turn over
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Here are the approximate densities of some metals.
topicradioactivity
Fig. 8.1
The market trader says that the coin is made of gold. After buying the coin, the person finds
that its volume is 1.4 cm3 and its mass is 12.6 g.
(a) Write down the equation which enables you to calculate density.
[1]
(b) Calculate the density of the metal from which the coin is made.
(d) If not, use the list above to suggest what it might be made from.
(e) If a country wanted to keep its coinage the same but of as low a mass as possible,
which of the metals in the list should it choose?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 W00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 The circuit in Fig. 9.1 is connected up.
topiclens
topicvolume
topicpressure
topicdensity
20 Ω
6V
40 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors in Fig. 9.1.
(b) (i) State the relationship between resistance, p.d. and current by completing the
following equation.
resistance = ––––––––––––––––––––
(ii) Calculate the current, I, in Fig. 9.1. State the unit in your answer.
current = ..............................
[5]
(d) The circuit is now used as a potential divider, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
20 Ω
6V
40 Ω V out
Fig. 9.2
Use your answer to (c) to state the value of Vout , the output voltage of the potential
divider.
Vout = ............................. V [1]
0625/2 W00
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a view from above of a person standing at the edge of a pond, dipping
topicripples
topicwaves
the end of a stick up and down in the water.
Some of the wavefronts that spread out are shown.
edge
small piece
water of
of wood,
pond
floating on
water
X
cm
90
Y
Fig. 10.1
(ii) The distance from X to Y is 90 cm. Calculate the wavelength of the waves.
(iii) The speed of the waves is affected by the depth of the water.
...........................................................................................................................
2. What does the shape of the wavefronts tell you about the depth of the pond?
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 10.2
Describe how the piece of wood moves after the waves reach it.
You may draw on Fig. 10.2 if it helps you to answer the question.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An underwater loudspeaker, placed in the pond in part (a), sends out sound waves
through the water, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
underwater
loudspeaker
L
Fig. 10.3
(i) What is the difference between the nature of these sound waves and the water
waves in (a)? Write the appropriate words in the gaps in the following sentences.
(ii) Fig. 10.4 shows a sideways view along the line KL.
underwater
loudspeaker
M
K L
Fig. 10.4
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 W00
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) (i) Copper is an electrical conductor. What is meant by a conductor ?
topicmercury
topicmercurybarometer
topicbarometer
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Ebonite, glass and polythene are electrical insulators. What is meant by an
insulator ?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Polythene is easily given a negative charge by rubbing it with a dry woollen cloth.
Fig. 11.1
moves
negatively towards
Tick any of the following which charged
might correctly describe rod X. polythene
rod X
positively charged glass
(iii) Which figure gives the number of protons in the nucleus? .......................................
(iv) How can you find the number of neutrons in the nucleus?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
4
(b) An α-particle can be written as 2 α.
210
Polonium 84 Po decays into lead (Pb) by emitting an α-particle.
Complete the nuclear equation below, by writing the correct numbers in the boxes.
210 4
84 Po → Pb + 2 α
[2]
0625/2 W00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
(a) He tells the operator to start working when the clock on the wall of the factory shows the
time in Fig. 1.1.
5.03
(b) The operator is told to stop when the clock shows the time in Fig. 1.2.
4.35
(d) During this time, the operator makes 5 cylinders. What is the average time to make one
cylinder?
0625/2/M/J/01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) What is meant by the term moment of a force?
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
Fig. 2.1
(i) How does the moment of the part of the branch to the left of A compare with the
moment of the part to the right of A?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly, using the letter X, the centre of mass of the whole
branch.
[2]
(a) Describe how the pressure in the balloon is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
why ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
object
mirror
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the image formed by the mirror. [3]
0625/2/M/J/01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 represents a wave.
topicresistance
displacement
B H
C I
0
A D E G distance
from source
Fig. 5.1
(a) Making use of the letters on Fig. 5.1, state which distances you would measure to find
(i) the wavelength of the wave: measure between ……… and ……… .
(ii) the amplitude of the wave: measure between ……… and ……… .
[2]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
ebonite
rod
insulating
+ sheet
Fig. 6.1
(a) Put a circle around any of the pieces of aluminium which are attracted by the ebonite
rod. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Three resistors are connected in series between X and Y. When a cell is connected across
topicconvection
XY, the current at X is 0.1 A, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
X 12 Ω 5Ω 3Ω Y
0.1A
V1
Fig. 7.1
(c) What instrument would you use to measure the p.d. V1? ............................................[1]
(d) How does the e.m.f. of the cell compare with your answer to part (b)? Tick one box.
core
Vp Vs
coil coil
N p turns N s turns
Fig. 8.1
Vp _____ .
__ =
Vs
(b) In each of the following examples, state the potential difference Vs.
(i)
12 v~ Vs
(ii)
6 v~ Vs
80 turns 80 turns
Vs = ................... V
(iii)
6v Vs
80 turns 80 turns
Vs = ................... V
[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 The table below gives some data about an accelerating car.
topicpressure
time/s 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
speed
m/s 0 5 10 15 19 24 25 25
(a) On Fig. 9.1, plot the speed/time graph for the motion.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time/s
(b) How far did the car travel during the first 3 s?
(c) What was the top speed of the car? .....................................................................m/s [1]
(d) How far would the car travel in 3 s if travelling at its top speed?
(a) How does the total work done by A compare with the total work done by B?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) Which form of energy in their bodies do the workers transform in order to do the
work lifting the boxes?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The boxes have more energy when they are on the shelf than when they were on the
floor.
(e) One of the boxes falls off the shelf and crashes to the ground.
Describe the energy changes as the box falls and hits the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) A builder is building a brick wall. He has 500 bricks delivered, all neatly stacked together.
topicmercurybarometer
topicmercury
topicbarometer
Each brick measures 0.2 m x 0.1 m x 0.06 m and is a solid block, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
Fig. 11.1
(b) Some other bricks have the same size and are made of the same material, but they
have a hollow in one face, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2
(i) How does the mass of one of these bricks compare with the mass of one of the
bricks in (a)(ii)?
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01 [Turn over
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The hollow of one brick is filled level with wet cement, as shown in Fig. 11.3.
wet cement
Fig. 11.3
Compare this with the mass given in (a)(ii). What does it tell you about the density
of the wet cement?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
topicray
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
brightness focus
time-base y-gain
ms/cm volts/cm
x-shift y-shift
on
y input off
Fig. 12.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright line is seen across the centre of the
screen.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) When the brightness control is turned up, the line gets brighter.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i) Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ........................
(ii) Fig. 12.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 12.2
1. Which oscilloscope control would you adjust to vary the amplitude, h, of the trace
2. Which control would you adjust to vary the number of waves visible on the screen?
..................
3. What would you see on the screen if you switched the time-base setting to zero?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
string
cylinder
Fig. 1.1
string
0 5 10 15 20 25 cm 30
Fig. 1.2
0625/2 O/N01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A trainee designer makes a jug for holding drinks. The jug is shown in Fig. 2.1.
topiceffect
topicturningeffect
topicturning
Fig. 2.1
Unfortunately, it is very easy to knock the jug over, so the trainee designer has to change the
shape of the jug.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
2. .........................................................................................................................................[2]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What happens to the spacing between the atoms in an iron bar when it expands?
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State one example where expansion of a solid causes problems which need to be
overcome.
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) A ray of light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 4.1. It emerges
topicevaporation
at point X.
ray
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, draw the ray which emerges from the block at X. [2]
(b) The glass of which the block is made has a critical angle of 42°.
ray
50°
Fig. 4.2
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A third ray enters the block perpendicularly, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
ray
Fig. 4.3
On Fig. 4.3, draw the ray as it passes through the block and out into the air again. [2]
screen
Sun’s
rays
red
orange
yellow
green
blue
spectrum
indigo
violet
Fig. 5.1
The student labelled the colours in the correct positions but made two mistakes in
showing the passage of the rays through the prism. What are these mistakes?
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
(i) What instrument could the student use to detect the presence of the infra-red
radiation?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the letters I.R. to show where the infra-red radiation would strike the screen.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Infra-red radiation is one example of an invisible part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Give the names of two other invisible parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Three metal rods look the same.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
electromagnet
steel ball-bearing
Fig. 6.1
The electromagnet then releases the ball-bearing, which falls to the floor.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(a) A builder tries to save money by not fitting fuses or circuit-breakers to the electric
circuits in a house. Why might this be dangerous?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another builder only has switches like the one shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
The builder decides it might be dangerous to fit one of these switches in a washroom,
where there would be water and steam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A cleaning operator is trained to check the cable of a vacuum cleaner for damage
before it is used.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 (a) Describe what happens to an atom when it undergoes radioactive decay.
topicradioactivity
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A scientist measures the count rate from a radioactive substance over a period of 20
minutes. The table shows the results of his measurements.
time/minutes 0 5 10 15 20
count rate
800 400 205 105 50
counts/s
(iii) If the scientist had taken readings for 25 minutes, what might the count rate have
been at the end of his experiment?
(c) In the following table, write in the correct numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons
contained in an α-particle and in a β-particle.
α-particle
β-particle
[4]
X
R
Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) The student cannot remember which meters he should use at X and at Y.
(c) The student connects the circuit and obtains the graph shown in Fig. 9.2.
4.0
p.d. / V
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
current / A
Fig. 9.2
0625/2 O/N01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) How can the student use the graph to find the resistance of R?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(d) The student removes the length of nichrome wire R and replaces it with the same length
of thinner nichrome wire.
(i) Will the resistance of this wire be greater than, smaller than or the same as the wire
in the rest of the question?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, sketch a line which the student might obtain when he repeats the
experiment with the thinner wire. [3]
Blocks having identical dimensions are made of these three substances. The blocks are
stood on a horizontal surface, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
alu
min
con wo
ium cre od
te
Fig. 10.1
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which block exerts the greatest pressure on the horizontal surface? .......................
[4]
(b) The wood block can be placed on the horizontal surface in any one of three ways, A, B
or C (see Fig. 10.2).
A B C
od
wo
wo
wood
od
Fig. 10.2
In which position does the wood block exert the greatest pressure?................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A person spends some time relaxing on a sandy beach. He sits on a chair with four
legs, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
sand
Fig. 10.3
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
thermometer
pure water
heat
Fig. 11.1
What value should the thermometer show when the water is boiling? .........................[2]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) How could you check that the zero mark on the thermometer had been correctly
positioned? You may use a diagram if it helps you to answer clearly.
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
............................................................... [3]
0625/2 O/N01
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 Fig. 12.1 shows the plan of the dining room in a house in a cold country. Details of the rest of
topictube
topicray
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
the rooms are not shown. The air outside the house is much colder than that inside the house.
interior walls
COLD
WARM
plan (view
door from above)
WARM
external
walls dining room
window
(single glass)
Fig. 12.1
Heat is lost from the dining room by conduction at the rates shown below.
(i) much more heat is lost through the external walls than through the internal walls,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) If the figures above relate to the only sources of heat loss, how many J/hour would the
heater in the dining room need to supply in order to keep the temperature in the room
constant?
(c) Suggest one other way heat might be lost from the room.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials required.
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
[2]
0625/2/M/J/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Which of the following statements describe the property of a substance that would be
suitable for measuring temperature? Tick the box alongside any acceptable statement.
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows how the length of the thread in a liquid-in-glass thermometer varies with
temperature.
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0 25 50 75 100
temperature / °C
Fig. 2.1
temperature = ........................ °C
(ii) What happens to the thread of the thermometer if the temperature drops below the
ice point?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
disc with
25 holes
jet of air
Fig. 3.1
(i) How many puffs of air will there be during one revolution of the disc?
Show that the frequency of the note produced by the siren is 1000 Hz.
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The siren described in (a) is located some distance from a large building, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
large
building
siren
Fig. 3.2
The siren is briefly sounded once. A short time later, the sound is heard again.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the frequency of this second sound? Tick one box.
1000 Hz
(iii) What is the amplitude of this second sound? Tick one box.
proton
neutron
electron
[3]
(b) A neutral atom of phosphorus (P) contains 15 protons, 16 neutrons and 15 electrons.
(i) Write down the proton number (atomic number) of phosphorus. ...............
(ii) Write down the nucleon number (mass number) of phosphorus. ..............
0625/2/M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Describe one method of magnetising a steel rod.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) How would you check that the steel rod had been magnetised?
[2]
(c) A glass tube is supported vertically on a bench. A strong bar magnet A is placed in the
bottom of the tube, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
hand
N magnet B
glass tube
N
bench magnet A
S
Fig. 5.1
A second magnet B is now dropped into the tube.
Describe what happens to magnet B, and explain why.
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02 [Turn over
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a vacuum tube in which it is hoped to generate cathode rays.
vacuum
filament
anode y-plates
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.1, draw the symbol for a battery connected so that thermionic emission
occurs.
(b)
– +
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, show the + and – terminals suitably connected so that cathode rays
may pass along the tube.
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw a line showing the path of the cathode rays.
(iii) How are the cathode rays detected in the tube?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 6.3 shows the same vacuum tube, with the terminals labelled.
P
Q
R S
Fig. 6.3
Between which two points should a battery be connected if the cathode rays are to be
deflected upwards?
voltage here
= voltage here voltage here
= =
Fig. 7.1
(a) At different points in this system, the voltage is 220 V, 11 000 V or 132 000 V. At the three
places marked on Fig. 7.1, write in the appropriate value of the voltage. [3]
(b) State one advantage of using high voltages for the transmission of electricity.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 In a research laboratory using radioactive materials, safety precautions have to be observed.
Some of the safety precautions adopted by the laboratory are listed below.
On the lines after each precaution, state reasons why it is a wise precaution.
REASON 1 .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
REASON 2 .......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Food must not be taken where radioactive materials are being used.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The researchers must wash their hands after the source has been put away safely.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
A1 A3
20 X A2 20 X
Fig. 9.1
resistance = ............ Ω
(ii) Ammeter A1 reads 0.2 A. What do the other two ammeters read?
A2 reads ............ A
A3 reads ............ A
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the same components as in (a), but connected differently.
A1 20 X A2 A3
20 X
Fig. 9.2
(i) What is the total resistance of the circuit? Tick one box.
40 Ω
30 Ω
20 Ω
10 Ω
(ii) Ammeter A1 reads 0.8 A. What do the other two ammeters read? Tick the
appropriate boxes.
A2 reads
A3 reads
[3]
Remember that the car has 4 tyres and a person has 2 feet.
(ii) Suggest why it might be a good idea to reduce the pressure of the air in car tyres if
the car is to be driven over soft sand or over snow.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
X Y
liquid
Fig. 10.1
(i) Before the person blows at A, the liquid levels X and Y are the same.
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/02
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Which way do the liquid levels move when the person blows at A?
(iii) What would you measure in order to find the person’s lung pressure?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
weight/N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
length/mm 40 48 60 64 72 80 88 96
extension/mm 0 8 20
(c) (i) On the graph grid of Fig 11.1, plot the values from your table.
60
extension / mm
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
weight / N
Fig. 11.1
0625/2/M/J/02
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Draw the best straight line through your points.
(iii) The experimenter has read one of the lengths incorrectly.
2. What do you think the length reading should have been? ........... mm
[5]
(d) The spring is now attached to a block resting on a rough surface, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
block
rough pulling
surface spring force
friction
force
Fig. 11.2
As the pulling force is increased, the block just starts to move to the right when the
spring is 68 mm long.
extension = .......... mm
(ii) Use your graph to find the force that causes this extension.
force = .......... N
(iii) What is the value of the friction force as the block starts to move?
X A P C F Y
Fig. 12.1
After passing through the lens, the rays all pass through the point F.
(i) Which word best describes what happens to the rays? Tick one box.
diffract
disperse
reflect
“The focal length of the lens is the distance between point ....... and point ...... .”
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
19 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) In this part of the question, you are required to draw an accurate ray diagram on
Fig. 12.2 for the lens in part (a).
object
X P F Y
Fig. 12.2
(i) From the top of the object, draw a ray that, after leaving the lens, passes through F.
(ii) From the top of the object, draw a ray that passes through P.
(iii) Mark in the image, and write “image” alongside it.
(iv) From your diagram, state two things that are the same (or approximately the same)
about the image and the object.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(v) From your diagram, state one thing that is definitely different about the image and
the object.
...................................................................................................................................
[9]
0625/2/M/J/02
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
moving
belt
A suitcase on ground
B suitcase held
level with belt
C suitcase moving
on belt
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A?
Tick one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick
one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list.
(a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal
...................................... . [1]
(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of ....................................... [1]
(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that
...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water. [1]
large
current
card
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above.
card
Fig. 3.2
The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current.
On Fig. 3.2,
0625/2/O/N/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.
cm3
500
400 mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.1
cm3
500
oil 400 mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.2
(iii) How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the
measuring jug?
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be
if it replaced the oil. [1]
level
of oil cm3
500
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.3
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity
falls to of its original value?
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes.
0625/2/O/N/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
boiling
liquid
heat
Fig. 6.1
(i) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature
of the liquid whilst it is boiling.
temperature
0
time
time at which
liquid starts
to boil
Fig. 6.2
Fig. 7.1
(a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has
been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
nylon charged
thread polythene
rod (–)
charged
polythene
rod (–)
Fig. 7.2
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not
be able to charge the rod?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
X
sliding contact
variable
resistor A
Y
4.7 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
[2]
(c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 Ω resistor is 0.5 A.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 Ω.
What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?
0625/2/O/N/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in
air.
My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured
the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I
stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I
saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard
the sound. We obtained the following readings.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together
and hearing the bang?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(f) Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment
after they had exchanged positions.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
N
S
mercury
Fig. 10.1
(i) Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is
closed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.
coil
S
N
Fig. 10.2
(i) In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an
example.
(ii) Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is
connected?
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
flexible
lamp iron reeds
Fig. 11.1
Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm.
warning
lamp
thermistor
Fig. 11.2
When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to
operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases.
Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
screen
red light
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.
(ii) What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in
Fig. 12.2.
screen
red +
violet light
Fig. 12.2
Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light. [2]
(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the
Sun. State what is now seen on the screen.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through
glass.
(i) On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the
Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.
(ii) Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/O/N/02
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
ends cut
off here
thread 1 m rule
Fig. 1.1
.................. m [1]
(b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)?
Tick one box and give your reason.
reason .......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10 N F
Fig. 2.1
(i) The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string?
F = .............................. N
(ii) What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equally-
spaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.
The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
(i) What is the force exerted by each block on the pot? ...............N
(ii) State the direction of these forces.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot
up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the
pot?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0.97 kg 0.51 kg
Fig. 3.1
(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders
are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2.
cm3
250
200
50
150
100
50
Fig. 3.2
(i) What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder?
(ii) Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.
(iii) Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ..................................
[7]
0625/2/M/J/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
fixed
pivot
load
piston
cylinder
air
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the
ice has melted. [3]
100
temperature / °C
0 time
time when
all ice has
melted
Fig. 5.2
(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.
After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
(i) Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/M/J/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 In this question, drawing should be done carefully.
ray of
light mirror 2
mirror 1 X
Fig. 6.1
(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2.
Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You
may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds
after the sound was made. [1]
time elapsed/s 0 1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave. [3]
distance
travelled
/m
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/s
Fig. 7.2
0625/2/M/J/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.
distress
flare
lifeboat
sinking ship
Fig. 7.3
The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a
bright flash of light.
(i) A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time.
State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the
lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.
S1
large-value
resistor
6 V d.c.
V capacitor –
S2
Fig. 8.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically
in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
S
N
Fig. 9.1
Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A
and B is not shown.
A A
magnet magnet
pole pole
B B
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes
through it. [2]
(ii) Explain why the wire looks like this.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed. [1]
brightness focus
time-base y-gain
ms/cm volts/cm
x-shift y-shift
on
y input off
Fig. 10.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal
line.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i) Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 10.2
1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
Fig. 11.1
The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the
variable resistor makes no difference.
In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor
may be used to change the brightness of the lamp. [2]
0625/2/M/J/03
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply.
The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored.
8Ω
Q
P
+
6V A
–
R
S
4Ω
Fig. 11.2
current = ..................................
(iii) On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference
across the 4 Ω resistor. [1]
safety rope
climber
Fig. 12.1
air resistance
his weight
(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the
work done by the climber?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to
climb the cliff.
(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential
energy than he had at the bottom.
(i) What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra
(iii) Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was
energy in his body used? State one way.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2003
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
If you have been given a label, look at the For Examiner’s Use
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Q R
P
S
B
A
Fig. 1.1
If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when
released.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be.
(ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to
topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.
P S
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must
now lie.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.
A B
Fig. 1.3
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be
opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Fig. 1.4
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for
one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]
loose
rocks
mountain
Fig. 3.1
The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the
mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of
energy being described.
0625/02/O/N/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels.
Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.
vehicle 1 vehicle 2
Fig. 4.1
Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is
very soft? Give your reasons.
vehicle ................................................................
reasons ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) (i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be
extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain
why this is not extremely painful.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
glass block
A B
C D
Fig. 5.1
(b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the
point P?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies
with length. [2]
resistance
0
0 length
Fig. 7.1
(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the
circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.
+
50 m
meter 1
–
meter 2
Fig. 7.2
0625/02/O/N/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).
5 6 0.2 0.3
3 4 7
8 0.4
2
9 0.1
1
0.5
10
0
0
V A
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown
experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines
below.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to
(i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the number of protons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the charge on the nucleus?
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of
3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the
nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.
load / N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
200
extension / mm
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 10.1
(b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a
circle around the incorrect extension. [1]
Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/02/O/N/03
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in °C.
ºC
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling
water at standard pressure?
........................... °C
(ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice?
........................... °C
(iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the
thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing
point of water.
[3]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
A
240 V 8000 6V
mains turns lamp
Fig. 12.1
(a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at
normal brightness.
(b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at
normal brightness,
A
(i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e.
A
(ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.1
When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.
(b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.
hinge rail
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that
would be needed to begin to raise the rail. [3]
(b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force?
force
work
moment
movement [1]
(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift
the rail.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
25
speed P Q
20
m/s
15
10
5
R
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
A B
Fig. 4.1
State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done
by the person.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls
much harder than the person in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) State which person has the greater power between A and B.
...................................................................................................................................
reason 1 ....................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...................................................................................................................
[3]
thermometer
jet of air
liquid
shallow dish
Fig. 5.1
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment
occurs.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
1 kg aluminium inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to aluminium
Fig. 6.1
In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
1 kg copper inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to copper
Fig. 6.2
The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the
1 kg aluminium block in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
B
A
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) Girl B hears the ‘plop’ sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she
sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the
pond where she is sitting.
Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest.
Write ‘fastest’ in one box and ‘slowest’ in another box. Leave one box empty.
sound wave
light wave
(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal
wave.
sound wave
light wave
(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a
substance in which to travel.
sound wave
light wave
A B repel
A C attract
B D no effect
Fig. 8.1
Bar A is ........................................................................
Bar B is ........................................................................
Bar C is ........................................................................
time/weeks 0 1 2 3 4 5
activity
800 440 240 130 70 40
count/s
activity 800
count/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time/weeks
Fig. 9.1
(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly
on the graph how you obtained your answer.
(d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this
would have affected, if at all,
240 V
to
train
set
Fig. 10.1
(i) How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) 1. The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage
supplied to the train set? Tick one box.
increases
decreases
stays the same
2. An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is
110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train
operates.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor.
pivoted iron
armature power supply
for motor
M motor
switch
contacts
relay core
Fig. 10.2
Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works.
Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters
in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example.
Stage 1 is sentence C
Stage 2 is sentence
Stage 3 is sentence
Stage 4 is sentence
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.
12 V
0.50 A
lamp
Fig. 11.1
(i) 1. Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.
2. The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
12 V
lamp
Fig. 11.2
1. State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
mirror
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip
A of the man’s beard will be.
(ii) On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the man’s beard that reflects from
the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish.
Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(iii) The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is
given to this type of image?
...................................................................................................................................
(iv) Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the
ray makes with the mirror.
[7]
reflection seen
in mirror
Fig. 12.2
(i) In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box.
left hand
right hand
(ii) She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye.
Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection.
[2]
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
cm3
100
90
80 liquid
Fig. 1.1
(b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observer’s eye could look when taking the reading from
the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct
reading. [1]
(c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are
added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder.
Calculate the average volume of one drop.
air pressure
760 mm of mercury
B
gas pressure
781 mm of mercury A
mercury
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.
(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where
the drum is situated.
(i) State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on
the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force
exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods.
The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.20 m
0.60 m
0.50 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg.
volume = .....................................[3]
density = .....................................[4]
(b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2
shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard.
Fig. 3.2
Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State two types of energy that the burning logs possess.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(ii) State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the
person sitting nearby.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(i) State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its
movement.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up.
1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing.
...................................................................................................................................
2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is
seen through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
aluminium
copper
cork
gold
polystyrene
wood
[3]
(b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for
(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
girl
explosion
rock face
quarry
1600 m
Fig. 7.1
(a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures
the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang.
The time is 5.0 s.
(ii) State what assumption you have made in your working in (i).
...............................................................................................................................[1]
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
Fig. 8.1
A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below.
In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case.
Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate.
positive positive
negative negative
positive negative
zero positive
negative zero
[5]
3.0 A 10 Ω 10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
1. point Y, ....................A
2. point Z. ....................A
3.0 A 1.5 A 10 Ω
10 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i) The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A.
0A
1.5 A
3.0 A
4.5 A
(ii) What is the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors? Tick one box.
0Ω
5Ω
10 Ω
20 Ω
[3]
(b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1]
(f) are lost from the nucleus during α-particle emission. ...................................................[2]
O′
D E I
O A BC
I′
Fig. 11.1
(a) State
(i) which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................
real
virtual
inverted
upright
enlarged
diminished
[3]
(c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O′, the top of the object, to the image.
[1]
P
plumb-line
Fig.
Fig. 12.1
This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is
marked.
After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Q C
Fig. 12
B
Fig. 12.2
On Fig. 12.2,
(i) draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,
(ii) clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.
A
rough
surface
Fig. 12.4
The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and
explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder. [2]
cm3
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
100
15
10
50
Fig. 1.2
(i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation
volume = cross-sectional area × length.
Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.
speed
0
0900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
time of day (24 -hour clock)
Fig. 2.1
(b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed.
(c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 (a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P.
Q
5N
pivot
Fig. 3.1
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
Q
5N
pivot
5N
R
Fig. 3.2
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the
direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force
next to the arrow. [4]
reservoir
power
station water flows down
Fig. 4.1
(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of
energy for this system?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess
because of this movement?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the
turbines possess because of their rotation?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted
energy released?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
air
Fig. 5.1
She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it.
After a while in the Sun’s rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before.
(i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
water
Fig. 5.2
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the effect of the Sun’s rays on the water molecules, explain your answer
to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your
working. Write your answers in the table.
[3]
600
resistance /
400
200
0
0600 0900 1200 1500 1800 2100
time of day
Fig. 6.1
[2]
(c) (i) Draw a smooth curve through your points.
(ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the
points?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
radio visible
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions. [4]
(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave.
microwave
radar
sound [1]
mirror
box cut
in half
mirror
Fig. 8.1
90°
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.
(a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventor’s head will
be. [3]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05 [Turn over
12 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in
Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.
woman man
249 m 249 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time
when he hears the echo from the wall.
(b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the
clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall.
How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes.
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s [2]
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical
charges to pass through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and
charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
2Ω
resistance wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2
resistor? Tick one box.
(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a
voltmeter connected across the 2 resistor.
........................................ [1]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.
(d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in
Fig. 11.2.
A
resistance wire
2Ω
Fig. 11.2
zero
1
2
3
(ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in
Fig. 11.2? Tick one box.
zero
0.3 A
(e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by
measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on
either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.
thin wire
fixing pin
fixing pin
crack
Fig. 11.3
neutron
electron
[6]
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
25
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
load / N
Fig. 1.1
1 2 3 4
IGCSE
Fig. 2.1
(a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.
Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.
(b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time
taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b).
The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to
travel from tree 2 to tree 3. [1]
skate
ski
Fig. 3.1
Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why?
Which? .............................................................................................................................
(b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to
drive when it is very windy.
Fig. 3.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
house
wheels step
Fig. 4.1
(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction
force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push.
(b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard.
(c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.
(d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together,
they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard.
flask
air
clamp
tube
water
Fig. 5.1
Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
M +
power
– supply
reed
S
relay
variable resistor
Fig. 6.1
(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The
reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done.
(i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay
close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.
current
in
coil Fig. 6.2(a)
0
time
0
current
in
motor Fig. 6.2(b)
0
time
0
On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with
time as the variable resistor is adjusted. [4]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05 [Turn over
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 (a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of
the lens. [1]
(b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.
object
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2,
(i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the
principal focus on the right of the lens, [1]
(ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens
and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area, [1]
(iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis
after it has passed through the lens, [1]
(iv) draw and label the image. [2]
A A
S N
N S
Fig. 8.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where
the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been
drawn on one plotting compass.
S N
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the
directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places. [3]
Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an
example.
V cell
lamp
ammeter
voltmeter
A switch
Fig. 9.1
[3]
ammeter 1
switch
lamp 2
lamp 1
V
1.5 ammeter 2
cell
Fig. 9.2
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the cell. [1]
(iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
10 cm
4 cm
6.5 cm
Fig. 10.1
(b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
B C
Fig. 11.1
(b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1]
(c) (i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1]
(ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance
from a radioactive source in the laboratory.
80
70
count-rate
counts / min
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time / min
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is
80 counts/minute.
Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter
half-life. [2]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/05
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
chair
board
soft
ground
Fig. 1.1
Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
air
blocked piston
valve
Fig. 1.3
(i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air
trapped in the pump.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
C
B
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your
values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures.
length of AB = ......................... cm
length of BC = ......................... cm
(b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not
attempt a calculation.
[1]
(c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block?
Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water.
measuring
cylinder reading Q
reading P
water
stone
balance
reading R reading S
(a) (b)
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone?
(b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone?
[1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the stone.
Fig. 4.1
(a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy.
Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit.
chemical
electrical
gravitational (PE)
internal (thermal)
kinetic (KE)
light
sound
strain [4]
.................................................................... [1]
.................................................................... [1]
(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?
.................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06
7 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is
heated.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 6.1
(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
screen
air air
no
rm
al
of
ray ht
lig
blue
Fig. 7.1
With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and
into the air until it reaches the screen. [3]
(b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of
colours that can be seen on the screen.
(i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box.
convergence
diffraction
dispersion
reflection [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together.
What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.
magnet
iron
bar
Fig. 8.1
(i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the
iron bar.
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the
iron bar. [1]
(ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is
taken away.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
substance half-life
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
strontium-90 28 years
Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample
will have the greatest activity in 1 year’s time? Explain your answer.
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive
substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.
Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cow’s milk.
The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks.
The results are shown below.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
activity
––––––– 1000 547 294 162 88
counts / s
1000
800
activity
_______
counts / s
600
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 9.1
fluorescent
filament anode screen
C D
Fig. 10.1
(i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission.
Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons [1]
(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the
electrical connections are correctly made. [1]
(v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
+V
–V
Fig. 10.2
(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
start end
of oil drops tree pylon
of
town town on road
Fig. 11.1
The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road.
(a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town.
(i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.
[3]
(b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of
1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all
75 m apart.
Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.
Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of
the town and the pylon.
From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an
example.
[3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
60 5
55
50 10
60
50 10
45 40 20
15
30
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.
Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to
your answer.
No [4]
Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct
statements.
Q R
speed 6
m/s
2 P
O
S
0
0 50 100 170 200
time / s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections.
OP ....................................................................................................................................
PQ ....................................................................................................................................
QR ...................................................................................................................................
RS .............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary?
(d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed?
(e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s
journey. Do not attempt a calculation.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the
oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word
equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.
gravitational
......................... .........................
potential energy
at the top of the
= energy at the + energy at the + energy losses
bottom of the bottom of the
oscillation
oscillation oscillation
(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly
decreases.
Explain why this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06 [Turn over
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a
pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.
F1 P W F2
Fig. 5.1
(i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in
equilibrium.
(ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the
pivot P.
Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.
F = ....................................................
(iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P?
...................................................
[4]
mirror
1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................ m
(ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between
her and her image is 6.0 m?
direction = ............................................
[4]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06 [Turn over
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo.
He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree.
(i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s.
Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.
water
wave
B
3.0 m
side of
boat
A
Fig. 7.2
The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB.
GROUP 1 GROUP 2
copper plastics
iron silk
gold glass
aluminium ebonite
Fig. 8.1
...................................................
...................................................
(iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by
rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth.
...................................................
[3]
(b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate.
attracted to plate
charged
plate
repelled by plate
Fig. 8.2
Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a – sign on the one that is
negatively charged. [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06
11 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching
experiment.
100
length / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to
the edge of the grid. [1]
(b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes
62 mm.
240 V
a.c. output
input
Fig. 10.1
(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains
supply.
(d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
proton number Z = 92
(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an
-particle is emitted.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
ammeter
battery
lamp
15 resistor
Fig. 12.1
(a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................................................................. [1]
(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit
symbols.
[2]
.............................................................
(ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a
position to measure the p.d. across the 15 resistor.
[2]
(f) Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp.
(g) Another 15 resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 resistor that is already in the
circuit.
(i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15 resistors in parallel?
Tick one box.
30
15
7.5
zero
(ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8187295232*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions. 1
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 2
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
50 10
minutes hand
45 15
seconds hand
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway
past his school.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2
passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.2
(b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started. For
Examiner’s
On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3 Use
passes. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.3
[Total: 5]
(b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclist’s ride. [3]
14
12
speed /
m/s 10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m. For
Examiner’s
Use
[4]
[Total: 11]
3 A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape “hinges”. For
This is shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
A plank of
B wood
C
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as
possible.
[2]
(ii) Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The
cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated. For
Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.3
(i) Complete the sentence below, using either the words “greater than” or “the same
as” or “less than”.
In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
4 In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree.
(a) (i) Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height
as the birds.
How does the increase in the squirrel’s gravitational potential energy compare with that
of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below.
Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
energy is ................................................................. .
Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of
the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07
9
closely packed
In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the
molecules in
(i) a solid,
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period For
of time. Examiner’s
Use
pressure
time
Fig. 6.1
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston. For
Examiner’s
Use
cylinder piston
gas
Fig. 6.2
(i) State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of
the gas constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]
7 An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A For
soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
electricity
supply
Fig. 7.1
Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the
copper tip.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the
heat is used to melt the solder.
(i) State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?
Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think
are correct).
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation [2]
(c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even For
though the heater coil is constantly generating heat. Examiner’s
Use
What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box.
greater than 40 W
equal to 40 W
[Total: 6]
8 A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses For
against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening. Examiner’s
Use
springy
metal strip
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.
(c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason
for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
2Ω
6V X
10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10
resistor.
.................. V [1]
(b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a For
sliding contact. Examiner’s
Use
A
sliding
contact
6V X
B
Y
Fig. 9.2
(i) State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at
(ii) The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference
between X and Y is 5 V.
On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact. [1]
[Total: 12]
10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You For
are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the For
surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the Examiner’s
north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots. Use
N S
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the
four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge
of the board. [5]
(b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
[Total: 6]
24Na 24 Mg + yx
11 12
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8902325113*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder 90
80
70
60
50 metal
can
40
liquid 30
20
10
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can. [2]
The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is ……………………………… than
the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder. [1]
[Total: 4]
(b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.
(c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.
State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)
is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
glass tube
mercury
reservoir
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to
calculate the atmospheric pressure.
(b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might
be. [2]
(d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the
tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
diesel
engine
slipway
s
Fig. 4.1
(ii) the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful
power output of the diesel engine?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
capillary tube
liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments.
State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in
(ii) steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM). [1]
In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be
used to measure temperature.
2. OF
[2]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 6.1
(i) describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,
constant speed
uniform acceleration
uniform deceleration
[1]
(b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled
in the first 10 s of the journey.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 7.1
(a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the
wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown. [2]
Fig. 7.2
State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than
the fact that one is created in air and the other in water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07 [Turn over
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY.
Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image.
I
O
Fig. 8.1
(i) clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens, [3]
real
virtual
enlarged
diminished
inverted
upright
(c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further
away from the lens.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
thermometer
water
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 9.1
At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of
the voltage is noted.
temperature / °C 15 30 45 60 75 90
(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature.
[4]
voltage / V
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
temperature / oC
Fig. 9.2
(b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA
(i) at 40 °C, voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor
(i) at 40 °C,
resistance at 40 °C = .....................................................
(ii) at 80 °C.
resistance at 80 °C = .....................................................
[5]
(d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort
used in this experiment.
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07 [Turn over
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil.
[4]
(ii) A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil.
(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then
closed.
Fig. 10.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.
The results are shown in the table.
time / minutes 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
activity
461 332 229 162 106 81 51
count / s
(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
(b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the
start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.
(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this
activity.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
P2
P1
P3
P4
Q
Fig. 12.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can
now be deflected down the page towards Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
*3498617057*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
Fig. 1.1
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C.
[1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker
at one end.
Fig. 1.2
Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass
of this rod will be.
[2]
[Total: 4]
1375 m
Fig. 2.1
The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B.
1. The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to
25 m/s in 10 s.
2. It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.
3. It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A.
35
30
speed
m/s 25
20
15
10
0
0
time/s
Fig. 2.2
(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2,
Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to
the nearest m/s.
3 A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in For
Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
b c
a
F1 F2 F3
Fig. 3.1
(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.
Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the
beam? Explain your answer.
Explanation
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.
?
Fig. 3.2
The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.
He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he
cannot exactly balance the beam.
4 For
(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform Examiner’s
of a special tower, in order to reach a Use
high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
..................................................... [1]
..................................................... [1]
Why? .......................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
............................................................. [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
5 In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central For
mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
central
mass
orbiting
particles
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made.
(d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in
radioactive decay.
(e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
6 Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens. For
Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is
known. [1]
(i) copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image
formed by the lens, [1]
(ii) mark and label the image. [2]
(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the
focused image. [1]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the For
three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas. Examiner’s
Use
In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the left-
hand column.
(b) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance boils?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance melts?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between For
these is divided into equal divisions. Examiner’s
Use
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 8.1
(i) 1. Write down another name for the lower fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) 1. Write down another name for the upper fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at
room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped,
the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.
Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.
The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the
aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block. [1]
[Total: 10]
[1]
(b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how
a fuse protects a circuit.
A
fuse wire heats up
B
circuit is broken,
so current stops
C
fuse wire melts
D
current becomes
too high
On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
R1 R2
X Y
Fig. 10.1
(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure
the potential difference between X and Y. [1]
(c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the cell.
increases
decreases [1]
increases
decreases [1]
(iii) State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V.
[Total: 11]
B
N
A
S G
C
Fig. 11.1
Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the
expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic
field.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes For
with time. Examiner’s
Use
activity
time/minutes
counts/s
0 128
30 58
60 25
90 11
120 5
Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.
radon-220 55 seconds
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
strontium-90 28 years
(i) If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one
year, and why?
Which? .....................................................................................................................
Why? ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5545678956*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
1 A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards For
across the river. Examiner’s
Use
12 12
11 1 11 1
10 2 10 2
9 3 9 3
8 4 8 4
7 5 7 5
6 6
When he starts fishing one morning, the boy’s wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
When he finishes his morning’s fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,
load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.
Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy
was fishing.
[Total: 5]
2 The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m × 1.5 m × 1.0 m. It is full of water. For
Examiner’s
Use
water
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 6]
3 A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it. For
Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load. Examiner’s
Use
before after
W
X
load
Fig. 3.1
(a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order
to find the extension of the spring.
(b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains
the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4 load / N 5
Fig. 3.2
(i) When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension
of the spring is 1.7 cm.
Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.
(ii) State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it. For
Examiner’s
tension = ................................................ [2] Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the For
visible light part of the spectrum. Examiner’s
Use
visible
M N
Fig. 4.1
(a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1.
In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions. [2]
(b) Write “long wavelength” next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic
spectrum. [1]
(c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions.
microwaves ......................................................................................................................
infra-red ...........................................................................................................................
γ-rays ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]
5 (a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect For
alternatives. An example has been given to help you. Examiner’s
Use
large
(example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle.
thin
reflected
(i) An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle. [1]
dispersed
(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed
of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged
together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown
in Fig. 5.1.
school
wall
B A
240 m
Fig. 5.1
Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch.
B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s.
(i) How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s? ................................ m [1]
(iii) The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to For
330 m/s. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students’ value was different from
what was expected.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is
incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum.
glass
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 6.1
(a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured
in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure. [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.
On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube. [1]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08
9
(d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum. For
Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the Examiner’s
effect of changing the external conditions. Use
atmospheric pressure
rises
temperature
rises
[4]
[Total: 10]
7 This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light
striking a plane mirror.
ray of
light
mirror
Fig. 7.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(i) draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to
the right of A, [1]
(ii) draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08 [Turn over
10
8 (a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the
iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
N S N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
N S N S
Fig. 8.3
nothing
they attract
(d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in For
Fig. 8.4. Examiner’s
Use
N S + –
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 8.4
What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
[Total: 6]
9 A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either For
switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs. Examiner’s
The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1. Use
X Y
6V switch 2
lamp
a
6 V supply
switch 1
A
Fig. 9.1
(a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply. For
Examiner’s
Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in Use
Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer.
X Y X Y
connection 1 connection 2
Fig. 9.2
Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
[Total: 9]
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor For
on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider. Examiner’s
Use
pivoted iron
armature
power supply
6V for motor
M motor
switch
Fig. 10.1
(a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just
operates. [1]
(b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 4]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
240V 6V
mains lamp
Fig. 11.1
(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesn’t it
matter?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
(d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by For
the symbol Examiner’s
Use
218
84 Po
218 214
84 Po 82 Pb + emitted particle
(i) State the proton number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
(ii) State the nucleon number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
α-particle
β-particle
neutron
proton [1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2009
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
1
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 2
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 4
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 5
10
11
12
Total
1 A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy For
road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles Examiner’s
per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings. Use
12
11 1
10 2
8 4
7 5
6
12
11 1
10 2
8 4
7 5
6
(a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.
(b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.
[Total: 4]
2 In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the For
Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions Examiner’s
of the quantities in the left-hand column. Use
Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you.
There is only one definition for each quantity.
weight ÷ mass
[Total: 3]
Fig. 3.1
(b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.
remains at rest
[1]
(c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the For
car? Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a For
gas supply. Examiner’s
Use
mm
300
250
from a
gas supply 200
150
100
50
mercury
0
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.
(b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of
mercury?
On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels. [2]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 5.1
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put
on between these two marks.
[Total: 6]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take For
measurements. Examiner’s
Use
time
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) (i) How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half For
its initial value? Examiner’s
Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................... [1]
3. How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were
longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and
then further apart.
(i) Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................
(ii) Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules? .................
[Total: 11]
7 Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from For
a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block. Examiner’s
Use
beam of light
H Z
G Y
F X
E W
D V
C U
B T
apartment apartment
A S
block block
Fig. 7.1
1. draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H, [1]
(ii) State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection. For
Examiner’s
................................................. [1] Use
(iii) Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H?
................................................. [1]
(iv) Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?
................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.
mirror
card
Fig. 7.2
The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.
[Total: 7]
Fig. 8.1
State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be
................................................. [1]
................................................. [1]
N
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 8.2
(c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other. For
Examiner’s
Use
+
rod C rod D
Fig. 8.3
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north.
Fig. 8.4
brass rod N
plotting
compass
Fig. 8.5
On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2]
[Total: 6]
reading
A
50 mA
Fig. 9.1
................................................. [1]
................................................. [1]
R = ................................................ [3]
............................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown For
in Fig. 9.2. Examiner’s
Use
6V
student’s
A incorrect
connection
R
Fig. 9.2
(i) Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric For
current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by Examiner’s
putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position. Use
pan
current
out
current
in
Y
N I
X
Fig. 10.1
(a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I.
His results are given below.
1. mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values, [2]
For
F/N Examiner’s
Use
0
0 I/A
Fig. 10.2
(ii) From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A.
(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor
balance.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are For
empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this Examiner’s
question. Not all of the boxes will be used. Use
heater filament
cathode rays
anode
grid
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box. [1]
(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.
(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it.
(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated. [1]
(e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays. ................................................ [1]
(f) What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box.
air
alpha particles
hydrogen
steam
vacuum
[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09
19
12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations. For
Examiner’s
Complete the table by filling in the missing properties. Use
2 protons +
nature [2]
2 neutrons
ability to penetrate
very penetrating [2]
solids
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3735851861*
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2009
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
final level
20 original level 20 of water
of water
10 10
(a) State
................................................ cm3
................................................ cm3
[1]
[Total: 4]
2 As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is For
bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
pole
Fig. 2.1
(a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done
lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?
[Total: 4]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girl’s bicycle ride and the axes for the For
corresponding speed/time graph. Examiner’s
Use
distance
from
starting
point
0A B C D time
speed
0
A B C D time
Fig. 3.1
(a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.
(i) Answer the following questions for the time interval AB.
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could For
show the speed during AB. [1] Examiner’s
Use
(i) draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC, [1]
(ii) draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD. [2]
(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?
[Total: 8]
4 (a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N. For
Examiner’s
Use
12 N
15 N 6N
weight = 12 N
Fig. 4.1
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to
a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the
letter G. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the For
upper deck. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.2
(i) What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars
are loaded?
rises
falls
[1]
(ii) How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?
more stable
no effect
less stable
[1]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A. For
Examiner’s
Use
temperature
A
C
B
time
Fig. 5.1
1. A and B, . ..........................................................................................................
2. B and C, ...........................................................................................................
3. C and D. ...........................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to
the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.
between A and B
between B and C
between C and D
[2]
................................................. [1]
(b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it For
again reaches the temperature it had at A. Examiner’s
Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the
substance. [2]
temperature
time
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 8]
6 A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
handle
bung B A
air piston
Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is
pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B.
Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as
the piston is moved.
[3]
(b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.
Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes.
[Total: 5]
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a For
plane mirror. Examiner’s
Use
lens image
torch
p q
plane
mirror
hole cut
in card
Fig. 7.1
The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real
experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the
centre of the lens.
(a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.
................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F. [1]
(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.
erect
inverted
real
virtual [2]
(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09 [Turn over
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside. For
Examiner’s
Use
steep
mountainside
student
bell tower
and bell
990 m 990 m
Fig. 8.1
The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the second time.
[Total: 8]
9 (a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery. For
Examiner’s
Complete the statement under each circuit. Use
R1 R3
R2 R4
Fig. 9.1
(b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so
low that it can be ignored.
280 Ω
12 V
200 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(iii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 Ω resistor.
(iv) Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 Ω resistor is
the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use
for this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
12 V a.c. voltmeter
V
a.c.
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer. [1]
(ii) Name a suitable material from which the core could be made.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in For
Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his
purchase is electrically safe.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3. .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]
800 counts / s.
Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life
has elapsed.
900
800
700
600
500
count-rate
counts / s
400
300
200
100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
time t / minutes
Fig. 12.1
(a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve For
through your points. [3] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.
(d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and
prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the
mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive
material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.
(i) Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the
dumped mud.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable
for tracking the mud.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2425863101*
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the For
vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road. Examiner’s
Use
You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.
(a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle,
and which instruments would you use to measure them?
[4]
(b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use
symbols, state what your symbols mean.
[1]
(c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of
90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.
(i) Why is the average speed less than the top speed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 9]
2 A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
bench top
0 0
29.8
cm pin spring
62.8
cm
metre rule
load = 5.5 N
100 100
Fig. 2.1
Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.
When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine. For
Examiner’s
Use
useful output
input energy I energy U
wasted energy W
Fig. 3.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of
goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
motor pulley
cable
chains
packing case
pallet
ground
Fig. 3.2
The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N.
(i) State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a
steady speed.
(ii) When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to For
(b)(i)? Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load
is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight,
does he need to measure?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the
power required to lift the load?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase
in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below.
[Total: 6]
4 (a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator. For
Examiner’s
A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
signal generator
amplitude frequency
Fig. 4.1
By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of
the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound
heard in the new position is the same as in the original position?
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her For
hand. Examiner’s
Use
rock face
Fig. 4.2
The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a child’s toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a For
metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium. Examiner’s
Use
metal rod
metal weight
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy.
[1]
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass.
[1]
(ii) What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk. For
Examiner’s
Use
section through
beaker
layer of corrugated
cardboard stuck to
a layer of smooth
cardboard, with air
trapped between them
The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It
has a thin plastic lid.
(i) State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the
person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same
internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low
thermal capacity.
When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always
drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.
State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least
fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why.
mug ..........................................................................................................................
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10 [Turn over
10
7 The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has “240 V, 100 W” marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of For
fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.
Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can
feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.
By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box.
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
[1]
(b) (i) The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is For
operating normally. Examiner’s
Use
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
I
O F2 F1
Fig. 8.1
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2.
[Total: 8]
9 (a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads For
Examiner’s
Use
SAFETY WARNING
This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be
operated by pull-cord switches.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working
normally.
Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable
of the heater? Tick one box.
5A
10 A
13 A
20 A
[1]
(c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table
lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10 [Turn over
14
10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a For
240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and Examiner’s
Z on Fig. 10.1. Use
W
240 V X
Y
Z
Fig. 10.1
Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made. For
Examiner’s
name ................................................................................................................................ Use
(d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a For
lamp with a white-hot filament. Examiner’s
Use
glass screen
prism
glass
lens P
visible spe
ctrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 11.1
(a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the
prism.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross (×) the position where the thermometer will show
its largest reading. [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market. For
The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is Examiner’s
radioactive. Use
In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets
of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
radiation
detector
watch
counter
sheet
Fig. 12.1
material effect
(i) From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the
watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 12.2
[1]
(ii) State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive
substances in the cupboard.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
*2512877189*
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 24995/3
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
1 (a) (i) Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a
ruler. They are not shown full size.
Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers
in cm.
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
millimetres
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
Fig. 1.1
210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
millimetres
Fig. 1.2
(ii) When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.
Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance.
block
40 50 60 70
grams
Fig. 1.3
[Total: 8]
(b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of
the work he has done.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of
how the energy is converted to electrical energy.
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus
of the lens.
P F
Fig. 4.1
(b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the
broken line. [2]
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
alpha (α), beta (β), gamma (γ), infra-red, radio, ultra-violet, visible, X-rays
(a) Underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations. [2]
(d) Which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4He nuclei? ............................. [1]
[Total: 5]
water water
ice
gentle
heating
ice trapped by
small piece of
gentle wire gauze
heating
Experiment 1 Experiment 2
Cold water is gently heated Cold water is gently heated
at the bottom. The ice at the at the top. The ice trapped
top melts before the water at the bottom remains solid,
boils. even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Name the principal process in Experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the
bottom to the ice at the top.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest two reasons why the ice in Experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. The angle of the refracted ray to
the normal is 40°.
ray of
light
air
40° water
Fig. 7.1
(b) In Fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of
40° to the normal.
air
water
40°
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air. [2]
(ii) The angle in the water in Fig. 7.2 is increased from 40° to 70°, and the ray no longer
emerges into the air.
State what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. Some distance away is a
vertical cliff.
cliff
workman
boy girl
Fig. 8.1
(a) A boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. It takes 1.5 s for
the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy.
(i) What does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance between the post and the boy.
(b) A girl is also watching the workman. She is standing the same distance behind the post as
the boy is in front of it. She hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the
post.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) How long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds?
[Total: 8]
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet.
A B
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters N and S.
[2]
(ii) A small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
coil
core
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the material from which the core should be made.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
10 A cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. The crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the
ship’s electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps.
Fig. 10.1
Each string of lamps contains thirty 100 V lamps. The strings of lamps are run from a 100 V
generator. The resistance of each lamp is 250 Ω. Ignore the resistance of the generator.
(a) State whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) What current does the generator supply to each string of lamps?
State whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
11 The reed switch (reed relay) shown in Fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one.
Fig. 11.1
When a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell.
N S
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete Fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is
taken away. [2]
............................................
............................................
............................................
...................................... [1]
Fig. 11.3
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10 [Turn over
16
12 The table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay.
(a) Complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has
charge. Three answers have been given to help you.
mass charge
gamma (γ) NO
[3]
(b) From which part of the atom do all of these emissions come?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance.
0 909
20 689
40 522
60 400
80 300
100 230
120 170
140 125
160 99
(i) On Fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you.
Plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for
these points. [3]
1000
900
count rate
counts / min
800
= .................................. minutes
600
half-life of substance
= .................................. minutes
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
elapsed time / minutes
Fig. 12.1
(ii) From the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min
to 200 counts / min. Write your answer and any working in the space on the graph. [3]
(iii) Use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.
(d) A different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of
4000 counts / min.
Write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 6 9 9 3 4 3 1 9 7 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NH/DJ) 28876/6
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
Fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone A has been lowered into it on a fine
string.
60.4 cm3
44.2 cm3
water A
Calculate the density of the rock from which stone A was formed.
(c) Stone B, from the same rock as stone A, has a larger volume.
Stone A is removed from the water and replaced by stone B. The measurements are then
repeated.
Which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone B?
Tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed.
60.4 cm3
40.5 g
density
[2]
[Total: 8]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) One of the sketch graphs in Fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume
at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at
constant volume.
pressure pressure
/ Pa / Pa
0 0
Fig. 2.1
(i) On the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis “ volume / m3 ” and the other horizontal
axis “ temperature / °C ”.
(ii) On one of the graphs, mark, with the letter X, the pressure of the gas at the ice point.
[2]
[Total: 5]
(a) Describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy
source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating
electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating
electricity up until the present time.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
refrigeration
unit
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the
temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) The four words below can each be used to describe waves.
Put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves.
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. The river is in a wide gorge and there are high
cliffs on each side.
cliff cliff
A B
Fig. 5.1
The boat sounds its hooter once. Two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat.
The first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. The second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds.
(iii) Further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway
between the cliffs. The boat sounds its hooter again.
Without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is
heard.
...........................................................................................................................................
when ..................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
Fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism.
screen
prism
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen. [2]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) Two light, identical spheres, A and B, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon
threads, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
nylon threads
A B
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been
charged. [1]
(b) A cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth.
Unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was
very slightly damp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
3Ω
A B C D
7Ω
4.2 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between A and D.
current = ............................................................[4]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical
resistors. Arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current.
[2]
[Total: 10]
9 (a) A car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 V battery, a switch, two 12 V headlamps and a 12 V
indicator lamp (inside the car).
left headlamp
right headlamp
indicator lamp
(inside car)
switch 12 V battery
Fig. 9.1
Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness
when the switch is closed. [2]
(b) (i) Explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
The flasher lamp shown in Fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car.
lamp
contact
filament
Fig. 9.2
It contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along
their lengths.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. Explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an
appropriate battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
10 A rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed
between the poles of a permanent magnet.
Figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different
positions.
N S N S N S
(b) On Fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil.
e.m.f.
0
time
Fig. 10.4
[4]
[Total: 6]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. The
terminals labelled H.T. are connected to a high voltage source.
S1 – +
H.T. horizontal metal
plates
screen
V1
C D
S2
cathode anode S3
V2
Fig. 11.1
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot?
switch = ...............................................................
(ii) Which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along CD?
switch = ...............................................................
(iii) Which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards?
switch = ...........................................................[2]
(c) What must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of
downwards?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time.
30
count rate
counts / s
25
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 12.1
(i) Use Fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.
(ii) Use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to
10 counts / s.
(iii) Use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease
from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 1 2 6 4 5 3 7 1 3 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (CW/CGW) 34004/4
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
speed B C
m/s 5
A D
0
0 10 20 time / s 35
Fig. 1.1
(a) Which part, or parts, of Fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is
[Total: 5]
2 Two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
bridge 1
50
m
bridge 2
Fig. 2.1
Suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. The girl on bridge 2 measures how
long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. It takes 400 s to travel between the two
bridges.
(i) Name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
3 (a) In a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is
suspended first from point A and then from point B, as shown in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2.
B B
A
E
D D
E
C
C
(i) What piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through A and B?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of
the triangular card. Label this point clearly with the letter G.
C
B D
[3]
Fig. 3.3
(b) Fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put
in to start with.
Fig. 3.4
On one of the three positions of the toy shown in Fig. 4.3, clearly mark X at a possible position
for the centre of mass of the toy. [2]
[Total: 6]
4 In Fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been
injected.
microscope
smoke
cell light
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the
focused microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from
these observations?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
card
Fig. 5.1
The wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second.
(b) State the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
6 The list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they
are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included.
infra-red radiation
X-rays
gamma rays
visible light
radio waves
ultrasound waves
ultra-violet radiation
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) In the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of
wavelength. The first and last boxes have been filled in for you.
radio waves
gamma rays
[2]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
7 The pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised.
coil
steel
arrow
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle. [2]
[Total: 6]
8 A student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
battery
ammeter
01 23
4
AMP 5
S
coil of
wire
variable resistor
(rheostat)
Fig. 8.1
(a) The student has already made one mistake with his connections.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1, using
standard symbols. [2]
(c) The student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find
the resistance of the coil of wire. On your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to
measure the potential difference across the coil. [1]
(d) Having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of
the variable resistor are as shown in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
2 3 4 5 10
1
0 5 0 15
AMPS VOLTS
(ii) The slider on the variable resistor (see Fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left,
reducing its resistance.
(iii) The slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave
the readings in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
[Total: 9]
9 (a) The circuit symbol shown in Fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment.
Fig. 9.1
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical
energy from a power station to domestic consumers. The device in part (a) is used both at X
and at Y.
132 000 V
power transmission
22 000 V cables and 240 V domestic
station
X pylons Y consumer
Fig. 9.2
(i) Using information from Fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns necessary at X and
at Y. primary turns
(ii) State two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is
very high.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
13
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads.
nylon thread
ball
A B
Fig. 10.1
In the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take,
now that the balls are charged.
[2]
(c) On ball B in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of
(iii) the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it T). [2]
(d) Ball B is in equilibrium. State the value of the resultant of forces E, W and T.
resultant = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. Metal plates above and below
the tube have zero potential difference between them.
Fig. 11.1
(c) What is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower
plate is positive and the upper plate is negative.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
(a) With the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every
7 days, with the results shown below. The background count-rate has already been subtracted.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
count-rate
1000 550 300 160 90
counts / s
On Fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time. [3]
1000
800
600
count-rate
counts / s
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 12.1
(b) (i) From your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is
(ii) From the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 4 8 0 8 1 1 0 5 3 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/JG) 43201/2
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
1 A car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. Fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in For
the car. A speedometer registers how fast the car is going. Examiner’s
Use
60 80
40 100
20 120
km / hour
0 140
Fig. 1.1
(a) How far, in km, does the car travel in ½ hour at the speed shown in Fig. 1.1?
(b) (i) On the axes shown in Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the For
½ hour mentioned in (a). Do not go beyond ½ hour. [3] Examiner’s
Use
100
speed
km / hour
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
(ii) At the end of the ½ hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up
into some mountains. The car climbs the mountains for a further ½ hour.
During the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. The driver then stops
the car so that he can admire the view.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car. [4]
[Total: 10]
2 A student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is For
slightly different from normal. In his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing Examiner’s
some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder. Use
measuring
cylinder reading 2
reading 1
water
balance
reading 3 reading 4
Fig. 2.1
reading 1 53 cm3
reading 2 84 cm3
reading 3 205 g
reading 4 238 g
Calculate
(c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using. For
Examiner’s
Use
[Total: 8]
3 A train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The track is For
horizontal. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
The engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 N. There is a 25 000 N force opposing the
motion, due to friction in the wheels.
(a) Mark these forces on Fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 N and an arrow labelled
25 000 N. [2]
(b) The train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting
on it.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engine’s forward thrust.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
4 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
.............................................. .
.............................................. .
[2]
[Total: 6]
5 (a) The principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor For
destroyed. Examiner’s
Use
What, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a
television?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The television in Fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. During this time, 720 kJ
of electrical energy is supplied.
electrical energy
input = 720 kJ
light energy
output = 4 kJ sound energy
output = 20 kJ
Fig. 5.1
(i) From the information on Fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see
and hear the television during this programme.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
6 The ray diagram in Fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a For
converging lens. Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses
the ray printed on the diagram. [2]
(c) Which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? Tick 3 boxes.
upright
inverted
real [3]
(d) The object is moved to a position further from the lens. For
Examiner’s
What differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image? Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
7 (a) Remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the For
television. Examiner’s
Use
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
(c) Injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
[Total: 4]
.................................................... . [1]
(c) The resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 V across it, as
before.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
9 The coil in the d.c. motor in Fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown. For
Examiner’s
Use
rotation
magnet
– +
y
batter
Fig. 9.1
(b) State two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1 in order to make
the coil rotate more rapidly.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
wall-mounted
switch
ceiling-mounted
pull-cord
switch flush
wall-mounted
switch
nylon cord
plug
plug switch
metal
sections
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.
[1]
(b) (i) Which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation. For
Examiner’s
(i) Which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the Use
laundry?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) The laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and
the three lamps.
mains
supply
Fig. 10.2
Complete Fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to
light at full brightness when the switch is on. [2]
[Total: 8]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point A, the electric field between two For
charged metal plates. Examiner’s
Use
electron
beam A
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between A and the line BC.
[3]
(b) The voltage across the plates is reversed. State what difference this makes to the path
of the electron beam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
12 The table below gives details about some radioactive substances. For
Examiner’s
Use
substance symbol type of radiation emitted half-life
thorium-232 232 Th
90
alpha (α) 1.4 × 1010 years
(a) Which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its
atoms?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral
atom?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Samples of each of these substances are decaying. Each sample starts with the same
number of atoms.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 0 2 9 5 0 5 8 2 3 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49779/4
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State the name that is given to the turning effect of a force. Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. A man opens the gate by pulling on it, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
After he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him.
When closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length.
State two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he
opened the gate.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) State the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an
oil slick, on the water.
One such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 × 104 m by
6.0 × 103 m.
[Total: 6]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day. For
Examiner’s
Use
starting pistol timekeeper
80 m
Calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.
(b) The timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the
stopwatch.
(i) By how much will his time for the race be in error?
(ii) Suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) When he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance For
of the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
55 0 5
50 min 10
5
45 15
seconds
40 20
35
30 25
Fig. 3.2
How long did the winner actually take to run the race?
[Total: 8]
4 An archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in Fig. 4.1. For
He then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target. Examiner’s
Use
bow
string
arrow
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) On another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height
before falling back down to the ground.
Use words from the following list to complete the sentences below.
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
7
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The nut in Fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate.
nut
bolt
very hot
flame
Fig. 5.1
Explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
6 (a) In Fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to For
another prism that is identical but upside down. Examiner’s
Use
t
l igh
red
Fig. 6.1
(i) The angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on Fig. 6.1 as i.
On Fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into
the air again. Label the emergent ray “line R”. [3]
(iii) The beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along
line R.
Using the letter P, mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the left-
hand prism. [1]
(b) On another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a
prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
i red lig
ht
t
igh
l
red + ht
ig
el
blu
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air
again. [3]
diffraction
dispersion
focusing
[Total: 9]
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the Earth’s magnetic field. For
Examiner’s
Use
compass
needle
N S
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the Earth. [1]
(b) The S pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the S pole of the compass needle, as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
N S S
Fig. 7.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass For
needle, as shown in Fig. 7.3. Examiner’s
Use
wire
N S
Fig. 7.3
When there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 8.1
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Three cells identical to the cell in Fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 V battery. The battery is
connected in series with a 180 Ω resistor.
(c) A second 180 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 Ω resistor from (b).
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel,
connected to the battery. Use standard symbols.
[3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor C and a resistor of very high For
resistance. Examiner’s
Use
C V
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, use the letter S to label the switch. [1]
(b) When the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
10 A 240 V a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in For
Fig. 10.1. A lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 V supply is connected to the secondary Examiner’s
coil. Use
240 V 6V
mains lamp
Fig. 10.1
(a) Name a suitable material from which the coils may be made.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see
Fig. 10.1).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to
light at full brightness.
(d) State what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
11 The apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is For
shown in Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
The source and detector are about 2 cm apart. The detector is connected to a scaler, which
measures the count rate.
Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector.
The table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers.
count rate
absorbing material
counts / s
air 523
sheet of paper 523
0.5 mm of aluminium 391
10 mm of aluminium 214
10 mm of lead 122
(a) How can you tell that the source is not emitting any α-particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
4 4
12 (a) The symbol for an α-particle is either 2 α or 2 He. For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) What does the 4 indicate about an α-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
0 0
(b) The symbol for a β-particle is either –1β or –1e.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides.
240 244 248 250 250
94Pu 96Cm 98Cf 97Bk 98Cf
244
(i) 96Cm decays by emitting an α-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
250
(ii) 97Bk decays by emitting a β-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
3
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
Tuesday 25 MAY 1999 Morning 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
W E
S O
P direction of rotation
Fig. 1.1
(a) The device rotates about O at a constant rate of 0.2 revolutions per second. OP is 10 m
long.
Calculate the speed of the point P. (The circumference of a circle is 2π x radius.)
(b) (i) Use your answer to (a) to write down the velocity of the point P when P is at the
point shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why the speed of point P is constant but its velocity changes as the
sprayer rotates.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 S99
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Explain how you know that there is a net force at the end of the arm P, acting towards O.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
12
10
horizontal speed
m/s 8
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
time/s
Fig. 1.2
(i) Explain
1. why the horizontal speed decreases slightly over the 0.6 s of the motion,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
1. the height above the ground at which the water leaves the sprayer,
height = ...........................................
distance = ...........................................
[7]
0625/3 S99
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) Fig. 1.3 shows the path of the water at one instant. The pressure of the water on an
object placed at point Q is much greater than the pressure of the water on the same
object when placed at point R.
Q
sprayer
ground
R
Fig. 1.3
The pressure exerted by the water on the object at point Q is 5 x 105 N/m2 and the
pressure on the object at R is 1 x 105 N/m2.
Explain this decrease in pressure.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
mass of water in the pool, heating system and circulation pipes, 54 000 kg;
power of the heating system, 30 kW;
rise in temperature, 2 °C in 5 hours (18 000 s).
(a) Assuming no energy loss, use these data to calculate a value for the specific heat
capacity of water. Show your working.
0625/3 S99
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The student found that the value for the specific heat capacity of water, worked out by
this method, was higher than the accepted value.
The average temperature of the water in the pool during the test period was 24 °C,
whilst the average temperature of the air was 19 °C.
(i) Describe, in molecular terms, ways in which the water loses heat from its surface.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why the loss of heat from the water led to the student’s higher value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
Fig. 3.1 shows the lens position and the focal length PF. The length PF is to scale.
The object and the image are both on the left-hand side of the lens but their positions
are not shown.
line which passes through the bottom of the image and the object
P F
Fig. 3.1
0625/3 S99
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a wide parallel beam of monochromatic light incident on a block of glass
at an angle of 37°.
37°
90° air
glass
Fig. 3.2
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The angle of refraction in the glass is 22°. Calculate the refractive index of this
glass.
(iv) On Fig. 3.2, use your protractor to draw in the path of the beam of light in the glass.
[7]
tube wall S
+V
positively
charged plate
vacuum
R
P Q
negatively
0V charged plate
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 4.1, draw the electron beam from Q to show its path between the charged
plates.
(ii) Explain any change of direction of the electron beam when it is between the
charged plates.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) On Fig. 4.1, show the direction of the conventional current in the electron beam by
drawing an arrow and labelling it D.
[5]
(b) The voltage across the plates is increased so that one of the plates collects 1014
electrons in 10 s. Each electron carries a charge of 1.6 x 10–19 C.
charge = ..........................................
(ii) State an equation linking charge and current. Hence calculate the current in wire RS.
...................................................................................................................................
current = ..........................................
[4]
0625/3 S99
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Air containing charged dust particles flows between two metal plates. A high potential
difference is connected across the plates as illustrated in Fig. 4.2.
A +
Fig. 4.2
The charged particles are attracted to the upper plate and move through a potential
difference of 10 000 V. The ammeter records a current of 2.1 x 10 –6 A.
Calculate
(i) the energy supplied by the voltage source in 10 minutes (600 s),
energy = ...........................................
power = ...........................................
[6]
beam of coil
electrons vacuum
+
12 V
–
Fig. 4.3
(i) On Fig. 4.3, sketch the path of the electron beam until it hits the end of the tube.
Explain your choice of path.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The resistance of the coil producing the magnetic field is 100 Ω. Calculate the
current in the coil.
current = ..........................................
(iii) State the effect on the electron deflection of increasing and reversing the potential
difference connected across the coil.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
0625/3 S99
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) A laboratory needs to find a radioactive isotope which will produce very intense
topicspeed
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicsound
ionisation of air.
radioactive isotope
Fig. 5.1
(i) Explain why sparks jump between the gauze and the wire when a radioactive
isotope with high ionising properties is brought near the gauze.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) An α-emitting source, a β-emitting source and a γ-emitting source, each of the
same activity, are tested. One source gives no sparks at all, the second gives only
a few sparks per second and the third many sparks per second. State the relative
quantities of ionisation produced by each type of emitter.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) Some of the results of a comparison between α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are
shown in the table below.
α β γ
mass 4 units
charge +2 units
0625/3 S99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
Thursday 16 NOVEMBER 1999 Morning 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
suspension
steel mass
tube
steel pile
ground
Fig. 1.1
The steel mass is raised by an electric motor and then falls under gravity.
The falling steel has a mass of 200 kg and falls a distance of 6.0 m.
(i) the potential energy gained by the mass each time it is raised,
(ii) the maximum speed at which the mass hits the pile.
speed = .....................................
[7]
0625/3 W99
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) When the mass hits the pile, it has kinetic energy. This energy is transformed into other
forms of energy as the speed of the falling mass rapidly reduces to zero. As this
happens, the pile is forced a small distance into the ground.
(i) State the energy conversions which take place, starting from the kinetic energy of
the falling mass.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain how a large force is produced when the pile is driven a short distance into
the ground.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[8]
(c) In raising the steel mass 6.0 m, the electric motor uses more energy than that
calculated in (a) (i).
Write down and explain two causes of this higher energy requirement.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. .....................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
;;;
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a piece of apparatus which could be used to find the specific heat capacity of
topicenergy
topiceffect
a metal at high temperatures.
topicturningeffect
topicturning
topicthermocouple
;;;
electric heater inserted
lagging centrally in the block
;;;
metal thermocouple inserted
block in the block
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe the experimental steps which were taken to obtain these results.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Use the results to calculate an average value for the specific heat capacity of the metal
over this temperature range.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Suggest two reasons why use of a thermocouple might have an advantage over a
mercury-in-glass thermometer.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
air
Q
P 85° R
85°
S
T N
M
glass
air
Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the angle between the ray PQ and the ray RS.
(b) Explain why the ray PQ does not leave the fibre at Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 W99
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The light waves travelling towards Q are monochromatic and have a frequency of
4 x 1014 Hz and a wavelength of 5 x 10–7 m.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
speed = .....................................
(iii) Waves travelling along TQ pass into the air. The refractive index of the glass
is 1.50.
Write down an expression from which the speed of the light waves in air could be
found.
..............................................................................................................................[5]
Fig. 4.1
(i) Name two factors and state how they are changed in order to increase the output
e.m.f. of the generator.
1. .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain what is meant by the statement ‘the induced e.m.f. acts in such a direction
as to produce effects to oppose the change causing it’.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
0625/3 W99
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) Fig. 4.2 shows the basic parts of transformer No. 1 which is 100% efficient.
input output to
from generator supply cables
400 V, 80 A 30 000 V
Fig. 4.2
Using the information on Fig 4.2, calculate the current in the supply cables.
current = .....................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain why the use of the two transformers results in a big reduction in power loss
in the supply cables.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
7.7 A X Y
4.6 A 2.3 A
110 V 24 Ω R 48 Ω S T
Fig. 4.3
Using the current, voltage and resistance values shown on Fig. 4.3, calculate
current at X = .....................................
current at Y = .....................................
resistance = .....................................
resistance = .....................................
power = .....................................
0625/3 W99
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Lengths of steel may be joined by welding them together, as iillustrated in Fig 5.1.
topicresistance
steel weld
steel
Fig. 5.1
A liquid radioactive source is to be used to test that the welds joining lengths of steel pipe
are of equal thickness.
The diameter of the pipes is 120 mm and the pipe wall thickness is 5 mm.
The liquid runs through the pipes whilst a suitable detector moves around the outside of the
joints.
(a) With the aid of a labelled diagram, explain how this method detects places where the
welds are thinner than 5 mm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(i) Write down what you would expect to be the results of these tests.
α-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
β-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
γ-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State and explain which type of emitter would be most useful for testing these
welds.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) Describe three precautions which should be taken to ensure the safety of the operator
who is making these tests.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
At this point the firework fails to explode and falls back down the same vertical path to the
ground.
At any point on its path, the firework has both a velocity and a speed.
(a) Using the terms vector and scalar, explain the difference between velocity and speed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a graph which shows the height of the firework above the ground during the
first 5 s of its journey.
120
height 100
above ground / m
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 time / s 5
Fig. 1.1
1. find the time taken for the firework to reach its maximum height above the
ground,
...................................................................................................................................
2. describe how the motion of the firework changes over the first 5 s of its journey.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/3 S00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2 and air resistance on the firework is
negligible.
State
deceleration = ........................................................
2. the total time taken for the firework to rise 100 m and then to fall back to the
ground.
(iii) State the velocity with which the falling firework hits the ground.
velocity =................................................................
[8]
(b) Explain, in molecular terms, how heat is transferred from the surface of a block of ice to
its centre.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a simple beam balance made from a pivot and a metre rule.
topicmolecularmodels
topicmodels
topicmolecular
topiclens
topictotalinternalreflection
topicangle
topicrefraction
cotton
bag of 0.25 kg
sand mass 0.50 kg
mass
pivot
bench top
Fig. 3.1
(a) Find
mass =.................................................
(ii) the weight of the bag of sand. (The acceleration of freefall is 10 m/s2.)
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The cotton holding the 0.50 kg mass snaps and the mass falls to the bench.
It strikes the bench at a speed of 1.2 m/s.
(d) On impact with the bench, the mass bounces up a small distance. Some transformation
of energy occurs during the impact. State the forms of the energy just before and just
after the impact.
before: ..............................................................................................................................
after: .............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00 [Turn over
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed box containing only dry air. At a particular instant, one of the air
topictransformations
topicenergy
topicenergytransformations
molecules in the box is situated at P and it is moving towards face ABCD along the direction
shown by the arrow.
C G
B F
D H
A E
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe and explain a possible path of the molecule within the box.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The box is squashed but no air leaks out. By calculation, complete the table below.
5 Fig. 5.1 shows how a right-angled prism may be used to change the direction of a ray of
topicresistance
light.
D E
90° F C
B
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the ray of light does not change direction at D and at F.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one property of the light which does change at D and at F. At each point say
whether it increases or decreases.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) At E the light splits, with one ray along the surface of the prism and one ray along EF.
Draw the normal at E. Label the critical angle with the letter X and state its value.
(d) The refractive index of this glass may be calculated using the formula
refractive index of glass = 1/sin c,
where c is the critical angle.
Use your value of the critical angle of this glass to calculate its refractive index.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The distance between two consecutive rarefactions in a sound wave is 2.5 m. The
speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.
(c) A person makes a loud sound and hears the echo of this sound 1.2 s later.
Calculate how far the person is from the object causing the echo. Assume that the
speed of sound is 330 m / s.
0625/3 S00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A student is given a battery, a switch, two insulated thick copper leads and a coil of
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicforce
topicconductor
topicmagnetic
resistance wire. On Fig. 7.1 only the coil is drawn in.
coil of
resistance
wire
cardboard
tube
Fig. 7.1
(a) The student set up the apparatus to make a current flow through the coil.
Using standard symbols for components, complete a circuit diagram on Fig. 7.1. Also on
Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field lines in and around the coil, with arrows to indicate the
direction of the lines. [4]
(d) The battery supplies 24 J of energy to drive 16 C of charge around the circuit.
Define the e.m.f. of this battery.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a transformer.
topicradioactivity
primary secondary
coil coil
Fig. 8.1
(a) Explain why there is an e.m.f. across the secondary coil even though there is no
electrical connection between the primary and secondary coils.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) When the transformer is in use, the current in the secondary circuit is 3.2 A. The
transformer may be considered 100% efficient.
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1 continue the path of the electron beam between the plates
(i) for plates with a very small charge (label this path P),
(ii) for plates with the opposite charges to those shown on Fig. 9.1 (label this path R).
[3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows another arrangement, similar to the first, but in this case the electron
beam continues in a straight line because a magnet (which is not shown) has been
placed near the plates.
Fig. 9.2
Explain where you would place the N-pole of the magnet in order to achieve this effect.
You may draw on the diagram if you feel that it will make your answer clearer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 S00
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) A radioactive source contains an isotope of thorium.
Thorium (22980 Th) decays by -particle emission to radium (Ra).
topictension
[2]
(b) The radium produced is also radioactive. Fig. 10.1 shows a laboratory experiment to
test for the presence of the radioactive emissions from the thorium source, using a
radiation detector.
In the laboratory there is a background count of 20 counts/minute.
5 mm thick
aluminium
P Q
radioactive 3 cm
source
Fig. 10.1
P 2372
Q 361
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3 S00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
Tuesday 14 NOVEMBER 2000 Morning 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
length of steel
wire
0.5 kg mass
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1 use labelled arrows to indicate the direction and line of action of each of the
two forces acting on the 0.5 kg mass.
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the values of the two forces which you
have indicated.
(b) Suggest what causes the two forces to act on the mass.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The 0.5 kg mass is increased by steps of 0.5 kg up to 10 kg. The corresponding
extensions of the steel wire are measured. When the mass on the wire is 10 kg, the wire
snaps. Fig. 1.2 shows part of the graph of extension against load for the wire.
15
extension
/mm Z
10
5
Y
X
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
mass/kg
Fig. 1.2
mass =..........................................................
extension = ...................................................
[4]
M free pivot
fixed pivot
cylinder piston
scale
Fig. 2.1
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) State which of the three suggested materials would give a thermometer of greatest
sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i) State which of the three materials would allow the thermometer to measure the
largest range of temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The student found that the temperature scale of this thermometer was non-linear.
Explain what this means.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a person raising a concrete block from a river bed by using two pulleys.
topicmolecularmodels
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topiclens
pulley
pulley
6m
block
Fig. 3.1
(a) As shown in Fig. 3.1, the top of the block is 6.0 m below the water surface. The density
of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
(b) The block is raised through the water. At one point, the water pressure acting on the top
of the block is 4.5 x 104 Pa. The area of the top of the block is 0.015 m2. Calculate the
downward force exerted by the water on the top of the block.
(c) When the block is clear of the water, it is raised a further 4.0 m. The weight of the block
is 550 N. Calculate the work done on the block as it is raised the 4.0 m through the air.
(d) Some of the energy the person uses to raise the block is converted into heat energy.
Indicate on the Fig. 3.1, using an arrow and the letter H, two places where heat is
released. For each place, explain why heat is released there.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
wavefronts
gap in wall
Fig. 4.1
(a) The waves moving towards the wall have a wavelength of 1.6 m and a frequency of
0.80 Hz.
(b) State the wavelength and frequency of the waves after they have passed through the
gap in the wall.
wavelength = ................................................
(c) On Fig. 4.1, complete the pattern of wavefronts to the right of the wall. [3]
0625/3 W00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) A student determines the specific heat capacity of water. It is found that 15.5 kJ of
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topiclight
topicspeed
topicsound
energy supplied raise the temperature of 0.45 kg of water by 8.2 °C.
(b) A cylinder, which is closed by a gas-tight moveable piston, contains 0.0060 m3 of gas.
The gas has its pressure raised from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 3.5 x 105 Pa, without any change in
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the volume when the pressure is 3.5 x 105 Pa.
volume = .......................................................
[4]
The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm. The diagram is drawn to full scale.
lens object
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw any two rays from the tip of the object which enable you to locate the
tip of the image. Draw in the image and label it I. [3]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw in an eye position which would enable image I to be seen. [1]
(c) By taking measurements from Fig. 6.1, work out how many times bigger the image is
than the object.
0625/3 W00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows how a student set up a circuit using three identical lamps. Assume that the
topicconvection
resistance of each lamp does not change with the brightness of the lamp.
12 V
A
P R
Fig. 7.1
(b) Calculate the combined resistance of the three lamps as connected in Fig. 7.1.
(c) Calculate the current which would be shown on the ammeter in Fig. 7.1.
(d) Explain why lamp R is less bright than normal and why lamps P and Q are both equally
very dim.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
[1]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a simple electrical generator. By turning the handle, the single coil may be
topicatomic
topicatomicstructure
topicstructure
spun between the poles of the magnet.
topicelectromagneticinduction
topicelectromagnetic
topicinduction
rotation
S
N
bulb
Fig. 8.1
0625/3 W00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) The handle is turned so that the coil makes two complete revolutions per second. The
maximum output is 7 V. On Fig. 8.2, sketch this output over a period of 1 s.
8
e.m.f.
/V 6
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00
2 time / s
[3]
Fig. 8.2
(b) Explain
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
topicpressure
metal plate
wooden clamp
and stand
Fig. 9.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the metal plate can be positively charged without the polythene touching the
plate.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A strong α-particle emitting source is brought close to, but not touching, the positively
charged metal plate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) A nuclide, symbol AZ X, decays by β-particle emission to a nuclide, symbol Y.
topictension
A β-particle has the symbol –o1 e.
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows how a β-particle source may be used to measure the thickness of paper
as it is being produced.
rollers
β- particle
source
paper
wound
on roll
detector
Fig. 10.1
(i) Explain why the reading of the detector changes with the thickness of the paper.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Write down two reasons why β-particles are more useful than γ -rays for this
purpose.
reason 1. ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
reason 2. ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
beam of magnetic
β -particles field into
paper
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2 continue the path of the beam of β -particles as they pass through the magnetic
field. [2]
0625/3 W00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
150
100
vertical speed
–––––––––––
m/s
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
time/s
Fig. 1.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On Figs 1.2 and 1.3, indicate by labelled arrows the vertical forces acting on the falling
object
falling object
Fig. 1.2
parachute
falling object
(d) State whether or not there is a resultant vertical force acting on the falling object
.....................................
.....................................
[1]
uniform speed of
20 m/s in the
direction shown
mass 800 kg
Fig. 2.1
(b) The brakes of the car are applied for 4 s, which reduces the speed of the car to 5 m/s.
0625/3/M/J/01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Describe an experiment to find the average density of a small rock sample of approximately
topicmagnet
100 g mass.
[2]
[2]
(c) Explain how to work out the average density from the measurements taken.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
air-tight container
Fig. 4.1
(a) In the space below, draw a diagram to show how the particle labelled P would move
when it is observed for a short time.
[1]
(b) With reference to dust particles and air molecules, explain the movement which you
have drawn.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe and explain how the movement would change if the temperature of the air in
the container increased.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus which may be used to find the specific heat capacity of a liquid.
topiclight
topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicspeed
electric
immersion thermometer
heater
glass beaker
liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use the data to calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
(b) (i) Explain why the value obtained from this data will be higher than the actual value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe one addition to the apparatus which would make the calculated
experimental value nearer to the actual value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
60°
incident ray Q
of blue light
glass
P prism
R
emergent
ray
Fig. 6.1
The ray hits the prism at point P, then crosses the prism to point Q. Part of the ray emerges
along the surface QR as shown.
(a) (i) By using measurements taken from the diagram, find the critical angle of the glass
for blue light.
(ii) Use your value to explain how total internal reflection of blue light could be made to
occur at point Q.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Using measured angles on the diagram, calculate the refractive index of the glass for
blue light.
0625/3/M/J/01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an unlabelled diagram which a teacher draws to represent a sound wave in
topicconvection
air.
}
P Q
Fig. 7.1
(a) What label should be put on the line with the arrow?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) What does the uneven spacing of the lines show?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) From Fig. 7.1, measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
4V
Fig. 8.1
The lamp is marked 1.5 V, 0.6 W. The lamp lights at normal brightness.
Calculate
current = .....................................
resistance = .....................................
charge = ...............................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The resistance of the coil of wire shown in Fig. 8.1 is 6.2 Ω and its length is 1.0 m.
Using only 1.0 m lengths from the same reel of wire, and without cutting any of them,
state how you would produce a resistance of
(i) 3.1 Ω,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) 12.4 Ω.
...................................................................................................................................
Complete the circuits in Fig. 8.2 and in Fig. 8.3 to show how the lengths of wire are
connected in each case. [3]
4V 4V
resistance resistance
3.1Ω 12.4Ω
(c) In a similar circuit to that shown in Fig. 8.1, the resistance of the coil is 5.0 Ω and the
current through it is 0.6 A.
Calculate the heat energy produced in the coil in 20 s.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain
(i) why a secondary output is obtained even though there is no electrical connection
between the primary and secondary coils,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) why there would be no output voltage if the primary coil were connected to a 240 V
d.c. supply.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(i) There are 100 turns on the secondary coil. How many turns are there on the
primary coil?
0625/3/M/J/01
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) Complete the following table for α-particles. The first answer has been given.
topictension
mass
number
[5]
(b) Fig.10.1 shows the paths of α-particles scattered by the nuclei of metal atoms in thin foils.
key:
α-particle
nuclei of metal atoms
Fig. 10.1
Explain what can be deduced from the paths shown in Fig. 10.1 about
(i) the mass of the nucleus of a metal atom compared to the mass of an α-particle,
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
30
25
20
speed
––––– 15
m/s
10
0
0 10 20 30
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The section of the track with the sharp bend has a maximum speed restriction. The train
decelerates approaching the bend so that at the start of the bend it has just reached the
maximum speed allowed. The train is driven around the bend at the maximum speed
allowed and accelerates immediately on leaving the bend.
(i) What is the maximum speed allowed round the bend in the track?
(ii) How long does the train take to travel the bend of the track?
(b) The train has to slow down to go round the bend. Calculate the deceleration.
deceleration = .....................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) As the train is driven round the bend, there is an extra force acting, called the centripetal
force.
(i) On Fig. 1.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of this force.
train
curved
track
direction
of motion
Fig. 1.2
(ii) State the effect that this force has on the motion.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
V = 0 m/s
V = 45 m/s
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the dummy driver is 90 kg. The impact time to reduce the dummy’s speed from
45 m/s to zero is 1.2 s.
(a) Calculate
momentum = .....................................
force = .....................................
[4]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate how much of the dummy’s energy is transformed during the collision.
0625/3/O/N/01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A body is in equilibrium and is acted upon by two vertical downward forces in such a way that
topicmagnet
there is no net moment about a pivot. A student is asked to show this experimentally.
The student is provided with a suitable pivot, a metre rule with a hole drilled in the centre,
two sets of masses and strong cotton.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up ready for use.
[2]
(b) Describe how two sets of readings are taken, explaining how equilibrium is achieved in
each case.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Write down, in table form, two possible sets of values and use them to show that there
is no net moment. [3]
start of
movement
M
position after
a short time
interval
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why, in Fig. 4.1, the path of M has sudden, sharp changes of direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) At the end of the short time interval, M is a short distance from its starting point. Use
this observation to explain why a gas spreads slowly through air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) A student concludes that the results of his experiments show that it requires more
topicspeed
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topicthermal
topicsound
topiclight
energy to convert 1 g of water into steam at 100 °C than it does to raise the temperature
topicthermalcapacity
topicthermometer
experiment 1 experiment 2
mass of water used 250 g mass of water evaporated at 100 °C 15 g
heat energy supplied 10 500 J heat energy supplied 33 900 J
rise in temperature 10 °C
(b) Explain, in molecular terms, why considerable heat energy is needed to convert 1 g of
water into 1 g of steam at 100 °C, without any change in temperature taking place.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(i) sensitivity,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) range,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01 [Turn over
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Figs 6.1 and 6.2 show what happens to waves at two different types of boundary.
topicdispersion
0625/3/O/N/01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.3 is drawn to full scale. The distance CF is the focal length of the lens.
object
F C F
Fig. 6.3
(i) By drawing rays from the tip of the object, locate the position of the image.
Hence work out how many times bigger the image is than the object.
(ii) 1. Draw an eye on Fig. 6.3 to show a suitable place to view the image.
2. Suggest a use for this lens arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
cardboard
B
A
direction of current
in the solenoid
indicated by
arrows
compass
originally
placed at A
Fig. 7.1
0625/3/O/N/01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the result of a similar experiment with a current-carrying, straight wire.
direction of
current vertically
upwards through
the cardboard
C A
B
horizontal
cardboard
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw another magnetic field line starting at C. Mark its direction with an
arrow.
(ii) Explain why the line from C could never pass through B.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) What would be the effect on the strength and on the direction of the magnetic
field of
strength....................................... direction...........................................
strength....................................... direction...........................................
[5]
240 V
a.c.
Z X A
Y B
Fig. 8.1
current at X = .....................................
current at Y = .....................................
(b) The resistance of lamp A is 96 Ω and the resistance of lamp B 192 Ω. Using these
values, or by an alternative method, calculate the total circuit resistance. (Ignore the
resistance of the circuit wiring.)
240 V
a.c.
P
A B
96 Ω 192 Ω
Fig. 8.2
current at P = .....................................
0625/3/O/N/01
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) With reference to values already worked out, explain why the lamps should be
connected as in Fig. 8.1 and not as in Fig. 8.2.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The two lamps are to be switched on and off independently. State and explain
which circuit is better for this purpose when suitably placed switches are included.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
d.c. supply
Fig. 9.1
(a) Complete the connections to show how you would use the c.r.o. to measure the
potential difference across the lamp. [1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when measuring this potential difference.
trace when
p.d. connected
Fig. 9.2
(c) Suggest one advantage of using this method of measuring potential difference rather
than using a standard voltmeter.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/O/N/01
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) Radioactive sodium has a nuclide represented by the symbol 24
11 Na.
topictension
Complete the equation below to show how this nuclide decays with the emission of
a β-particle.
24
11 Na → Mg + e [2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a narrow beam of β-particles entering an electric field created by two
charged plates.
narrow beam P
of β-particles
Fig 10.1
(i) Complete the path of the β-particles, starting from the point P.
(ii) Explain any change of direction which you have shown.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State the readings which need to be taken and how they would be used to decide
whether or not the thickness of the paper varies.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3/O/N/01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
finishing point
starting point
Fig. 1.1
(a) Make a list of all the readings that would be needed. Where possible, indicate how the
accuracy of the readings could be improved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Using words, not symbols, write down all equations that would be needed to work out
the power of a student.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) When the student has reached the finishing point and is standing at the top of the
stairs, what form of energy has increased to its maximum?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why the total power of the student is greater than the power calculated by
this method.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/M/J/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A small rubber ball falls vertically, hits the ground and rebounds vertically upwards.
Fig. 2.1 is the speed-time graph for the ball.
10 B
speed D
8
m/s
6
2
A
0 C E
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Using information from the graph, describe the following parts of the motion of the ball.
(i) part AB
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) part DE
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Explain what is happening to the ball along the part of the graph from B through C to D.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Whilst the ball is in contact with the ground, what is the
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Use the graph to calculate the distance travelled by the ball between D and E.
(f) Use the graph to calculate the deceleration of the ball between D and E.
deceleration = ..................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 is an attempt to show the molecules in water and the water vapour molecules over
the water surface.
water vapour
molecules
water molecules
Fig. 3.1
(a) Explain, in terms of the energies of the molecules, why only a few water molecules have
escaped from the water surface.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State two ways of increasing the number of water molecules escaping from the surface.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
80 mm
air
piston
cylinder
Fig. 4.1
The piston is pushed in until the pressure in the cylinder rises to 3.8 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the new length of the air column in the cylinder, assuming that the
temperature of the air has not changed.
air
Fig. 4.2
The volume of the air in the cylinder changes as the temperature of the air changes.
(i) The apparatus is to be used as a thermometer. Describe how two fixed points, 0 °C
and 100 °C, and a temperature scale could be marked on the apparatus.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how this apparatus could be used to indicate the temperature of a large
beaker of water.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an arrangement where a plane mirror is used in a shop to watch a display
counter. The arrangement is drawn to a scale of 1 cm : 1 m.
plane mirror
P wall
display counter
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, draw rays to show how much of the display cannot be seen from P.
Indicate this by shading in the part that cannot be seen.
[3]
(b) By construction on Fig. 5.1 and by using the scale, calculate how far the mirror must be
moved so that all of the display counter can be seen from P.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(a) During a lightning flash, the average wavelength of the light emitted is 5 × 10–7 m. This
light travels at 3 × 108 m/s.
(b) The interval between the lightning flash being seen and the thunder being heard is
3.6 s. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
(i) Calculate the distance between the thunderstorm and the observer.
distance = ............................................
(ii) Explain why the speed of light is not taken into account in this calculation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A single ray of white light from the lightning is incident on a prism as shown in Fig. 6.1.
prism
screen
ray of
light
Fig. 6.1
Complete the path of the ray to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. Label the
colours. [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) Two non-conducting spheres, made of different materials, are initially uncharged. They
are rubbed together. This causes one of the spheres to become positively charged and
one negatively charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Once charged, the two spheres are separated, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
+ + – –
+ + + – – –
+ + – –
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw the electric field between the two spheres. Indicate by arrows the
direction of the electric field lines. [2]
(c) A conducting wire attached to a negatively charged metal object is connected to earth.
This allows 2.0 × 1010 electrons, each carrying a charge of 1.6 × 10–19 C, to flow to
earth in 1.0 × 10–3 s.
Calculate
charge .....................................
current .....................................
[3]
T1
240 V a.c.
T2
primary secondary
Fig. 8.1
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the 15 V output across the secondary coil.
potential
difference
time
Fig. 8.2
On the same axes, sketch the graph of the potential difference across the terminals T1
and T2 before the battery is connected. [2]
(c) Explain how the circuit converts an a.c. supply into a d.c. output.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) On Fig. 8.1, draw in a battery connected so that it may be charged. [1]
0625/3/M/J/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) When fully charged, the 12V battery can supply a current of 2.0 A for 30 hours (1.08 ×
105 s).
Calculate
power = ......................................
(ii) the total energy that the battery will supply during the 30 hours.
energy = ......................................
[4]
9 Fig. 9.1 shows three resistors connected across a low voltage d.c. supply, and a c.r.o.
A d.c. F
supply
B C D E
Y input
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain how you would use a 1 V d.c. supply to calibrate the c.r.o.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 9.1, draw in the connections between the c.r.o. and the circuit so that the
potential difference between points C and D may be measured. [2]
(c) The potential differences between A and F, B and C, C and D, and D and E are
measured.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the test apparatus used to verify that
α-particles are emitted from the liquid. [2]
(b) Explain how the apparatus may be used to estimate the quantity of α-radiation being
emitted from the sample.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State any two safety precautions that the technician might take whilst making the test.
precaution 1 .....................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
precaution 2 .....................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/3
PAPER 3
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
10
TOTAL
B
metal
block
C
F
D A
E
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey from B to F.
Label D, E and F on your graph. [3]
speed
B
time
Fig. 1.2
(b) The mass of the block is 0.2 kg. The vertical height of B above A is 0.6 m.
The acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2.
(ii) At C, the block is moving at a speed of 2.5 m/s. Calculate its kinetic energy at C.
0625/3/O/N/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) As it passes D, the speed of the block remains almost constant but the velocity
changes. Using the terms vector and scalar, explain this statement.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) F is the point where the kinetic energy of the block is zero. In terms of energy changes,
explain why F is lower than B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
100 g mass
metre rule
suitable pivot on which the rule will balance
measuring cylinder that is big enough for the piece of rock to fit inside
cotton
water
(a) (i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of apparatus from this list set up so
that the student is able to find the mass of the piece of rock.
(ii) State the readings the student should take and how these would be used to find the
mass of the rock.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of the inner wall of a pottery kiln.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple that could be used for
this purpose. [2]
(b) Describe
(i) how you would read the temperature of the wall from the thermocouple,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two conditions in which a thermocouple is very suitable for temperature
measurement.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(i) Using the symbols above, write down the equation that must be used to find the
value of the specific latent heat L of water.
(ii) Use the equation to calculate the specific latent heat of water from the readings
above.
(b) Explain, in terms of the energy of molecules, why the specific latent heat of water has a
high value.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the air pressure variation along a sound wave.
air pressure
above normal
normal
A B
Fig. 5.1
(i) On AB in Fig. 5.1, mark one point of compression with a dot and the letter C and
the next point of rarefaction with a dot and the letter R.
(ii) In terms of the wavelength, what is the distance along the wave between a
compression and the next rarefaction?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A sound wave travels through air at a speed of 340 m/s. Calculate the frequency of a
sound wave of wavelength 1.3 m.
air Q
glass
Fig. 6.1
(i) Measure the critical angle of the glass from Fig. 6.1.
(ii) Explain what is meant by the critical angle of the light in the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows another ray passing through the same block.
Fig. 6.2
The speed of the light between W and Q is 3.0 × 108 m/s. The speed of the light
between Q and Y is 2.0 × 108 m/s.
speed = ......................................
(ii) Write down an expression, in terms of the speeds of the light, that may be used to
find the refractive index of the glass. Determine the value of the refractive index.
(iii) Explain why there is no change of direction of ray QY as it passes out of the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
(iv) What happens to the wavelength of the light as it passes out of the glass?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
12 V d.c.
supply
A
turns of thick
copper wire
cardboard tube
Fig. 7.1
Two bars of the same size are also available, one made of iron and the other of steel.
(a) (i) State which bar should be used to make a permanent magnet.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how the apparatus would be used to make a permanent magnet.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Suggest one reason why the circuit contains an ammeter and a variable resistor.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) During the making of a permanent magnet, the ammeter reads a steady current of 4.0 A
throughout the 5.0 s that the current is switched on. The voltage of the supply is 12 V.
Calculate
resistance = ............................
power = .................................
energy = .................................
[6]
(c) The potential difference across the variable resistor is 7.0 V and that across the
ammeter is zero.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
N S
wire in a direction
at right angles to the page
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The wire is free to move. The current is switched on so that its direction is into the page.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
change 1 ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
change 2 ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons, two charged plates and a screen. These components
are inside an electron tube, the outline of which is not shown.
charged plate
beam of P
electrons
screen
X Y
charged plate
Fig. 9.1
(b) In this electron tube, the electrons are produced at X and are accelerated towards Y.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the components needed to produce and
accelerate the electrons. [4]
100
% activity
75
50
25
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / days
Fig. 10.1
(b) Complete Fig. 10.1 as far as time = 20 days, by working out the values of a number of
points and plotting them. Show your working. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The isotope used for this decay curve may be represented by the symbol AZX.
Write down an equation, by filling in the gaps below, to show the β-decay of this isotope
to a decay product that has the symbol Y.
AX
Z → + Y [2]
0625/3/O/N/02
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
8
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 9
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 10
spring
scale
masses
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Explain how the masses produce a force to stretch the spring.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why this force, like all forces, is a vector quantity.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the graphs obtained when the two springs are stretched.
20
force/N spring 1
15
spring 2
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40
extension/mm
Fig. 1.2
0625/3/M/J/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) State which spring is more difficult to extend. Quote values from the graphs to
support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the graph of spring 2, mark a point P at the limit of proportionality. Explain your
choice of point P.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Use the graphs to find the difference in the extensions of the two springs when a
force of 15 N is applied to each one.
2 The speed of a cyclist reduces uniformly from 2.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s in 12 s.
deceleration = ..................................[3]
distance = ..................................[2]
1220 N
950 N
40° 30°
box
Fig. 3.1
(a) By the use of a scale diagram (not calculation) of the forces acting at P, find the weight
of the box. [5]
0625/3/M/J/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Another box of weight 1500 N is raised vertically by 3.0 m.
(ii) The crane takes 2.5 s to raise this box 3.0 m. Calculate the power output of the
crane.
power = ..................................
[4]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed glass syringe that contains air and many very tiny suspended dust
particles.
syringe
seal
piston
dust particles
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the dust particles are suspended in the air and do not settle to the bottom.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The air in the syringe is at a pressure of 2.0 × 105 Pa. The piston is slowly moved into the
syringe, keeping the temperature constant, until the volume of the air is reduced from
80 cm3 to 25 cm3. Calculate the final pressure of the air.
pressure = ..................................[3]
Sun's rays
surface
Z
of solar
panel X cold junction
Y
hot junction
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Experiment shows that the temperature of the surface depends upon the type of
surface used.
Describe the nature of the surface that will cause the temperature to rise most.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of light crossing the edge of a glass block from air into glass.
air
direction in which
wavefronts
are moving
glass
edge of glass
Fig. 6.1
(i) draw in an incident ray, a normal and a refracted ray that meet at the same point on
the edge of the glass block,
(ii) label the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction,
(iii) measure the two angles and record their values.
(b) Explain why the sound waves always reach the observer after the light waves.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The speed of sound waves in air may be determined by experiment using a source that
generates light waves and sound waves at the same time.
(i) Draw a labelled diagram of the arrangement of suitable apparatus for the
experiment.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain how you would calculate the speed of sound in air from your readings.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3/M/J/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a battery with a resistor connected across its terminals. The e.m.f. of the
battery is 6.0 V.
6.0 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate
current = ..................................
resistance = ..................................
energy = ..................................
[6]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(a) Calculate
power = ..................................
voltage = ..................................
[4]
(b) Explain
(i) what is meant by the statement that the transformer is 100% efficient,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the transformer changes an input voltage into a different output voltage.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3/M/J/03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 show two views of a vertical wire carrying a current up through a
horizontal card. Points P and Q are marked on the card.
vertical
P Q
wire
(i) draw a complete magnetic field line (line of force) through P and indicate its
direction with an arrow,
(ii) draw an arrow through Q to indicate the direction in which a compass placed at Q
would point.
[3]
(b) State the effect on the direction in which compass Q points of
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Fig. 10.3 shows the view from above of another vertical wire carrying a current up
through a horizontal card. A cm grid is marked on the card. Point W is 1 cm vertically
above the top surface of the card.
T vertical
wire carrying
R S current
Fig. 10.3
State the magnetic field strength at S, T and W in terms of the magnetic field strength
at R. Use one of the alternatives, weaker, same strength or stronger for each answer.
at S ........................................................................
at T ........................................................................
at W........................................................................ [3]
0625/3/M/J/03 [Turn over
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) A radioactive isotope emits only α-particles.
(i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use to
prove that no β-particles or γ-radiation are emitted from the isotope.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain how your results would show that only α-particles are emitted.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a stream of α-particles about to enter the space between the poles of a
very strong magnet.
α-particles
S
Fig. 11.1
Describe the path of the α-particles in the space between the magnetic poles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3/M/J/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
8
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 9
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 10
speed 20
m/s
P
15
test 2 graph
10
Q
5
test 1 graph
R
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) state which part of the graph shows the greatest deceleration,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) use the graph to determine how far the bus travels in the first 2 seconds.
distance = ..........................................
[4]
(b) For test 2, a device was fitted to the bus. The device changed the deceleration.
(i) State two ways in which the deceleration during test 2 is different from that during
test 1.
1 ...............................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the value of the deceleration in test 2.
deceleration = ....................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a sketch graph of the magnitude of the acceleration for the bus when it
is travelling around a circular track at constant speed.
magnitude
of acceleration
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
(i) Use the graph to show that there is a force of constant magnitude acting on the
bus.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the direction of this force.
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
water surface
50 m
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of water is 1000 kg/m 3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s 2 .
Calculate the pressure that the water exerts on the diver.
(b) The window in the diver’s helmet is 150 mm wide and 70 mm from top to bottom.
0625/03/O/N/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a simple see-saw. One child A sits near to end X and another child B sits
near to end Y. The feet of the children do not touch the ground when the see-saw is
balanced.
X Y
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(a) Child A has a mass of 18.0 kg and child B has a mass of 20.0 kg.
Without calculation, indicate where the children could sit so that the see-saw balances
horizontally. You may draw on Fig. 3.1 if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the relationship between the moment caused by child A and that caused by
child B.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Child A is 2.50 m from the pivot. Calculate the distance of child B from the pivot.
can
heater
water
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of the movement and energies of the water molecules, how
evaporation takes place.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) After the water has reached its boiling point, the mass of water in the can is reduced
by 3.2 g in 120 s. The heater supplies energy to the water at a rate of 60 W. Use this
information to calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water.
0625/03/O/N/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Equal volumes of nitrogen, water and copper at 20 °C are heated to 50 °C.
(i) Which one of the three will have a much greater expansion than the other two?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer in terms of the way the molecules are arranged in the three
substances.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
–10 °C 50 °C
Fig. 5.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the linearity of a thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more wavefronts to the right of the gap. [3]
(b) The waves travel towards the gap at a speed of 3 x 108 m/s and have a frequency of
5 x 1014 Hz. Calculate the wavelength of these waves.
0625/03/O/N/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 is drawn to full scale. The focal length of the lens is 5.0 cm.
axis
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark each principal focus of the lens with a dot and the letter F. [2]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the tip of the object O that appear to pass through the
tip of the image. [2]
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw the image and label it with the letter I. [1]
(d) Explain why the base of the image lies on the axis.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State a practical use of a convex lens when used as shown in Fig. 7.1.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
output N coil
iron core
bearing
rings
connected
one to each
end of coil S
Fig. 8.1
handle to
turn coil
(a) Fig. 8.2 shows the axes of a voltage-time graph for the generator output.
voltage / V
0
0
0.1 0.2 0.3
time / s
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2,
(i) mark suitable voltage values on the voltage axis,
(ii) draw a graph of the generator output.
[3]
0625/03/O/N/03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The generator shown in Fig. 8.1 works by electromagnetic induction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) State the energy changes that occur in the generator when it is producing output.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
voltage / V
2
—1
—2
Fig. 9.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the graph to determine the peak voltage of the output.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Describe how you could check that the voltage calibration on the screen is
correct.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when it is being used to measure a small time
interval between two voltage pulses.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
cm scale
Fig. 9.2
(i) What is the distance on the screen between the two voltage pulses?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The time-base control of the c.r.o. is set at 5.0 ms / cm.
Calculate the time interval between the voltage pulses.
time = ........................................
(iii) Suggest one example where a c.r.o. can be used to measure a small time
interval.
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
The total power supplied is 150 W when both lamps are on.
L1
L2
Fig. 10.1
(a) Calculate the current supplied by the battery when both lamps are on.
Calculate
(i) the current in lamp L1,
current = ............................................
(ii) the power of lamp L1,
power = ..............................................
(iii) the resistance of lamp L1.
resistance = .......................................
[6]
0625/03/O/N/03
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) A sodium nucleus decays by the emission of a -particle to form magnesium.
(i) Complete the decay equation below.
24 Na
11 → Mg +
(ii) Fig. 11.1 shows -particles from sodium nuclei moving into the space between the
poles of a magnet.
-particles
Fig. 11.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Very small quantities of a radioactive isotope are used to check the circulation of blood
by injecting the isotope into the bloodstream.
(i) Describe how the results are obtained.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why a -emitting isotope is used for this purpose rather than one that
emits either -particles or -particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
8
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 9
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 10
A B
E C
v = 6 m/s
Fig. 1.1
B C D E B
6
speed
m/s 5
4
3
2
1
0A
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Use information from Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 to describe the motion of the cyclist
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2004 0625/03 M/J/04
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The velocity v of the cyclist at C is shown in Fig. 1.1.
State one similarity and one difference between the velocity at C and the velocity at E.
similarity ...........................................................................................................................
difference ......................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Calculate
distance = …………………
circumference = …………………
[4]
cliff
falling
rock
river
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the rock is 75 kg. The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
Calculate the weight of the rock.
weight = …………………[1]
(b) The rock falls from rest through a distance of 15 m before it hits the water.
Calculate its kinetic energy just before hitting the water. Show your working.
(c) The rock hits the water. Suggest what happens to the kinetic energy of the rock during
the impact.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
Fig. 3.1
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use the results in Fig. 3.1 to show that the spring obeys Hooke’s law.
[1]
(b) Another athlete using a different spring exerts an average force of 400 N to enable her
to extend the spring by 0.210 m.
(i) Calculate the work done by this athlete in extending the spring once.
(ii) She is able to extend the spring by this amount and to release it 24 times in 60 s.
Calculate the power used by this athlete while doing this exercise.
power = …………………
[4]
15 °C
85 °C
Fig. 4.1
With reference to the energies of the water molecules, explain why the levels are
different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water, it took 34 500 J
of energy to evaporate 15 g of water that was originally at 100 °C.
A second experiment showed that 600 J of energy was lost to the atmosphere from the
apparatus during the time it took to evaporate 15 g of water.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water that would be obtained from
this experiment.
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the additional apparatus needed to test which surface is the best emitter of
heat radiation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an everyday situation in which a
convection current occurs.
Mark the path of the current with a line and show its direction with arrows. [3]
A B
glass
C D
Q air
P Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) By drawing on Fig. 6.1, continue the ray PQ through and beyond the block.
(ii) Mark the angle of incidence at CD with the letter i and the angle of refraction at CD
with the letter r.
[3]
(b) The speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108 m/s and the speed of light in glass is 2.0 x 108 m/s.
(i) Write down a formula that gives the refractive index of glass in terms of the
speeds of light in air and glass.
refractive index =
(c) The frequency of the blue light in ray PQ is 6.0 x 1014 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ……………..……[2]
cone
X Y
wires
air
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, use the letter C to mark three compressions and the letter R to mark three
rarefactions along XY. [1]
(i) a compression,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) a rarefaction.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A sound wave is a longitudinal wave. With reference to the sound wave travelling along
XY in Fig. 7.1, explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) There is a large vertical wall 50 m in front of the loudspeaker. The wall reflects the
sound waves.
The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
Calculate the time taken for the sound waves to travel from X to the wall and to return
to X.
time = …………………[2]
Fig. 8.1
power = …………..[1]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State two advantages of connecting the appliances in parallel rather than in series.
advantage 1 ...............................................................................................................
advantage 2 ...............................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Calculate
current = …………..
energy = …………..
resistance = …………..
[7]
© UCLES 2004 0625/03 M/J/04
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 Electromagnetic induction can be demonstrated using a solenoid, a magnet, a sensitive
ammeter and connecting wire.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up to demonstrate
electromagnetic induction. [2]
(b) State one way of using the apparatus to produce an induced current.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Without changing the apparatus, state what must be done to produce
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
2 3
1 A 4
A
0
5
Fig. 10.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) Name the components from which logic gates are made.
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In the space below, draw the symbol for an AND gate.
Label the inputs and the output. [1]
(iii) Describe the action of an AND gate with two inputs. [2]
α-particle 1
α-particle 2
α-particle 3
gold nuclei
Fig. 11.1
(b) What does the scattering of α-particles show about atomic structure?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Candidate
Name
Centre Candidate
Number Number
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. For Examiner’s Use
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. 1
8
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 9
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given on this page. 10
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the path of one drop of water in the jet from a powerful hose.
For
Examiner’s
Use
vertical path
of a single
water drop
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is a graph of speed against time for the water drop shown in Fig. 1.1.
speed 40
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8
time after leaving the hose / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Describe the movement of the water drop in the first 4 s after leaving the hose.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
speed = …………………...
time = ………….………..
[2]
(c) Use values from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the acceleration of the drop as it falls back towards
the ground. Show your working.
acceleration = ……………………...[3]
(d) Calculate the greatest distance above the ground reached by the drop.
distance = ……………………...[3]
20 m
valve
water
dam
exit pipe
Fig. 2.1
(a) The valve in the exit pipe is closed. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the
acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
Calculate the pressure of the water acting on the closed valve in the exit pipe.
pressure = ……………………...[2]
force = ……………………...[2]
(c) The valve is then opened and water, originally at the surface of the reservoir, finally
flows out of the exit pipe. State the energy transformation of this water between the
surface of the reservoir and the open end of the pipe.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
3 A scientist needs to find the density of a sample of rock whilst down a mine. He has only a
For
spring balance, a measuring cylinder, some water and some thread. Examiner’s
Use
(a) In the space below, draw two labelled diagrams, one to show the spring balance being
used and the other to show the measuring cylinder being used with a suitable rock
sample. [2]
(b) The spring balance is calibrated in newtons. State how the mass of the rock sample
may be found from the reading of the spring balance.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State the readings that would be taken from the measuring cylinder.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State how the volume of the rock would be found from the readings.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State in words the formula that would be used to find the density of the sample.
density =
[1]
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a simple type of thermocouple that has been calibrated to measure
For
temperature. Examiner’s
Use
copper wire
sensitive voltmeter
V
hot junction
iron wire cold junction
Fig. 4.1
(i) Describe how the thermocouple could be used to measure the temperature of a
beaker of hot water.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State two situations where a thermocouple would be a good choice of thermometer
to measure temperature.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
100
80
temperature/°C
60
40
20
0
0 5 10 15 20
time/min
Fig. 4.2
...................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
Fig. 5.1
(i) The box contains a large number of air molecules. On Fig. 5.1, draw a possible
path of one of the air molecules, as it moves inside the box.
(ii) Explain
1 how air molecules in the box create a pressure on the inside walls,
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
2 why this pressure rises as the temperature of the air in the box increases.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Air in a cylinder is compressed slowly, so that the temperature does not rise. The
pressure changes from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 5.0 x 105 Pa. The original volume was 0.35 m3.
Calculate the new volume.
volume = …………………...[3]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows an optical fibre. XY is a ray of light passing along the fibre.
For
Examiner’s
Use
Y fibre
Fig. 6.1
(b) Explain why the ray does not leave the fibre at Y.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The light in the optical fibre has a wavelength of 3.2 x 10–7 m and is travelling at a speed
of 1.9 x 108 m/s.
frequency = …………………...
4Ω
4Ω A
8Ω
5Ω 5Ω
Fig. 7.1
current = ………………..[2]
(b) Calculate, for the resistors connected in the circuit, the combined resistance of
resistance = ………………..
resistance = ………………..
[2]
power = ………………..[2]
reading = ………………..
reading = ………………..
[2]
(e) The 8 Ω resistor is made from a length of resistance wire of uniform cross-sectional area.
State the effect on the resistance of the wire of using
(i) the same length of the same material with a greater cross-sectional area,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) a smaller length of the same material with the same cross-sectional area.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows plane waves passing through a gap in a barrier that is approximately equal to
For
the wavelength of the waves. Examiner’s
Use
barrier
Fig. 8.1
(a) What is the name given to the wave property shown in Fig. 8.1?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, carefully draw the pattern that would be obtained if the gap were
increased to six times the wavelength of the waves. [4]
(c) The effect in Fig. 8.1 is often shown using water waves on the surface of a tank of water.
These are transverse waves. Explain what is meant by a transverse wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9 (a) An engine on a model railway needs a 6 V a.c. supply. A mains supply of 240 V a.c. is
For
available. Examiner’s
Use
(i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a transformer suitable for producing
the required supply voltage.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The power needed for this model engine is 12 W. Calculate the current taken from the
mains when just this engine is in use, assuming that the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = ………………..[2]
(c) Explain why transformers will only work when connected to an a.c. supply.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
10 (a) (i) What is the function of a transistor when placed in an electrical circuit?
For
Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) In the space below, draw the symbol for an OR gate. Label the inputs and the output.
[1]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In an experiment to find the range of α-particles in air, the apparatus in Fig. 11.1 was
used.
ruler
Fig. 11.1
(i) State what causes the count rate 9 cm from the source.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Estimate the count rate that is due to the source at a distance of 2 cm.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Suggest a value for the maximum distance that α-particles can travel from the
source.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Candidate
Name
Centre Candidate
Number Number
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. For Examiner’s Use
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. 1
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 5
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
6
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES. 7
10
11
Total
140
R S T
120
speed
m/s
100
80
60
Q
40
20
P
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe in detail the motion of the sphere shown by the graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) On Fig. 1.2, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces acting on the sphere when For
it is at the position shown by point S on the graph. Label your arrows with the names of Examiner’s
the forces. [2] Use
Fig. 1.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Use the graph to calculate the approximate distance that the sphere falls
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple pendulum that swings backwards and forwards between P and Q. For
Examiner’s
Use
support
string
P Q
R pendulum bob
Fig. 2.1
(a) The time taken for the pendulum to swing from P to Q is approximately 0.5 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State the two vertical forces acting on the pendulum bob when it is at position R.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The pendulum bob moves along the arc of a circle. State the direction of the
resultant of the two forces in (i).
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The mass of the bob is 0.2 kg. During the swing it moves so that P is 0.05 m higher
than R.
Calculate the increase in potential energy of the pendulum bob between R and P.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that a student uses to make an estimate of the specific heat For
capacity of iron. Examiner’s
Use
iron block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The power of the heater is known. State the four readings the student must take to find
the specific heat capacity of iron.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
4. ................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Write down an equation, in words or in symbols, that could be used to work out the
specific heat capacity of iron from the readings in (a).
[2]
(c) (i) Explain why the value obtained with this apparatus is higher than the actual value. For
Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................... Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one addition to the apparatus that would help to improve the accuracy of the
value obtained.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the paths of a few air molecules and a single dust particle. The actual air For
molecules are too small to show on the diagram. Examiner’s
Use
paths of
air molecules
dust particle
Fig. 5.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the paths of a few molecules leaving the surface of a liquid. The liquid is
below its boiling point.
Fig. 5.2
(i) State which liquid molecules are most likely to leave the surface.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light OPQ passing through a semi-circular glass block. For
Examiner’s
Use
O
30°
Fig. 6.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the changes, if any, that occur to the speed, wavelength and frequency of the light
as it enters the glass block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) At Q some of the light in ray OPQ is reflected and some is refracted.
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate positions of the reflected ray and the refracted ray.
Label these rays. [2]
(d) The refractive index for light passing from glass to air is 0.67.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the ray that is refracted at Q into air.
Fig. 7.1
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some γ-rays emitted from a radioactive source have a speed in air of 3.0 x 108 m/s and
a wavelength of 1.0 x 10–12 m.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
8 A student has a power supply, a resistor, a voltmeter, an ammeter and a variable resistor.
For
Examiner’s
(a) The student obtains five sets of readings from which he determines an average value Use
for the resistance of the resistor.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a circuit that he could use.
[3]
(b) Describe how the circuit should be used to obtain the five sets of readings.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
6.0 V
A
resistor resistor of
3.0 Ω unknown value
Fig. 8.1
(ii) Calculate the charge passing through the 3.0 Ω resistor in 120 s.
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected to a resistor and a diode. For
Examiner’s
Use
resistor
a.c. supply output
Fig. 9.1
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, sketch graphs to show the variation of the a.c. supply voltage and the
output voltage with time.
a.c. supply
voltage
0
time
output
voltage
0
time
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(b) (i) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOT gate.
[1]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is the decay curve for a radioactive isotope that emits only β-particles. For
Examiner’s
Use
400
count rate
300
counts / min
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / min
Fig. 10.1
Use the graph to find the value of the half-life of the isotope.
(i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus required, set up to
make the determination.
[2]
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a flexible wire hanging between two magnetic poles. The flexible wire is For
connected to a 12 V d.c. supply that is switched off. Examiner’s
Use
+
N S 12 V d.c.
–
Fig. 11.1
(a) Explain why the wire moves when the supply is switched on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When the wire first moves, energy is changed from one form to another. State these two
forms of energy.
(d) Fig. 11.2 shows the flexible wire made into a rigid rectangular coil and mounted on an For
axle. Examiner’s
Use
magnetic pole
axle
N N
coil
S S
magnetic pole
axle
Fig. 11.2
(i) Add to the diagram an arrangement that will allow current to be fed into the coil
whilst allowing the coil to turn continuously. Label the parts you have added. [1]
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/M/J/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
0625/03
October/November 2005
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in. For Examiner’s Use
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs, music or rough working. 1
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
Answer all questions.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 6
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE. 7
10
11
Total
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student is given a spring balance that has a scale in newtons. The student is told that
the acceleration of free-fall is 10 m/s2.
(i) Describe how the student could find the mass of an irregular solid object.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Describe how the student could go on to find the density of the object.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows three forces acting on an object of mass 0.5 kg. All three forces act
through the centre of mass of the object.
centre of mass
9.0 N 3.0 N
4.0 N
Fig. 1.1
Calculate
(i) the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the object,
spring
balance horizontally balanced
metre rule
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
horizontal pivot
6.0 N
weight
Fig. 2.1
(a) Write down two conditions for the metre rule to be in equilibrium.
condition 1 ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
condition 2 ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the value of the reading on the spring balance is 8.0 N. [2]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a pond that is kept at a constant depth by a pressure-operated valve in the
For
base. Examiner’s
Use
water
pressure-operated
outlet valve
spring
Fig. 3.1
(a) The pond is kept at a depth of 2.0 m. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3.
(b) The force required to open the valve is 50 N. The valve will open when the water depth
reaches 2.0 m.
(c) The water supply is turned off and the valve is held open so that water drains out
through the valve.
State the energy changes of the water that occur as the depth of the water drops from
2.0 m to zero.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that could be used to measure the specific latent heat of ice.
For
Examiner’s
Use
60 W heater
power supply
melting ice at 0 °C
beaker
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how you would use the apparatus. You may assume that ice at 0 °C and a
stopwatch are available. State all the readings that would be needed at each stage.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) In an experiment, 120 g of ice at 0 °C is to be melted. The specific latent heat of ice is
340 J/g. Assume that all the energy from the heater will be used to melt the ice.
Calculate the expected time for which the 60 W heater is switched on.
(c) When the experiment is carried out, the ice melts in slightly less time than the expected
time.
(i) State one reason why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest one modification to the experiment that would reduce the difference
between the experimental time and the expected time.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/03/O/N/05 [Turn over
6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a way of indicating the positions and direction of movement of some
For
molecules in a gas at one instant. Examiner’s
Use
piston
cylinder
Fig. 5.1
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain how the molecules exert a pressure on the container walls.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the gas in the cylinder is heated, it pushes the piston further out of the cylinder.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The gas shown in Fig. 5.1 is changed into a liquid and then into a solid by cooling.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
X
path of sound wave
Y wall
Fig. 6.1
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The frequency of the sound wave leaving X is 400 Hz. State the frequency of the sound
wave reaching Y.
(c) The speed of the sound wave leaving X is 330 m/s. Calculate the wavelength of these
sound waves.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows two rays of light from a point O on an object. These rays are incident on
For
a plane mirror. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, continue the paths of the two rays after they reach the mirror. Hence
locate the image of the object O. Label the image I. [2]
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 is drawn to scale. It shows an object PQ and a convex lens.
position of
P convex lens
F F principal
Q axis
principal focus principal focus
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the top of the object P that pass through the lens.
For
Use these rays to locate the top of the image. Label this point T. [3] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, draw an eye symbol to show the position from which the image T
should be viewed. [1]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a high-voltage supply connected across two metal plates.
For
Examiner’s
+ – Use
high-voltage
supply
A
metal plates
Fig. 8.1
When the supply is switched on, an electric field is present between the plates.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field lines between the plates and indicate their direction
by arrows. [2]
(c) The metal plates are now joined by a high-resistance wire. A charge of 0.060 C passes
along the wire in 30 s.
Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
(d) The potential difference of the supply is re-set to 1500 V and the ammeter reading
changes to 0.0080 A. Calculate the energy supplied in 10 s. Show your working.
9 (a) In the space provided, draw the symbol for a NOR gate. Label the inputs and the output.
For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(b) State whether the output of a NOR gate will be high (ON) or low (OFF) when
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit made from three NOT gates and one NAND gate.
HIGH
LOW
Fig. 9.1
(i) Write HIGH or LOW in each of the boxes on Fig. 9.1. [2]
(ii) State the effect on the output of changing both of the inputs.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
input output
Fig. 10.1
(a) Use ideas of electromagnetic induction to explain how the input voltage is transformed
into an output voltage. Use the three questions below to help you with your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) State what is needed to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The core of this transformer splits along XX and YY. Explain why the transformer would
For
not work if the two halves of the core were separated by about 30 cm. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A 100% efficient transformer is used to step up the voltage of a supply from 100 V to
200 V. A resistor is connected to the output. The current in the primary coil is 0.4 A.
[3]
(b) State how the apparatus would be used to show the deflection of the β-particles by the
electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State how the results would show the deflection of the β-particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/05
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
0625/03
May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in. For Examiner’s Use
Write in dark blue or black pen.
1
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
Answer all questions. 3
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 4
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE. 5
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 7
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 8
10
11
Total
SP (SLM/KS) T04130/2
© UCLES 2006 [Turn over
2
1 A bus travels from one bus stop to the next. The journey has three distinct parts. Stated in For
order they are Examiner’s
uniform acceleration from rest for 8.0 s, Use
15
speed
m/s
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, complete the graph to show the first two parts of the journey. [3]
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the bus 4.0 s after leaving the first bus stop.
acceleration = ........................[2]
(c) Use the graph to estimate the distance the bus travels between 20 s and 25 s.
(d) On leaving the second bus stop, the uniform acceleration of the bus is 1.2 m / s2. The
mass of the bus and passengers is 4000 kg.
Calculate the accelerating force that acts on the bus.
force = ........................[2]
(e) The acceleration of the bus from the second bus stop is less than that from the first bus
stop.
Suggest two reasons for this.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/03/M/J/06
3
2 A student sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1 in order to find the resultant of the two For
tensions T1 and T2 acting at P. When the tensions T1, T2 and T3 are balanced, the angles Examiner’s
between T1 and the vertical and T2 and the vertical are as marked on Fig. 2.1. Use
pulley
vertical
pulley T1 = 6.0 N T2 = 8.0 N board
44°
69°
T3
Fig. 2.1
In the space below, draw a scale diagram of the forces T1 and T2. Use the diagram to find the
resultant of the two forces.
State
3 An electric pump is used to raise water from a well, as shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
pump
ground
well
Fig. 3.1
(a) The pump does work in raising the water. State an equation that could be used to
calculate the work done in raising the water.
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The water is raised through a vertical distance of 8.0 m. The weight of water raised in
5.0 s is 100 N.
(i) Calculate the work done in raising the water in this time.
(ii) Calculate the power the pump uses to raise the water.
power = ........................[1]
(iii) The energy transferred by the pump to the water is greater than your answer to (i).
Suggest what the additional energy is used for.
..............................................................................................................................[1]
4 (a) State two differences between evaporation of water and boiling of water. For
Examiner’s
1. ...................................................................................................................................... Use
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A laboratory determination of the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water uses a
120 W heater to keep water boiling at its boiling point. Water is turned into steam at the
rate of 0.050 g / s.
Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of vaporisation obtained from this
experiment. Show your working.
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a tank used for evaporating salt solution to produce crystals. For
Examiner’s
Use
evaporating tank
steam in
salt solution
steam out
Fig. 5.1
Suggest two ways of increasing the rate of evaporation of the water from the solution.
Changes may be made to the apparatus, but the rate of steam supply must stay constant.
You may assume the temperature of the salt solution remains constant.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
..............................................................................................................................[1]
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A toilet flush is operated by the compression of air. The air inside the flush has a
pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa and a volume of 150 cm3. When the flush is operated the
volume is reduced to 50 cm3. The temperature of the air remains constant during this
process.
Calculate the new pressure of the air inside the flush.
pressure = .......................[2]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at P on a glass prism. Only the refracted red ray PQ is For
shown in the prism. Examiner’s
Use
P red ray
Q
t
white ligh
screen
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to complete the path of the red ray and the whole path of the
violet ray up to the point where they hit the screen. Label the violet ray. [3]
(b) The angle of incidence of the white light is increased to 40°. The refractive index of the
glass for the red light is 1.52.
Calculate the angle of refraction at P for the red light.
(ii) the red light after it leaves the prism at Q. speed = ........................ [1]
7 Fig. 7.1 shows how the air pressure at one instant varies with distance along the path of a For
continuous sound wave. Examiner’s
Use
air pressure
normal P X Y
air pressure distance in direction
of travel of the wave
Fig. 7.1
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe the motion of a group of air particles situated on the path of the wave shown in
Fig. 7.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The sound wave shown has speed of 340 m / s and a frequency of 200 Hz.
Calculate the distance represented by PX on Fig. 7.1.
distance = ........................[2]
A C B R
4.0 Ω
one metre resistance wire
sliding
contact
Fig. 8.1
current = ........................[2]
(b) The sliding contact C is moved to A. The lamp lights at its normal brightness.
Calculate
resistance = ........................[1]
(i) Describe any change that occurs in the brightness of the lamp.
..............................................................................................................................[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The 1 m wire between A and B, as shown in Fig. 8.1, has a resistance of 2.0 Ω.
Calculate the resistance between A and B when
resistance = ........................[1]
(ii) the 1 m length is replaced by a 1 m length of a wire of the same material but of only
half the cross-sectional area.
resistance = ........................[1]
9 A transformer is needed to step down a 240 V a.c. supply to a 12 V a.c. output. For
Examiner’s
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a suitable transformer. [3] Use
(b) Explain
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
Calculate
power = ........................[1]
energy = ........................[1]
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a positively charged plastic rod, a metal plate resting on an insulator, For
and a lead connected to earth. Examiner’s
Use
positively charged
plastic rod
metal plate
lead connected
insulator
to earth
Fig. 10.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
Calculate
charge = ............................
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of radiation that contains α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. The For
beam enters a very strong magnetic field shown in symbol form by N and S poles. Examiner’s
Use
beam of
radiation
Fig. 11.1
β-particles
γ-rays
[6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in. For Examiner’s Use
Write in dark blue or black pen.
1
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
Answer all questions. 3
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 4
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE. 5
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 7
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 8
10
11
Total
SP (SLM/KS) T04132/2
© UCLES 2006 [Turn over
2
1 (a) A stone falls from the top of a building and hits the ground at a speed of 32 m/s. For
The air resistance-force on the stone is very small and may be neglected. Examiner’s
Use
time = ............................
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling stone.
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4
time/s
Fig. 1.1
mass = ............................
[5]
(b) A student used a suitable measuring cylinder and a spring balance to find the density of For
a sample of the stone. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Describe how the measuring cylinder is used, and state the readings that are
taken.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how the spring balance is used, and state the reading that is taken.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Write down an equation from which the density of the stone is calculated.
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) The student then wishes to find the density of cork. Suggest how the apparatus and
the method would need to be changed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
2 In an experiment, forces are applied to a spring as shown in Fig. 2.1a. The results of this For
experiment are shown in Fig. 2.1b. Examiner’s
Use
16
R
Q
12
ruler force/N
spring
8.0 P
4.0
weights
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0
extension/mm
(a) What is the name given to the point marked Q on Fig. 2.1b?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For the part OP of the graph, the spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
State what this means.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The spring is stretched until the force and extension are shown by the point R on the
graph. Compare how the spring stretches, as shown by the part of the graph OQ, with
that shown by QR.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The part OP of the graph shows the spring stretching according to the expression
F = kx.
k =..................................[2]
7.0 m
Fig. 3.1
(b) Assuming all this potential energy loss is changed to kinetic energy of the water,
calculate the speed of the water, in the vertical direction, at the end of the fall.
speed = ........................[3]
(c) The vertical speed of the water is less than that calculated in (b). Suggest one reason
for this.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
4 Some water is heated electrically in a glass beaker in an experiment to find the specific heat For
capacity of water. The temperature of the water is taken at regular intervals. Examiner’s
Use
60
temperature / °C
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 60 120 180 240 300
time / s
Fig. 4.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The experiment is repeated in an insulated beaker. This time, the temperature of the
water increases from 20 °C to 60 °C in 210 s. The beaker contains 75 g of water. The
power of the heater is 60 W. Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
(c) In order to measure the temperature during the heating, a thermocouple is used. For
Draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple connected to measure temperature. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a copper rod AB being heated at one end. For
Examiner’s
Use
copper rod
B A
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 5.1
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) By reference to the behaviour of the particles of copper along AB, state how this
process happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Give an account of an experiment that is designed to show which of four surfaces will
absorb most heat radiation.
The four surfaces are all the same metal, but one is a polished black surface, one is a
polished silver surface, one is a dull black surface and the fourth one is painted white.
Give your answer under the headings below.
readings to be taken
one precaution to try to achieve a fair comparison between the various surfaces
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light, from the top of an object PQ, passing through two glass For
prisms. Examiner’s
Use
P A B
Q
C
F E
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete the path through the two prisms of the ray shown leaving Q. [1]
(b) A person looking into the lower prism, at the position indicated by the eye symbol, sees
an image of PQ.
State the properties of this image.
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why there is no change in direction of the ray from P at points A, C, D and F.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The speed of light as it travels from P to A is 3 × 108 m/s and the refractive index of the
prism glass is 1.5.
Calculate the speed of light in the prism.
speed = ........................[2]
(e) Explain why the ray AB reflects through 90° at B and does not pass out of the prism
at B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
7 Fig. 7.1 is a drawing of a student’s attempt to show the diffraction pattern of water waves that For
have passed through a narrow gap in a barrier. Examiner’s
Use
barrier with
narrow gap
direction of
water waves
Fig. 7.1
(a) State two things that are wrong with the wave pattern shown to the right of the barrier.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the space below, sketch the wave pattern when the gap in the barrier is made five
times wider.
[2]
(c) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 1.2 cm and a frequency of
8.0 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the water waves.
speed =..................................[2]
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1, indicate with a dot and the letter S, a point in the circuit where a switch
could be placed that would turn off lamps Y and Z at the same time but would leave
lamp X still lit. [1]
(b) (i) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a component that would vary the
brightness of lamp X.
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, mark with a dot and the letter R where this component should be
placed.
[2]
current = ........................[2]
(d) The current in lamp Z is 3.0 A. Calculate the resistance of this lamp.
resistance = ........................[2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The current in lamp X is 1.0 A. Calculate the current supplied by the battery with
lamp Y removed.
current = ............................
[2]
© UCLES 2006 0625/03/O/N/06 [Turn over
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows how a beam of electrons would be deflected by an electric field produced For
between two metal plates. Examiner’s
The connections of the source of high potential difference are not shown. Use
+ high –
potential
difference
metal
plate
beam of electrons
metal
plate
Fig. 9.1
(ii) Explain why the beam of electrons is deflected in the direction shown. In your
answer, consider all the charges involved and their effect on each other.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(i) What makes the electron beam move backwards and forwards across the screen?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What makes the electron beam move up and down the screen?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) An a.c. waveform is displayed so that two full waves appear on the screen of a cathode- For
ray oscilloscope. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 9.2 shows the face of the oscilloscope. On Fig. 9.2, draw in the waveform.
Fig. 9.2
[1]
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit that is used to switch on a lamp automatically when it starts to go For
dark. Examiner’s
Use
D
A
+
V
–
C
B
Fig. 10.1
A ........................................... B ...........................................
........................[1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
11 (a) α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are known as ionising radiations. For
Examiner’s
(i) Describe what happens when gases are ionised by ionising radiations. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why α-particles are considered better ionisers of gas than β-particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii) For one of the applications that you have suggested, describe how it works, or draw
a labelled diagram to illustrate it in use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*9716875438*
PHYSICS 0625/03
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
10
11
Total
direction of
movement
P
model circular
car track
Fig. 1.1
(i) Draw an arrow on Fig. 1.1 to show the direction of this force. [1]
(ii) The speed of the car increases. State what happens to the magnitude of this force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i) The car travels too quickly and leaves the track at P. On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to
show the direction of travel after it has left the track. [1]
(ii) In terms of the forces acting on the car, suggest why it left the track at P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
30
25
speed / 20
cm / s
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) Describe the motion between 3.0 s and 10.0 s after the car has started.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Calculate the increase in speed per second during the time 0 to 3.0 s.
[Total: 10]
0.2 m
pivot
W
force of
steam
Fig. 2.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The moment of weight W about the pivot is 12 N m. The perpendicular distance of the
line of action of the force of the steam on the valve from the pivot is 0.2 m.
Calculate
(i) the minimum steam force needed for the steam to escape,
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007 0625/03/M/J/07
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A student wishes to work out how much power she uses to lift her body when climbing a
flight of stairs.
Her body mass is 60 kg and the vertical height of the stairs is 3.0 m. She takes 12 s to walk
up the stairs.
(a) Calculate
(i) the work done in raising her body mass as she climbs the stairs,
(ii) the output power she develops when raising her body mass.
(b) At the top of the stairs she has gravitational potential energy.
Describe the energy transformations taking place as she walks back down the stairs
and stops at the bottom.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
glass rod
thermometer stirrer
ice
glass beaker
water
top-pan balance
Fig. 4.1
(a) Three mass readings are taken. A description of the first reading is given.
reading 2 .........................................................................................................................
(b) Write down word equations which the student could use to find
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) Suggest two reasons why this value is only an approximate value.
Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 .........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
surface
painted surface
dull painted
black shiny white
Bunsen burner
Fig. 5.1
The containers, which are identical, are painted on the outside. One is dull black, the other is
shiny white. Both are filled with water, initially at the same temperature.
(a) (i) Describe how you would use the apparatus to compare the abilities of the two
surfaces to absorb infra-red radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The thermometers used have high sensitivity and linear scales.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007 0625/03/M/J/07
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a rectangular glass block ABCD.
o
60
A B
E
D C
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate path of the refracted ray, within and beyond
the block. Label the ray refracted ray. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw in the path of the reflected ray. Label the ray reflected ray. [1]
(b) A second ray, almost parallel to AE, strikes the block at E and is partly refracted at an
angle of refraction of 43°.
................................................. [1]
(ii) State an approximate value for the critical angle for the light in the glass block.
................................................. [1]
(iii) Calculate an approximate value for the refractive index of the glass of the block.
(c) The speed of the light along ray FE is 3.0 x 108 m/s. Calculate the speed of the refracted
light in the glass block.
[Total: 8]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State how the speed of sound is calculated from the readings.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State one precaution that could be taken to improve the accuracy of the value obtained.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
10
100
1000
10 000
[Total: 6]
12 V d.c.
supply
A B
Fig. 8.1
(b) All five lamps are marked 12 V, 36 W. Assume that the resistance of each lamp is the
same fixed value regardless of how it is connected in the circuit.
Calculate
(iii) the combined resistance of two lamps connected in parallel with the 12 V supply,
(iv) the energy used by one lamp in 30 s when operating at normal brightness.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
9 Fig. 9.1 is a sketch of some apparatus, found in a Science museum, which was once used to
show how electrical energy can be converted into kinetic energy.
switch
+
metal d.c. supply
supports –
metal
magnet spoked
N
wheel
S
N
S small dish of
mercury
magnet
wood base
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain why the wheel turns when the switch is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of rotation of the wheel. [1]
[3]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
power
R2 supply
R1
Fig. 10.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State and explain how the circuit may be modified so that the lamp switches on at a
different temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
gold foil
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the α-particles A, B and C. [3]
(b) State how the results of such an experiment, using large numbers of α-particles,
provides evidence for the existence of nuclei in gold atoms.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8019038925*
PHYSICS 0625/03
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question
or part question. 4
10
11
Total
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the falling ball until it hits the ground.
20
15
speed
m / s 10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) the time during which the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
(iii) the distance fallen while the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
P
S
Q
0.5 m
0.4 m 0.4 m
T R
Fig. 2.1
The car has no power supply, but can run down a sloping track due to its weight.
(a) The car is released at Q. It comes to rest just before it reaches S and rolls back.
(i) Describe the motion of the car after it starts rolling back and until it eventually
comes to rest.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain in terms of energy transformations why the car, starting at Q, cannot
pass S.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A second car, of mass 0.12 kg, is released from P. It continues until it runs off the track at
T.
Calculate the maximum speed that the car could have at T assuming friction in the car is
negligible.
[Total: 6]
Assuming the limit of proportionality of the spring has not been reached, calculate the
force needed to extend it to a total length of 6.0 cm.
spring
pivot
F
metre rule
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, mark another quantity which must be measured to find the moment of
the force F. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
steam
Fig. 4.1
Fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder much later when all the steam has condensed.
water
Fig. 4.2
(a) (i) Describe the movement of the molecules in the high pressure steam.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain how the molecules in the steam exert a high pressure on the inside walls of
the cylinder.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Describe, in terms of particles, the process by which heat is transferred through the
cylinder wall.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When all the steam has condensed, 75 g of water is in the cylinder.
Under these high pressure conditions, the specific latent heat of vaporisation of steam
is 3200 J / g.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/03/O/N/07
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus which is to be used to compare the emission of infra-red
radiation from four differently painted surfaces.
this side
this side painted dull
painted shiny white
white
metal box water inlet
this side
this side painted shiny
painted dull black
black
Fig. 5.1
Near the centre of each side is an infra-red detector. The four detectors are identical.
(a) Describe how you would use this apparatus to compare the infra-red radiation from the
four surfaces.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Suggest which surface will be the best emitter and which will be the worst emitter.
(c) The infra-red detectors are made from thermocouples soldered to blackened metal
plates. These are connected to galvanometers.
[Total: 6]
F F
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to locate the approximate positions of the images of the tops of
the two arrow objects O and P.
Label the images. [5]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
INFRA–
X-RAYS
RED
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, label the positions of γ-rays, visible light waves and radio waves. [1]
(ii) State which of the three types of wave in (i) has the lowest frequency.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State the approximate value of the speed in air of radio waves.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
ammeter
A 1
4.0 Ω
ammeter P
4.0 Ω 6.0 Ω A
A 2 6.0 Ω
P Q
Q
circuit 1 circuit 2
Fig. 8.1
(a) Put ticks in the table below to describe the connections of the two resistors P and Q.
series parallel
circuit 1
circuit 2
[1]
(b) The resistors P and Q are used as small electrical heaters.
advantage 1 .....................................................................................................................
(c) In circuit 1, the ammeter reads 1.2 A when the switch is closed.
(d) The two switches in circuit 2 are closed. Calculate the combined resistance of the two
resistors in this circuit.
Calculate
[Total: 10]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up so that
electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated. [2]
(c) Describe how you would use the apparatus to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) State two ways of increasing the magnitude of the induced e.m.f. in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/03/O/N/07
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows an AND gate with two inputs A and B and one output.
A
output
Fig. 10.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electrical thermometer in a greenhouse gives a low output if the temperature is too
low.
A humidity sensor in the same greenhouse gives a high output if the humidity in the
greenhouse is too high.
An alarm sounds when both the temperature is too low and the humidity is too high.
(i) Complete the diagram below to show how a NOT gate and an AND gate may be
used to provide the required output to the alarm. [2]
electrical thermometer
alarm
humidity sensor
(ii) On your diagram, use either ‘high’ or ‘low’ to indicate the level of the inputs and
outputs of both gates when the alarm sounds. [2]
[Total: 6]
β-particle source
detector counter
sheets of
aluminium
Fig. 11.1
(a) Describe how the experiment is carried out, stating the readings that should be taken.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/07
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/07
First Variant Question Paper
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graphs for two falling balls. For
Examiner’s
Use
30
rubber ball
speed
m/s
20
plastic ball
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
Both balls fall from the same height above the ground.
(i) the average acceleration of the falling rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
(ii) the distance fallen by the rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
(b) Both balls have the same mass but the volume of the plastic ball is much greater than For
that of the rubber ball. Explain, in terms of the forces acting on each ball, why the plastic Examiner’s
ball reaches a terminal velocity but the rubber ball does not. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The rubber ball has a mass of 50 g. Calculate the gravitational force acting on the rubber
ball.
[Total: 10]
2 (a) Name the process by which energy is released in the core of the Sun. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(b) Describe how energy from the Sun becomes stored energy in water behind a dam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Data for two small power stations is given in Table 2.1.
gas-fired 100 MW 25 MW
hydroelectric 90 MW 30 MW
Table 2.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Use the data in Table 2.1 to explain that the hydroelectric station is more efficient
than the gas-fired power station.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
3 A cyclist rides up and then back down the hill shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
top of hill
14 m
starting and
finishing point
Fig. 3.1
The cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of 90 kg. She pedals up to the top and
then stops. She turns around and rides back to the bottom without pedalling or using her
brakes.
(a) Calculate the potential energy gained by the cyclist and her bicycle when she has
reached the top of the hill.
(b) Calculate the maximum speed she could have when she arrives back at the starting
point.
(c) Explain why her actual speed will be less than that calculated in (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 is a design for remotely operating an electrical switch using air pressure. For
Examiner’s
Use
electrical switch flexible rubber
operated by box cover
air pressure connecting pipe
metal
box
Fig. 4.1
The metal box and the pipe contain air at normal atmospheric pressure and the switch is off.
When the pressure in the metal box and pipe is raised to 1.5 times atmospheric pressure by
pressing down on the flexible rubber box cover, the switch comes on.
(a) Explain in terms of pressure and volume how the switch is made to come on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Normal atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. At this pressure, the volume of the box
and pipe is 60 cm3.
Calculate the reduction in volume that must occur for the switch to be on.
(c) Explain, in terms of air particles, why the switch may operate, without the rubber cover
being squashed, when there is a large rise in temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how thermal expansion takes place in a solid and in a For
gas. Examiner’s
Use
solid .................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
gas ...................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Complete Table 5.1 to show the relative expansion of equal volumes of liquids, gases
and solids.
much less, slightly less, slightly more and much more. [2]
liquids
gases
Table 5.1
State one property of alcohol that makes it suitable for use in thermometers.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows an object, the tip of which is labelled O, placed near a lens L. For
Examiner’s
The two principal foci of the lens are F1 and F2. Use
L O
F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the paths of two rays from the tip of the object so that they pass
through the lens and continue beyond.
Complete the diagram to locate the image of the tip of the object. Draw in the whole
image and label it I. [3]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
7 Fig. 7.1 and Fig. 7.2 show wavefronts of light approaching a plane mirror and a rectangular For
glass block, respectively. Examiner’s
Use
direction of travel
of wavefronts
mirror
Fig. 7.1
direction of travel
of wavefronts
glass block
Fig. 7.2
(a) On Fig. 7.1 and on Fig. 7.2 draw wavefronts to show what happens after the waves
strike the surface. [4]
(b) In Fig. 7.2, the waves approaching the block have a speed of 3.0 × 108 m/s and an angle
of incidence of 70°. The refractive index of the glass of the block is 1.5.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008 0625/31/M/J/08 [Turn over
10
8 Fig. 8.1 is the plan of a small apartment that has four lamps as shown. For
Examiner’s
Use
100 W
kitchen
2 × 60 W
living room
60 W
bathroom
Fig. 8.1
Power for the lamps is supplied at 200 V a.c. and the lamps are all in parallel.
(a) In the space below, draw a lighting circuit diagram so that there is one switch for each
room and one master switch that will turn off all the lamps. Label the lamps as 60 W or
100 W.
[3]
(c) The three 60 W lamps are replaced by three energy-saving ones, that give the same For
light output but are rated at only 15 W each. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate
(ii) the energy saved when the lamps are lit for one hour.
[Total: 10]
9 Fig. 9.1 shows apparatus used to investigate electromagnetic effects around straight wires. For
Examiner’s
Use
T3
thin flexible wire T1 thick rigid
vertical wire
large circular
hole in card
small circular
hole in card
T4
T2
Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2 is a view looking down on the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
(a) A battery is connected to T1 and T2 so that there is a current vertically down the thick
wire.
On Fig. 9.2, draw three magnetic field lines and indicate, with arrows, the direction of all
three. [2]
(b) Using a variable resistor, the p.d. between terminals T1 and T2 is gradually reduced.
(c) The battery is now connected to terminals T3 and T4, as well as to terminals T1 and T2, For
so that there is a current down both wires. This causes the flexible wire to move. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
State the effect that this will have on the force acting on the flexible wire.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
10 (a) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOR gate. For
Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(b) Describe the action of a NOR gate in terms of its inputs and output.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
When the pressure is low enough, a pressure sensor has a low output.
Both outputs are fed into a NOR gate. A high output from the gate switches on an
indicator lamp.
(i) Explain why the indicator lamp is off when the process is working correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
1. The pressure is low enough, but the heater stops working. .............................
2. The heater is working, but the pressure rises too high. .............................. [2]
[Total: 6]
11 (a) Chlorine has two isotopes, one of nucleon number 35 and one of nucleon number 37. For
The proton number of chlorine is 17. Examiner’s
Use
number of protons
number of neutrons
number of electrons
[3]
Table 11.1
State the three types of radiation that may be emitted from radioactive isotopes.
1. .......................................................
2. .......................................................
3. ....................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/31/M/J/08
First Variant Question Paper
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus used to find a relationship between the force applied to a trolley For
and the acceleration caused by the force. Examiner’s
Use
ticker- ticker-tape
trolley tape timer roll of tape
string
Fig. 1.1
For each mass, hung as shown, the acceleration of the trolley is determined from the tape.
Some of the results are given in the table below.
0.40 0.50
0.70
0.80 1.0
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the mass of the trolley, assuming that the accelerating force is equal to the
weight of the hanging mass.
(c) Calculate the value missing from the table. Show your working. For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) In one experiment, the hanging mass has a weight of 0.4 N and the trolley starts from
rest.
[Total: 11]
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a circular metal disc of mass 200 g, freely pivoted at its centre. For
Examiner’s
Use
pivot
Fig. 2.1
Masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g, 500 g and 600 g are available, but only one of each
value. These may be hung with string from any of the holes. There are three small holes on
each side of the centre, one at 4.0 cm from the pivot, one at 8.0 cm from the pivot and one at
12.0 cm from the pivot.
The apparatus is to be used to show that there is no net moment of force acting on a body
when it is in equilibrium.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw in two different value masses hanging from appropriate holes. The
values of the masses should be chosen so that there is no net moment. Alongside the
masses chosen, write down their values. [2]
(b) Explain how you would test that your chosen masses give no net moment to the disc.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the moments about the pivot due to the two masses chosen.
(d) Calculate the force on the pivot when the two masses chosen are hanging from the For
disc. Examiner’s
Use
[Total: 7]
Calculate
(b) On another dive, the submarine experiences a total pressure of 6.5 × 105 Pa. A hatch
cover on the submarine has an area of 2.5 m2.
(c) The submarine undergoes tests in fresh water of density 1000 kg/m3.
Explain why the pressure on the submarine is less at the same depth.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
4 The whole of a sealed, empty, dusty room is kept at a constant temperature of 15 °C. Light For
shines into the room through a small outside window. Examiner’s
Use
An observer points a TV camera with a magnifying lens into the room through a second
small window, set in an inside wall at right angles to the outside wall.
Dust particles in the room show up on the TV monitor screen as tiny specks of light.
(a) In the space below draw a diagram to show the motion of one of the specks of light over
a short period of time.
[1]
(b) After a period of one hour the specks are still observed, showing that the dust particles
have not fallen to the floor.
Explain why the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. You may draw a labelled
diagram to help your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) On another day, the temperature of the room is only 5 °C. All other conditions are the
same and the specks of light are again observed.
Suggest any differences that you would expect in the movement of the specks when the
temperature is 5 °C, compared to before.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus that could be used to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of For
ice. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 5.1
(i) wait until water is dripping into the beaker at a constant rate before taking
readings,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power of the heater and the time for which water is collected are known. Write down
all the other readings that are needed to obtain a value for the specific latent heat of
fusion of ice.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Using a 40 W heater, 16.3 g of ice is melted in 2.0 minutes. The heater is then switched For
off. In a further 2.0 minutes, 2.1 g of ice is melted. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice from these results.
[Total: 8]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two rays of monochromatic light, one entering the prism along the normal DE For
and the second one along PQ. Examiner’s
Use
E
F
P 30°
R
42°
A C
Fig. 6.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The refractive index of the glass of the prism is 1.49. The ray EF is refracted at F. Use
information from Fig. 6.1 to calculate the angle of refraction at F.
(c) On Fig. 6.1, draw in the refracted ray, starting from F. [1]
(d) State how the refraction, starting at F, would be different if the monochromatic ray were
replaced by a ray of white light.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The critical angle for the glass of the prism is just over 42°. State the approximate angle
of refraction for the ray striking BC at R.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Another monochromatic ray, not shown in Fig. 6.1, passes through the prism and strikes
BC at an angle of incidence of 50°. State what happens to this ray at the point where it
strikes BC.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008 0625/31/O/N/08
11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a scale drawing of plane waves approaching a gap in a barrier. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of travel
of plane waves
barrier
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw in the pattern of the waves after they have passed the gap. [3]
(b) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm/s.
Calculate the frequency of the waves.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a car battery being charged from a 200 V a.c. mains supply. For
Examiner’s
Use
car
200 V ~ battery
Fig. 8.1
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The average charging current is 2.0 A and the battery takes 12 hours to charge fully.
Calculate the charge that the battery stores when fully charged.
(c) The battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12 V and, when connected to a circuit,
supplies energy to the circuit components.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) (i) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how two 6.0 V lamps should be For
connected to a 12 V battery so that both lamps glow with normal brightness. [1] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The power of each lamp is 8.0 W. Calculate the current in the circuit.
(iii) Calculate the energy used by the two lamps when both are lit for one hour.
[Total: 10]
9 Fig. 9.1 is a block diagram of an electrical energy supply system, using the output of a coal- For
fired power station. Examiner’s
Use
transmission
power output step-up output step-down output
consumer
station at 1100 V transformer at 32 000 V transformer at 240 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest one possible way of storing surplus energy when the demand from the
consumers falls below the output of the power station.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A transmission cable of resistance R carries a current I. Write down a formula that gives
the power loss in the cable in terms of R and I.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The step-up transformer has 1200 turns on the primary coil. Using the values in Fig. 9.1,
calculate the number of turns on its secondary coil. Assume that the transformer has no
energy losses.
Using the values in Fig. 9.1, calculate the current in the transmission cables, assuming
that the transformer is 100% efficient.
[Total: 8]
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for a warning lamp that comes on when the external light intensity For
falls below a pre-set level. Examiner’s
Use
+
low voltage
supply
–
Fig. 10.1
(i) with the letter X the component that detects the change in external light intensity,
(iii) with the letter Z the component that switches the lamp on and off.
[3]
(b) Describe how the circuit works as the external light intensity decreases and the lamp
comes on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the basic design of the tube of a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). For
Examiner’s
Use
heater filament B C
cathode rays
A anode D
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the names of parts A, B, C and D in the boxes provided. [2]
part A, ..............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
part B. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A varying p.d. from a 12 V supply is connected to a CRO, so that the waveform of the
supply is shown on the screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2008 0625/31/O/N/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6024898353*
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2009
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
0
mm 25
20
Fig. 1.1
................................................. [1]
................................................. [1]
(c) Describe how you would find the thickness of a sheet of paper used in a magazine.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
2 The list below gives the approximate densities of various metals. For
Examiner’s
gold 19 g / cm3 Use
lead 11 g / cm3
copper 9 g / cm3
iron 8 g / cm3
At an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue.
When the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is
65 cm3.
(a) In the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. You may
draw diagrams if you wish.
[3]
(b) Use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold. Show
your working.
yes
no
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009 0625/31/O/N/09 [Turn over
4
3 A student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and For
measuring the corresponding extensions. The results are shown below. Examiner’s
Use
weight / N 0 1 2 3 4 5
extension / mm 0 21 40 51 82 103
(a) On Fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. Do not draw a line through the points yet.
[2]
120
100
extension / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
weight / N
Fig. 3.1
(b) The student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results. For
Examiner’s
Which result is this? Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points.
[1]
(d) State and explain whether this spring is obeying Hooke’s Law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more
weights to the spring.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) The student estimates that if he hangs a 45 N load on the spring, the extension will be
920 mm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
................................................. [1]
(b) Any object moving in a circle has a force acting on it towards the centre of the circle.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
................................................. [1]
2. State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor of the lift.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Calculate the force exerted on the woman by the floor when the lift is accelerating.
State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor at this steady
speed.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
5 A farmer uses an electric pump to raise water from a river in order to fill the irrigation channels For
that keep the soil in his fields moist. Examiner’s
Use
water rises 3m
up tube
irrigation
channel
river
Fig. 5.1
(a) Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of 12 kg of water when it is
raised 3 m.
(b) Calculate the useful power output of the pump as it raises the water.
[Total: 6]
6 A vertical cylinder has a smooth well-fitting piston in it. Weights can be added to or removed For
from a tray on the top of the piston. Examiner’s
Use
weights
piston
air
cylinder
Fig. 6.1
(i) State what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder as a result of adding
these weights.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The initial pressure of the trapped air is 1.05 × 105 Pa. When the weights are added,
the volume of the air decreases from 860 cm3 to 645 cm3.
(b) The weights are kept as shown in Fig. 6.1. The temperature of the air in the cylinder is For
increased. Examiner’s
Use
(i) State what happens to the volume of the air in the cylinder as a result of this
temperature rise.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State how, if at all, the pressure of the air changes as the temperature changes.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State what must be done to prevent the volume change in (b)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) The volume change in (b)(i) is prevented. State what happens to the pressure of
the air in the cylinder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 12]
7 Three wires and a meter are used to construct a thermocouple for measuring the surface For
temperature of a pipe carrying hot liquid, as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
meter
wire 1 wire 2
cold junction
wire 3
hot junction
Fig. 7.1
(a) Copper wire and constantan wire are used in the construction of the thermocouple.
wire 1 ......................................................
wire 2 ......................................................
wire 3 ......................................................
[1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 3]
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a thin converging lens. The two principal foci are shown. For
Examiner’s
Use
principal
F2 F1 axis
Fig. 8.1
A vertical object, 2 cm tall, is to be positioned to the left of the lens, with one end on the
principal axis.
On Fig. 8.1,
(a) draw the object in a position which will produce a virtual image, labelling the object with
the letter O, [1]
(b) draw two rays showing how the virtual image is formed, [2]
[Total: 4]
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
Suggest why this might be a disadvantage when using water for cooking.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 illustrates an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of some metal.
stirrer
thermometer
lid
thread
cup
boiling water
insulation
metal water
heater
Fig. 9.1
The piece of metal is heated in boiling water until it has reached the temperature of
the water. It is then transferred rapidly to some water in a well-insulated cup. A very
sensitive thermometer is used to measure the initial and final temperatures of the water
in the cup.
(i) Calculate the temperature rise of the water in the cup and the temperature fall of
the piece of metal.
(ii) Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in the cup. State the equation For
that you use. Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Assume that only the water gained thermal energy from the piece of metal.
Making use of your answers to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calculate the value of the specific
heat capacity of the metal. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
(iv) Suggest one reason why the experiment might not have given a correct value for
the specific heat capacity of the metal.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 10]
resistance of 3 Ω.
22 000 V 3Ω
V
3Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) The a.c. generator actually generates at a much lower voltage than 22 000 V.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power delivered by the generator is 55 kW. Calculate the current in the transmission
lines.
(c) Calculate the rate of loss of energy from one of the 3 Ω transmission lines.
(d) Calculate the voltage drop across one of the transmission lines. For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) Calculate the potential difference V at the receiving end of the transmission lines.
V = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
relay lamp
B
A
light
sensor
Fig. 11.1
(b) The output of the temperature sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised temperature.
The output of the light sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised light levels.
(c) (i) Suggest why B is connected to a relay, rather than directly to the lamp.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The relay switches on when its input is high. In which of the three combinations in
(b) will the lamp light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2009 0625/31/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7776753992*
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed/time graph for a car travelling along a straight road. For
Examiner’s
The graph shows how the speed of the car changes as the car passes through a small Use
town.
35
D
30
speed
m/s
A
25
enters leaves
20 town town
here here
15
B C
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(b) Calculate the distance between the start of the town and the end of the town. For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) State how the graph shows that the deceleration of the car has the same numerical
value as its acceleration.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
2 A car of mass 900 kg is travelling at a steady speed of 30 m / s against a resistive force of For
2000 N, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
30 m / s
2000 N
resistive
force
Fig. 2.1
(b) Calculate the energy used in 1.0 s against the resistive force.
(c) What is the minimum power that the car engine has to deliver to the wheels?
(d) What form of energy is in the fuel, used by the engine to drive the car? For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(e) State why the energy in the fuel is converted at a greater rate than you have calculated
in (c).
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
3 Two students make the statements about acceleration that are given below. For
Examiner’s
Student A: For a given mass the acceleration of an object is proportional to the resultant Use
Student B: For a given force the acceleration of an object is proportional to the mass of
the object.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the equation which links acceleration a, resultant force F and mass m.
[1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Four identical metal plates, at the same temperature, are laid side by side on the ground. For
The rays from the Sun fall on the plates. Examiner’s
Use
State which plate has the fastest-rising temperature when the sunlight first falls on the
plates.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 is known as Leslie’s Differential Air Thermometer.
glass bulb
radiant heater
painted shiny
matt black glass bulb
air
T
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The heater is switched off. Tap T is opened so that the air on the two sides of T has the
same pressure. Tap T is then closed.
(i) The heater is switched on. On Fig. 4.1, mark clearly where the two liquid levels
might be a short time later. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
5 A certain substance is in the solid state at a temperature of –36 °C. It is heated at a constant For
rate for 32 minutes. The record of its temperature is given in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
time / min 0 1 2 6 10 14 18 22 24 26 28 30 32
Fig. 5.1
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State a time at which the energy is being supplied as latent heat of fusion.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Explain the energy changes undergone by the molecules of a substance during the
period when latent heat of vaporisation is being supplied.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
Calculate how much energy is supplied to the substance during the period
18 – 22 minutes.
(ii) The specific heat capacity of the substance is 1760 J / (kg °C). For
Examiner’s
Use the information in the table for the period 18 – 22 minutes to calculate the Use
[Total: 10]
6 Some plane waves travel on the surface of water in a tank. They pass from a region of deep For
water into a region of shallow water. Fig. 6.1 shows what the waves look like from above. Examiner’s
Use
boundary
waves move
this way
deep shallow
water water
Fig. 6.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The waves have a speed of 0.12 m / s in the deep water. Wave crests are 0.08 m apart in
the deep water.
Calculate the frequency of the source producing the waves. State the equation that you
use.
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows identical waves moving towards the boundary at an angle. For
Examiner’s
Use
boundary
A B
waves move
this way
deep shallow
water water
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw carefully the remainder of waves A and B, plus the two previous waves
which reached the shallow water. You will need to use your ruler to do this. [3]
[Total: 9]
7 During a thunderstorm, thunder and lightning are produced at the same time. For
Examiner’s
(a) A person is some distance away from the storm. Use
Explain why the person sees the lightning before hearing the thunder.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
time from start of storm / minutes 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
time between seeing lightning and hearing thunder / s 3.6 2.4 1.6 2.4 3.5 4.4
Fig. 7.1
(i) How many minutes after the storm started did it reach its closest point to the
laboratory?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) How can you tell that the storm was never immediately over the laboratory?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) When the storm started, it was immediately above a village 1200 m from the
laboratory.
Using this information and information from Fig. 7.1, calculate the speed of sound.
(iv) State the assumption you made when you calculated your answer to (b)(iii).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Some waves are longitudinal; some waves are transverse. For
Examiner’s
Some waves are electromagnetic; some waves are mechanical. Use
Put ticks (✓) in the table below to indicate which of these descriptions apply to the light
waves of the lightning and the sound waves of the thunder.
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[3]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) The transformer in Fig. 8.1 is used to convert 240 V a.c. to 6 V a.c. For
Examiner’s
Use
iron core
A
C
D
B
primary secondary
coil coil
(480 turns)
Fig. 8.1
(i) Using the information above, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(iii) State one way in which energy is lost from the transformer, and from which part it is
lost.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 8.2
(ii) From the information on the case, deduce what other electrical component must be
included within the case of the IGCSE Transformer, apart from a transformer.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) A transformer supplying electrical energy to a factory changes the 11 000 V a.c. supply to
440 V a.c. for use in the factory. The current in the secondary coil is 200 A.
Calculate the current in the primary coil, assuming no losses from the transformer.
[Total: 10]
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 illustrates the left hand rule, which helps when describing the force on a current- For
carrying conductor in a magnetic field. Examiner’s
Use
thumb
motion / force
first finger
second finger
Fig. 9.1
In each of the other two boxes, write the name of the quantity that direction represents.
[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a simple d.c. motor connected to a battery and a switch.
N
S
switch
battery
Fig. 9.2
(i) On Fig. 9.2, write in each of the boxes the name of the part of the motor to which For
the arrow is pointing. [2] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) State which way the coil of the motor will rotate when the switch is closed, when
viewed from the position X.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State two things which could be done to increase the speed of rotation of the coil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State one thing that is different between atoms of these two isotopes.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) An atom of one of these isotopes is unstable and decays into a different element by
emitting a -particle.
(i) State one thing about the atom that remains the same during this decay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one thing about the atom that changes as a result of this decay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]
11 (a) A coil of wire is connected into a circuit containing a variable resistor and a battery. For
Examiner’s
The variable resistor is adjusted until the potential difference across the coil is 1.8 V. Use
Calculate
(b) The coil in part (a) is replaced by one made of wire which has half the diameter of that
in (a).
When the potential difference across the coil is again adjusted to 1.8 V, the current is
only 0.30 A.
Calculate how the length of wire in the second coil compares with the length of wire in
the first coil.
length of wire in second coil is ………………………… the length of wire in first coil [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/31/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
*3428909673*
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 24990/4
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
1 An object of weight W is suspended by two ropes from a beam, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
86.6 N
30°
50.0 N 60°
Fig. 1.1
(a) In the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the two tensions.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
(a) Why is it incorrect to describe the circular motion as having constant velocity?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
car support
hydraulic fluid
4 pistons, each
of area 0.02 m2
Fig. 3.1
The hydraulic fluid transmits the pressure, caused by piston A, equally to each of the four pistons
holding up the car supports. The pressure throughout the fluid is the same.
[Total: 7]
4 A student in a laboratory uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 to determine the specific heat
capacity of aluminium.
thermometer
electrical heater
aluminium block
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Use the readings above to calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
(c) Because the student knows it is good scientific practice to repeat readings, after a short time
he carries out the experiment again, supplying the same quantity of electrical energy.
(i) Use these figures to calculate a second value for the specific heat capacity of
aluminium.
(ii) The student did not make any mistakes when taking the readings.
Suggest why the second value for the specific heat capacity of the aluminium is greater
than the first.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest two ways of improving the experiment in order to give as accurate a result as
possible.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a model cable-car system. It is driven by an electric motor coupled to a gear
system.
gears
m
6.0
2.0 m electric
motor
model
smooth cable-car
pulley
Fig. 5.1
The model cable-car has a mass of 5.0 kg and is lifted from the bottom pulley to the top pulley in
40 s. It stops automatically at the top.
(a) Calculate
(b) How would the electrical power input to the motor compare with your answer to (a)(iii)?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light PQ travelling in an optical fibre.
glass
Fig. 6.1
(a) Explain what is meant by total internal reflection, and state the conditions under which it
occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Carefully complete the path of the ray of light, until it reaches the end R of the optical fibre.
[2]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) The following list contains the names of types of energy transfer by means of waves.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the nature of the wave you have named in (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The remaining names in the list are all regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but one
region is missing.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A television station emits waves with a frequency of 2.5 × 108 Hz. Electromagnetic waves
travel at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the waves emitted by this television station. State the equation
you use.
[Total: 6]
8 The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a 2.0 V cell, whose resistance you should ignore.
There are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, an ammeter and another component, P.
5.0
A
S B
20.0
C
A
P
2.0 V
Fig. 8.1
(i) in position A,
(ii) in position B.
(c) Describe and explain what is seen on the ammeter when S is moved to position C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) With S in position A, calculate how long it takes for the circuit to transfer 320 J of electrical
energy to other forms.
[Total: 10]
BLANK PAGE
9 In Fig. 9.1, A and B are two conductors on insulating stands. Both A and B were initially
uncharged.
X Y
A B
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, mark the signs of the charges induced at end X and at end Y of conductor B.
[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/31/O/N/10 [Turn over
16
10 Emissions from a radioactive source pass through a hole in a lead screen and into a magnetic
field, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
lead
screen
3 cm
Fig. 10.1
Radiation detectors are placed at A, B and C. They give the following readings:
A B C
The radioactive source is then completely removed, and the readings become:
A B C
(a) Explain why there are still counts being recorded at A, B and C, even when the radioactive
source has been removed, and give the reason for them being slightly different.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) From the data given, deduce the type of emission being detected, if any, at A, at B and at C
when the radiation source is present.
detector at A .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
detector at B .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
detector at C .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
11 When no circuit is connected to the input of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO), there is a horizontal
trace across the middle of the screen.
On the grid alongside each circuit, draw the trace that might be seen on the screen of the CRO.
+
battery CRO
–
[6]
Fig. 11.1
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 9 9 7 8 9 4 1 3 2 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (LEO/DJ) 28843/5
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
trolley
force
Fig. 1.1
The measurements are repeated for a series of different forces, with the results shown in the table
below.
(a) On Fig. 1.2, plot these points and draw the best straight line for your points. [2]
16
force / N
12
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
acceleration
m / s2
Fig. 1.2
(b) The graph shows that below a certain force there is no acceleration.
(ii) A force smaller than that in (b)(i) is applied to the stationary trolley. Suggest what happens
to the trolley, if anything.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
gradient = ...........................................................[1]
(d) (i) State the equation that links resultant force F, mass m and acceleration a.
[1]
(ii) Use your gradient from (c) to find the mass of the trolley.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(e) On Fig. 1.3, sketch a speed / time graph for a trolley with constant acceleration.
speed
0
0
time
Fig. 1.3
[1]
[Total: 9]
2 Some builders decide to measure their personal power ratings using apparatus they already have
on site. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement they use.
pulley
rope
load
pulley
Fig. 2.1
(a) In the table below, list the three quantities they must measure in order to calculate one man’s
power, and the instrument they would use for each measurement.
1.
2.
3.
[3]
(b) One workman is measured as having a power of 528 W. His weight is 800 N.
He can develop the same power climbing a ladder, whose rungs are 30 cm apart.
(c) The human body is only about 15% efficient when climbing ladders.
Calculate the actual energy used from the body of the workman in (b) when he climbs 20
rungs.
[Total: 8]
3 During a period of hot weather, the atmospheric pressure on the pond in Fig. 3.1 remains constant.
Water evaporates from the pond, so that the depth h decreases.
force due to
air pressure
Fig. 3.1
(a) Study the diagram and state, giving your reason, what happens during this hot period to
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the pond due to the water.
(iii) A bubble of gas is released from the mud at the bottom of the pond. Its initial volume is
0.5 cm3.
Ignoring any temperature differences in the water, calculate the volume of the bubble as
it reaches the surface.
volume = ...........................................................[2]
(iv) In fact, the temperature of the water is greater at the top than at the bottom of the pond.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
4 The circuit of Fig. 4.1 is set up to run a small immersion heater from a 6.0 V battery.
6.0 V
X A
heater
Fig. 4.1
name .........................................................................................................................................
purpose .................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The heater is designed to work from a 3.6 V supply. It has a power rating of 4.5 W at this
voltage.
(i) Calculate the current in the heater when it has the correct potential difference across it.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the resistance of component X if there is to be the correct potential difference
across the heater. The battery and the ammeter both have zero resistance.
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(c) Some time after the heater is switched on, the ammeter reading is seen to have decreased.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) As an alternative to running the heater from a battery, it is decided to construct a circuit to
enable it to be operated from the a.c. mains supply.
(i) reduce the potential difference from that of the mains supply down to a potential difference
suitable for the heater,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) change the current from a.c. to a current which has only one direction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
Fig. 5.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain what the hazard might be if the heater is not earthed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The heater has two 110 V heating elements, with two switches, so that either one or both
elements may be switched on.
In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing how the heating elements and switches
are connected to the mains supply.
Use the symbol for each heating element.
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/31/M/J/11
11
6 (a) Six different nuclides have nucleon and proton numbers as follows:
A 214 84
B 214 85
C 211 84
D 211 86
E 210 82
F 210 83
State which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element. .................. and ................. [1]
(i) Calculate the time taken for the activity of this sample to fall to 15 Bq.
(ii) Explain why, when the activity has become 15 Bq, much of the sample will no longer be
thorium-232.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
Outline how you would use a refraction experiment to deduce the speed of light in glass. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) A tsunami is a giant water wave. It may be caused by an earthquake below the ocean.
Waves from a certain tsunami have a wavelength of 1.9 × 105 m and a speed of 240 m / s.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The shock wave from the earthquake travels at 2.5 × 103 m / s.
The centre of the earthquake is 6.0 × 105 m from the coast of a country.
Calculate how much warning of the arrival of the tsunami at the coast is given by the
earth tremor felt at the coast.
[Total: 10]
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a section of an optical fibre. It consists of a fibre of denser transparent material,
coated with a layer of a less dense transparent material.
less dense
material
ray
denser material
Fig. 8.1
One ray within the fibre has been started for you on Fig. 8.1.
(i) State and explain what happens to the ray already drawn, after it reaches the boundary
between the materials.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, carefully continue the ray until it reaches the end of the section of optical
fibre. [1]
(b) Fibre-optic cables are sometimes used to carry out internal examinations on the human
stomach.
(i) Suggest one reason why the cable is made of thousands of very thin optical fibres.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe briefly how the light from the stomach is transferred to the detecting equipment
outside the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
9 A simple motor is made in a school laboratory. A coil of wire is mounted on an axle between the
poles of a horseshoe magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
coil
B C
N S
A D
+ –
battery
Fig. 9.1
(a) At the instant illustrated in Fig. 9.1, the coil ABCD is horizontal and the battery is connected
as shown.
(i) For this position, state the direction of the force on AB and the direction of the motion of
AB.
force on AB ........................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why BC does not contribute to the turning force on the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) At the instant when the coil is vertical, the springy contacts do not, in fact, make contact with
the ends of the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The motor in Fig. 9.1 does not rotate very quickly. The designer of a commercial motor is
required to produce a faster-rotating motor.
Suggest one change that could be made to increase the speed of the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
10 (a) A cathode-ray oscilloscope makes use of the process known as thermionic emission.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Include in your diagram the tube, the cathode, the accelerating anode, the focusing anode
and both X- and Y-plates. Do not attempt to show any external circuits.
[3]
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) One cathode-ray tube has 5000 V between the accelerating anode and the cathode.
Calculate
current = ...........................................................[2]
energy = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
11 A mass of 0.36 kg of a certain substance is in the solid state in a well-insulated container. The
substance is heated at the rate of 1.2 × 104 J / minute.
2.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance is all at the same temperature, and it starts to
melt.
11.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance finishes melting and the temperature starts
to rise again.
(b) (i) After 11 minutes of heating, when the temperature starts rising again, in which state is
the substance?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe what happens to the molecules as thermal energy is supplied to them in this
state.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 4 2 0 3 7 8 0 5 5 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NH/DJ) 33051/8
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a graph of speed against time for a train. After 100 s the train stops at a
station.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) For the time interval between 40 s and 100 s, calculate the distance travelled by the train.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The train stops for 80 s, then accelerates to 30 m / s with an acceleration of 0.60 m / s2. It
then travels at constant speed.
Complete the graph for the interval 100 s to 280 s, showing your calculations in the space
below.
[5]
[Total: 8]
2 (a) Energy from the Sun evaporates water from the sea. Some of this water eventually drives a
hydroelectric power station. Give an account of the processes and energy changes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In a hydroelectric power station, 200 000 kg of water per second fall through a vertical distance
of 120 m. The water passes through turbines to generate electricity, and leaves the turbines
with a speed of 14 m / s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water in 1 second. Use g = 10 m / s2.
(ii) Calculate the kinetic energy of the water leaving the turbines in 1 second.
[Total: 8]
3 (a) State the two conditions required for the equilibrium of a body acted upon by a number of
forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an arm with the hand holding a weight of 120 N.
2 cm
15 cm
20 N
120 N
33 cm
Fig. 3.1
The 20 N force is the weight of the forearm, acting at its centre of mass. F is the force in the
muscle of the upper arm. P is the point in the elbow about which the arm pivots. The distances
of the forces from point P are shown.
force F = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) A force acts on the forearm at point P. Calculate this force and state its direction.
force = ...............................................................
direction = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011 0625/31/O/N/11
5
4 (a) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show a simple mercury barometer. Insert the correct labels in the
boxes. Label with the letter h the measurement required to calculate the pressure of the
atmosphere.
[3]
Fig. 4.1
(b) The value of h taken using this barometer is 0.73 m. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of the atmospheric pressure suggested by this measurement.
Use g = 10 m / s2.
(c) Standard atmospheric pressure is 0.76 m of mercury. Suggest a reason why the value of h in
(b) is lower than this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
5 (a) Equal volumes of a gas held at constant pressure, a liquid and a solid undergo the same
temperature rise.
(ii) Explain why the pressure of the gas must be kept constant for this comparison.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 °C
Fig. 5.1
(i) State two properties of alcohol which make it suitable for use in a thermometer.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State two changes to the design of this thermometer which would make it more
sensitive.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why it is an advantage for the glass surrounding the alcohol in the bulb of the
thermometer to be very thin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows the position of layers of air, at one moment, as a sound wave of constant
frequency passes through the air. Compressions are labelled C. Rarefactions are labelled R.
C R C R C R C R C R C
Fig. 6.1
................................................................................................................................[1]
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw a line marked with arrows at each end to show the wavelength of the
sound. [1]
(b) In an experiment to measure the speed of sound in steel, a steel pipe of length 200 m is
struck at one end with a hammer. A microphone at the other end of the pipe is connected
to an accurate timer. The timer records a delay of 0.544 s between the arrival of the sound
transmitted by the steel pipe and the sound transmitted by the air in the pipe.
The speed of sound in air is 343 m / s. Calculate the speed of sound in steel.
[Total: 7]
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of monochromatic red light, in air, incident on a glass block at an angle of
incidence of 50°.
50°
Fig. 7.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) For this red ray the refractive index of the glass is 1.52. Calculate the angle of refraction
for the ray.
(iii) Without measuring angles, use a ruler to draw the approximate path of the ray in the
glass block and emerging from the block. [2]
(b) The red ray in Fig. 7.1 is replaced by a ray of monochromatic violet light. For this violet ray the
refractive index of the glass is 1.54. The speed of light in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s.
(i) Calculate the speed of the violet light in the glass block.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Use a ruler to draw the approximate path of this violet ray in the glass block and emerging
from the block. Make sure this path is separated from the path drawn for the red light in
(a)(iii). Mark both parts of this path with the letter V. [2]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) In Fig. 8.1, a magnet is moving towards one end of a solenoid connected to a sensitive centre-
zero meter. During this movement a current is induced in the solenoid.
S N
Fig. 8.1
Suggest three possible changes to the system in Fig. 8.1 that would increase the induced
current.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...........................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a transformer. P is the primary coil. S is the secondary coil. The coils are
wound on an iron core.
P S
Fig. 8.2
P has 200 turns and S has 800 turns. The e.m.f. induced across S is 24 V. The current in S is
0.50 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
Calculate
voltage = ...........................................................[2]
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
9 The graphs in Fig. 9.1 show the relation between the current I and the potential difference V for a
resistor and a lamp.
5
I/A
4 lamp
2 resistor
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V/V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) Describe how, if at all, the resistance varies as the current increases in
(ii) State the value of the potential difference when the resistor and the lamp have the same
resistance.
(b) The two components are connected in parallel to a supply of e.m.f. 4.0 V. Calculate the total
resistance of the circuit.
[Total: 7]
D
A
+
S
–
C
B
Fig. 10.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
In terms of the p.d. across B, explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature
varies from 20 °C to 100 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
fluorescent
screen
electron
heater
beam
Fig. 11.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Without deflection, the electron beam produces a spot at the centre of the fluorescent screen.
A deflection of the spot towards the top of the screen is required.
(i) Describe how the Y-plates can be used to bring about this deflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Fig. 11.2
On Fig. 11.2, sketch the pattern of the electric field produced between the plates.
[4]
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 9 3 4 4 1 2 2 4 5 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
10
11
Total
DC (NF/JG) 43223/5
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
1 The period of the vertical oscillations of a mass hanging from a spring is known to be For
constant. Examiner’s
Use
(a) A student times single oscillations with a stopwatch. In 10 separate measurements, the
stopwatch readings were:
1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.9 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s.
What is the best value obtainable from these readings for the time of one oscillation?
Explain how you arrive at your answer.
explanation ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how, using the same stopwatch, the student can find the period of oscillation
more accurately.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 5]
2 A girl rides her bicycle along a straight level road. Fig. 2.1 shows a graph of her distance For
moved against time. Examiner’s
Use
400 D
300
distance / m
200
100
B
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(b) Calculate
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012 0625/31/M/J/12 [Turn over
4
3 (a) State an example of the conversion of chemical energy to another form of energy. For
Examiner’s
example ........................................................................................................................... Use
(b) The electrical output of a solar panel powers a pump. The pump operates a water
fountain. The output of the solar panel is 17 V and the current supplied to the pump is
0.27 A.
(ii) The pump converts electrical energy to kinetic energy of water with an efficiency
of 35%.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the water delivered by the pump in 1 second.
(iii) The pump propels 0.00014 m3 of water per second. This water rises vertically as a
jet. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012 0625/31/M/J/12
5
4 Fig. 4.1 represents part of the hydraulic braking system of a car. For
Examiner’s
Use
piston X piston Y
F1
F2
Fig. 4.1
The force F1 of the driver’s foot on the brake pedal moves piston X. The space between
pistons X and Y is filled with oil which cannot be compressed. The force F2 exerted by the oil
moves piston Y. This force is applied to the brake mechanism in the wheels of the car.
(a) The force F1 is 90 N. Calculate the pressure exerted on the oil by piston X.
(b) The pressure on piston Y is the same as the pressure applied by piston X. Explain why
the force F2 is greater than the force F1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the braking system does not work properly if the oil contains bubbles of air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
a quantity of material,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the effect of this change of state on the temperature of the material.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A polystyrene cup holds 250 g of water at 20 °C. In order to cool the water to make a
cold drink, small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added until the water reaches 0 °C and no
unmelted ice is present.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 J / (g °C), specific latent heat of fusion of
ice = 330 J / g]
(i) Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water in cooling to 0 °C.
[Total: 9]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a glass flask full of water at 10 °C and sealed with a bung. A long glass tube For
passes through the bung into the water. The water level in the tube is at X. Examiner’s
Use
bung X
glass flask
water
Fig. 6.1
When the flask is placed in hot water, the water level initially falls a little below X, and then
rises some way above X.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest a change to the apparatus that would make the fall and rise of the water level
greater.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
7 (a) A wave passes along the surface of the water in a ripple tank. Describe the motion of a For
molecule on the surface as the wave passes. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a view from above of water waves approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.
The water on both sides of the barrier has the same depth.
barrier with
narrow gap
direction of
water waves
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of waves in the region to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) State the process by which waves arrive at point P to the right of the barrier.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The waves approaching the barrier in Fig. 7.1 have a wavelength of 1.4 cm and travel at
a speed of 12 cm / s.
[Total: 6]
8 (a) In Fig. 8.1, S is a metal sphere standing on an insulating base. R is a negatively charged For
rod placed close to S. Examiner’s
Use
–
–
R –
S
–
–
– insulating
base
Fig. 8.1
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, add + signs and – signs to suggest the result of this movement. [1]
(iii) Describe the actions which now need to take place so that S becomes positively
charged with the charge distributed evenly over its surface. A positively charged
object is not available.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) During a thunderstorm, the potential difference between thunderclouds and the ground
builds up to 1.5 × 106 V. In each stroke of lightning, 30 C of charge passes between the
thunderclouds and the ground. Lightning strokes to the ground occur, on average, at 2
minute intervals.
Calculate
(i) the average current between the thunderclouds and the ground,
9 This question refers to quantities and data shown on the circuit diagram of Fig. 9.1. For
Examiner’s
6.0 V Use
I4
I1 3.0 1
A R
I2
X Y
I3
2.0 1
Fig. 9.1
Calculate
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire PQ placed between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in For
wire PQ. Examiner’s
Use
P Q
S
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, sketch lines with arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field
between the poles of the magnet. [1]
(ii) The force on PQ is into the paper.
(b) The wire PQ in Fig. 10.1 is replaced by a narrow beam of β-particles travelling from left
to right.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Describe the path of the β-particles in the space between the poles of the magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) State what happens to the air molecules along the path of the β-particles.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
11 Fig. 11.1 shows part of a circuit designed to switch on a security lamp when it gets dark. For
Examiner’s
Use
relay coil S L
A
+
–
X
Fig. 11.1
When there is a current in the relay coil, switch S closes and the lamp L comes on.
State the components that need to be connected into these gaps for the circuit to
perform its required function.
gap A ...............................................................................................................................
gap B ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is modified. The function of lamp L is now to give a warning when
the temperature becomes too high.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 4 1 5 8 3 5 2 4 2 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 Extended October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
1
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 2
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
4
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.
5
10
11
Total
DC (AC/SW) 49515/3
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the graph of speed v against time t for a train as it travels from one station to For
the next. Examiner’s
Use
20
v
m/s
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
t /s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to calculate
(c) The force generated by the engine of the train is called the driving force.
Write down, in words, an equation relating the driving force to any other forces acting on
the train during the period t = 10 s to t = 130 s.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
2 (a) State the factors which completely describe a vector quantity. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An aeroplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m / s. A wind starts to blow at
24 m / s towards the north.
Draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the aeroplane. Use a scale of
1.0 cm = 10 m / s.
[Total: 6]
3 (a) A stationary body is acted upon by a number of forces. State the two conditions which For
must apply for the body to remain at rest. Examiner’s
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device used for compressing crushed material.
380 mm 120 mm
lever arm
plunger
20 N
cylinder
Fig. 3.1
The lever arm rotates about the hinge H at its right-hand end. A force of 20 N acts
downwards on the left-hand end of the lever arm. The force F of the crushed material on
the plunger acts upwards. Ignore the weight of the lever arm.
(i) Use the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about H to calculate the upward
force F which the crushed material exerts on the plunger. The distances are shown
on Fig. 3.1.
(ii) The cross-sectional area A of the plunger in contact with the crushed material is
0.0036 m2. Calculate the pressure exerted on the crushed material by the plunger.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Fig. 4.1
The height of the bar above the ground is 2.0 m. The maximum increase in gravitational
potential energy (g.p.e.) of the athlete during the jump is calculated using the expression
g.p.e. = mgh.
Explain why the value of h used in the calculation is much less than 2.0 m.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows, in order, five stages of an athlete successfully performing a pole-vault. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.2
Describe the energy changes which take place during the performance of the pole-
vault, from the original stationary position of the pole-vaulter before the run-up, to the
final stationary position after the vault.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 8]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the increase in pressure of a gas when its volume is decreased at constant
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A cylinder of volume 5.0 × 103 cm3 contains air at a pressure of 8.0 × 105 Pa.
A leak develops so that air gradually escapes from the cylinder until the air in the cylinder
is at atmospheric pressure. The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the volume of the escaped air, now at atmospheric pressure. Assume that the
temperature stays constant.
[Total: 8]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) A tray of area 0.25 m2, filled with ice to a depth of 12 mm, is removed from a
refrigerator.
Calculate the mass of ice on the tray. The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
(ii) Thermal energy from the Sun is falling on the ice at a rate of 250 W / m2. The ice
absorbs 60 % of this energy.
Calculate the energy absorbed in 1.0 s by the 0.25 m2 area of ice on the tray.
Calculate the time taken for all the ice to melt. The specific latent heat of fusion of
ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
[Total: 8]
7 (a) Explain why a liquid cools when evaporation takes place from its surface. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows five vessels each made of the same metal and containing water.
Vessels A, B, C and D are identical in size and shape. Vessel E is shallower and wider.
The temperature of the air surrounding each vessel is 20 °C.
A B C D E
Fig. 7.1
The table shows details about each vessel and their contents.
The following questions are about the time taken for the temperature of the water in the
vessels to fall by 10 °C from the initial temperature.
(i) Explain why the water in B takes longer to cool than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain why the water in C cools more quickly than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Explain why the water in D cools more quickly than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Suggest two reasons why the water in E cools more quickly than the water in A. For
Examiner’s
1. ............................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
8 (a) A ray of light in air travels across a flat boundary into glass. The angle of incidence is For
51°. The angle of refraction is 29°. Examiner’s
Use
(i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram to illustrate this information. [3]
(b) A ray of light in glass travels towards a flat boundary with air. The angle of incidence is
51°. This ray does not emerge into the air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a thin, straight rod XY placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a For
magnet. The wires from the ends of XY are connected to a centre-zero voltmeter. Examiner’s
Use
N S
Fig. 9.1
(a) When XY is moved slowly upwards the needle of the voltmeter shows a small deflection.
(i) State how XY must be moved to produce a larger deflection in the opposite
direction.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) XY is now rotated about its central point by raising X and lowering Y. Explain why
no deflection is observed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The effect of moving XY can be seen if the wires are connected to the terminals of a
cathode-ray oscilloscope instead of the voltmeter.
(i) State the parts inside the oscilloscope tube to which these terminals are connected.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The spot on the oscilloscope screen moves up and down repeatedly. State how XY
is being moved.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State the setting of the time-base of the oscilloscope during the process described
in (ii).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
10 (a) State the electrical quantity that has the same value for each of two resistors connected For
to a battery Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit with a 1.2 kΩ resistor and a thermistor in series. There is no
current in the voltmeter.
1.2 k1
9.0 V
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the voltmeter reading when the resistance of the thermistor is 3.6 kΩ.
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a fire-alarm circuit. The circuit is designed to close switch S and ring For
bell B if there is a fire. Examiner’s
Use
S B
relay coil
9.0 V
Fig. 10.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
(b) In a famous experiment, carried out in a vacuum, a very thin sheet of gold was placed in
the path of alpha particles.
It was found that a large number of the alpha particles passed through the sheet with
little or no deflection from their original path. A very small number of the alpha particles
were reflected back towards the source.
(i) Explain, in terms of the force acting, why the direction of motion of an alpha particle
changes when it comes close to the nucleus of a gold atom.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State two conclusions, about the nuclei of atoms, that were made from the results
of this experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
6
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
Friday 28 MAY 1999 Morning 1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
P4
I P2
P1
A B L
lamp
Fig. 1.1
The path of an incident ray LI, from lamp L, was marked by two pins P1 and P2. The
reflected ray was located and marked using pins P3 and P4.
The diagram of Fig. 1.1 represents the beaker, the lamp and the pin marks.
(a) Complete the diagram by drawing lines to represent the incident and reflected rays.
Label each ray. [3]
(b) Measure the angle between the incident and the reflected ray, call this angle d and
record its value in the table. Also measure and record the angle e between the incident
ray and the line AL. [2]
angle
°
d
0625/6/S99
3 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) Use your values of d and e to calculate a value for the ratio d
–.
e
d
– = ............................................................................................ [1]
e
(d) (i) On Fig. 1.1, mark, with the letter E, the position where you would place your eye
so as to see the lamp by the reflected ray.
(ii) Why is it an advantage to fill the beaker with coloured water when viewing the
lamp by a ray reflected from the outside surface of the beaker? You may draw a
diagram if you wish.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
pointer
pivot
straw
A B
metre rule
card
Y
X
counterweight bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule was perpendicular to the bench.
You may draw on Fig. 2.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the counterweight was placed at the corner X of the card, the straw was found to
be horizontal. In the space below, draw a sketch of the straw to represent its position
when the counterweight was attached at the point labelled Y, not X.
[2]
0625/6/S99
5 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) With the straw horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2.1, a small paper clip was attached to the
end A of the straw. The balance came to rest as shown in Fig. 2.2. Write down the
reading shown for the height of the pointer B.
metre rule
27
26
pointer
pivot
B
25
straw
24
card
paper clip
Fig. 2.2
(d) In one experiment, additional clips were attached to the end of the straw. The clips
were added one at a time. After each clip had been added, the height h of the pointer
was determined. Draw up a table in which you could record the values of h together
with the corresponding total number of clips used. Your table should be suitable for use
in your laboratory book.
[2]
d / cm x
10 x
x
9
x
8 x
7 x
6 x
x
5
4 x
x
3
2 x
1 x
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
number of paper clips n
Fig. 2.3
The paper clips were removed from the straw and a small mass of plasticine was hung
on the end A of the straw. The following information was obtained when this small
mass of plasticine was in air and when it was totally submerged in water.
with the plasticine in air, the distance moved by the pointer da = 9.1 cm
with the plasticine in water, the distance moved by the pointer dw = 4.6 cm
(i) From Fig. 2.3 determine the corresponding value for the number n of clips in use.
2. Using the information you gave in (i) what can you say about the magnitude of F?
........................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/6/S99
7 For
Examiner's
Use
3 An equal volume of water was placed in each of three similar test-tubes. The tubes were
topicmodels
topicmolecular
topicmolecularmodels
topiclens
used in three experiments as described below.
Experiment 1
A small sheet of glass was placed on top of the tube and the apparatus turned upside
down, as shown in Fig. 3.1. A strip of graph paper was held close to the tube and used as a
scale.
h1
sheet of glass
Fig. 3.1
The height h1 of the water level above the glass was observed over a period of 5 hours.
The observations are recorded in the table on page 8.
Experiment 2
The apparatus was similar to that for experiment 1. In addition, a piece of paper tissue was
placed between the sheet of glass and the tube, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Once again, the
height h2 of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours.
water
fan
h2 water
h3
tissue tissue
sheet of glass sheet of glass
The apparatus was similar to that used for experiment 2. In addition, an electric fan was
used to produce a draught over the surface of the tissue, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The area
and shape of the tissue paper was the same as for experiment 2. Once again, the height h3
of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours.
The three experiments were conducted over the same 5 hour period. The temperature of
the water was the same at the start of the experiments.
Fig. 3.4
(a) (i) Calculate an average value for room temperature during the 5 hour period.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6/S99
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) (i) The area of cross-section of each tube was 2.0 cm2. During the 5 hour period,
what volume of water flowed out of each tube?
Experiment 1
volume = ...........................
Experiment 2
volume = ...........................
Experiment 3
volume = ...........................
(ii) Calculate the average rate of flow of water, in cm3 per hour, from the tube during
experiment 3.
(c) Write a conclusion to the experiments. Your conclusion should explain why the three
rates of flow are so different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
+ –
switch
X
Y
R
Fig. 4.1
X ......................................................................................................................................
Y ................................................................................................................................ [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Explain how you would use the apparatus to determine values of R. Your answer
should include what you would do before you close the switch.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) The value of R is about 9.5 and the current through it must not exceed 0.10 A. What
would be a good choice for the maximum reading of the component labelled Z?
0625/6/S99
11
BLANK PAGE
set-square rule
drinking straw
h
ball
ballast
wax
Fig. 5.1
A steel ball was put inside the straw and the new value for h was obtained. Additional balls
were put in the straw one at a time. For each new ball the corresponding value of h was
determined. Fig. 5.2 shows the values obtained.
number n of balls 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) Plot the graph of h / cm (y-axis) against n (x-axis). Start your y-axis at h = 16 cm
and make sure that your x-axis is scaled over the values n = 0 to n = 10.
(ii) Using your graph, estimate the value of h you would obtain if 10 balls were added.
Show your working.
Mark the graph to show how you obtained this value for h.
h = .................................................................
[4]
0625/6/S99
13 For
Examiner's
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Before taking the readings for h, one student pushed the straw down a little. The straw
then moved up and down before coming to rest. Suggest a reason why this was done.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The straw floats in the water so that its top is as high as possible. For this reason, the
container was always full of water. Suggest what would happen if the container was
not quite full so that the water surface was as shown in Fig. 5.3.
Fig. 5.3
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/6/S99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
Monday 22 NOVEMBER 1999 Morning 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
P kerosene
water
bench top
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using your own ruler, make measurements which will enable you to determine h, the
difference between the vertical heights of the water levels above the bench top at P and
at Q. Show all of your measurements and your calculation of h in the space below.
[4]
0625/6 W99
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) When the experiment is carried out in a laboratory, the vertical height of the water level
at P is measured using a half-metre rule.
Explain how you would use the rule when the apparatus is on a bench in the laboratory.
Your answer should include how you would position the rule and what you would do to
obtain an accurate value for the height of the water level. You may draw a diagram or
draw on Fig. 1.1 if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
+ –
Fig. 2.1
Draw a circuit diagram showing the following components, all connected in series:
a d.c. power supply, labelled to show its polarity,
a fixed resistor,
a diode,
a switch.
On your circuit diagram, the switch should be shown open and the diode should be able
to conduct when the switch is closed.
[3]
(b) (i) Redraw your circuit diagram, adding an ammeter to measure the current in the
diode. Label the polarity of the ammeter terminals.
(ii) Is there any other position in the circuit where you could put the ammeter to
measure the current through the diode? Tick one box.
yes
no
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Assuming that the fixed resistor has a resistance of 100 Ω and that the potential
difference of the power supply is 3.0 V, calculate the maximum current Imax in the
circuit.
Imax = ......................................
(ii) In order to calculate the value for Imax in (i) above, what assumption did you make
about the resistance of the circuit?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
; ;
Examiner’s
Use
3 A small steel ball is dropped through a hole in a card and falls through a clear plastic tube
topicmolecularmodels
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topiclens
before it hits a glass surface as shown in Fig. 3.1. There is a rubber band on the outside of
the tube. This band can be moved along the tube.
hole
;;
card
plastic tube
clamp
ball
rubber
band
14.7 cm
glass surface
Fig. 3.1
When the ball bounces, it rises up inside the tube to a height shown as h in Fig. 3.1. The top
of the bounce is marked by the position of the rubber band.
(a) Four different balls are used. These are dropped from the same height onto four pieces
of glass, which are 2 mm thick. The areas of the top surface of the glass are 56 cm2,
112 cm2, 224 cm2 and 450 cm2. The results of this experiment are shown in Fig. 3.2.
Fig. 3.2
0625/6 W99
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
maximum mass
(i) 1. Calculate the ratio ––––––––––––– for the balls.
minimum mass
(ii) Use the table to justify the assertion that the value for h does not depend upon the
value for the surface area of the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Describe how the height h depends upon the mass of the ball for this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) The height of the hole above the surface of the glass block is 14.7 cm. Each ball is
released from this height. The following relation gives the change in potential energy of
each ball when it falls.
All of this energy becomes kinetic energy just before the moment of impact with the
glass.
Suggest what happens to this kinetic energy after the impact for the heaviest and for the
lightest balls. Your answer should include information from the table.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
lid
;;;
hand
stirrer lens
thermometer
;;;
lagging
Fig. 4.1
(a) Give a reason for using each of the following items of apparatus.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Part of the thermometer that is used to determine the fall in temperature is shown in
Fig. 4.2. The diagram shows the thermometer before and after adding the ammonium
chloride.
°C -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
°C -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Fig. 4.2
(i) Record each of the temperatures and determine the fall in temperature.
(ii) In Fig. 4.2 the liquid thread is shown along the edge of the scale marks. This is the
recommended way to position the liquid thread before reading a temperature. In
Fig. 4.3 the thread is positioned away from the edge of the scale.
°C -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Fig. 4.3
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) How would you avoid making a parallax error when reading the thermometer shown in
Fig. 4.2? You may draw a labelled diagram if you wish.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
Fig. 5.1
y
w
Fig. 5.2
A glass block is now placed between the lens and the screen as shown in Fig. 5.2. The block
has width w. The image is out of focus. The screen is moved until the image is once again
sharp. The lens to screen distance, shown as y in Fig. 5.2, is now greater than x. The new
value for y is measured and recorded.
The experiment is repeated for different values of the lamp to lens distance. The values
obtained for x and y are given in Fig. 5.3.
(y – x )/mm
Fig. 5.3
0625/6 W99
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Plot the graph of y / mm (y-axis) against x / mm (x-axis). Start your x-axis at x / mm = 140
and your y-axis at y / mm = 170. Draw the best straight line to fit the plotted points.
[5]
(b) (i) Determine the values of (y – x) and enter them in the table of Fig. 5.3, shown on
page 10. On Fig. 5.2, show what is meant by the distance (y – x).
(ii) State what happens to the value for (y – x) as the value for x increases.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) A second glass block of width greater than w is used in a repeat experiment.
Suggest how this might affect the values of (y – x).
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6 W99
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000 1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
The glass beaker filled with water is placed with C, the centre of its base, on a line labelled
I
LL . An optics pin is placed at the point labelled O, so that the pin is touching the side of the
beaker.
Two points A and A are on the surface of the beaker at equal distances from the line LL . The
I I
pin at point O acts as an optical object. The ray emerging from A is located by using two pins
placed at two points labelled P1 and P2.
(a) Draw a neat, thin and accurate line to show the path of the ray from O to A in the water.
Complete the path, in air, of the emerging ray along AP1P2. [3]
(b) Produce the line P2P1A backwards so as to cut the line LL . Label, with the letter I, the
I
point where the two lines cross. Point I is the position of the image of the pin O when it
is touching the side of the beaker. [2]
(c) Draw the line OA to represent a ray in water from O passing through A . Using the
I I
information you gained in (b), draw a line to show the path of the ray in air after it passes
through the point A . Mark your diagram in such a way as to show how you found the
I
IR : OC = …… : 1
IR : OC = …… : 1 [2]
0625/6 S00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
P2
P1
A
L pin R L'
O C
A'
Fig. 1.1
(a) It is found that there are positions where the small magnet in the plotting compass
points so that it is parallel to the line OX. Some of these positions are located and are
labelled A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H, as shown on Fig. 2.1. The positions shown in Fig. 2.1
also lie on straight lines that come from the centre of the bar magnet.
Describe how you would locate the position labelled A. Your answer should explain
(i) what you would do to help you judge when the small magnet in the plotting
compass is parallel to OX,
(ii) how you would ensure that the small magnet of the plotting compass is not sticking,
(iii) what you would do so as to mark the point A on the radial line,
(iv) how you would avoid making a parallax error when locating the point A.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/6 S00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
Y
80°
North
(magnetic) 60°
plotting
C compass
B
D
A
40°
E
20°
G
O X
N S
bar magnet
Fig. 2.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
terminals
y 5
4 6
x
3 7
control knob
2 8
1 9
0 10
OHM
Fig. 3.1
(a) What range of values of resistance are available with this resistor?
(b) On Fig. 3.1, draw a line representing the position of the pointer when the value of the
resistance in use is 6.3 Ω. [1]
(c) Between the numbers 3 and 4, there are two letters x and y.
resistance at x = ..................................
(ii) What is the change in resistance when the pointer moves from x to y?
[1]
0625/6 S00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) A student is asked to connect a circuit so that the current through a filament lamp can
be changed by using a variable resistor.
Fig. 3.2 represents the student’s wrongly connected circuit. (In this diagram the circuit
symbol is not used for the variable resistor.)
lamp
5
4 6
3 7
variable resistor
2 8
1 9
0
OHM
10 Ω
Fig. 3.2
When the variable resistor is varied from 10 Ω to 5 Ω, the change in the current is very
small.
What could the student do to obtain a larger change in the current when the variable
resistor is changed from 10 Ω to 5 Ω?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
boiling water
plastic cup
cold water
metal block
HEATER
Fig. 4.1
A piece of metal at the boiling temperature of water is transferred to a mass of cold water.
Initially, the cold water is at a temperature of TC. The hot metal raises the temperature of this
water to TH. The rise in temperature, θ, is determined from the relation θ = TH – TC. The
experiment is repeated so as to obtain five sets of readings for different masses of cold
water.
(a) Draw up a table, for use in your laboratory notebook, in which you can record
[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 on page 9 is a graph showing how θ varies with m, the mass of cold water used.
(i) Why has a smooth line been drawn through the points?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/6 S00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
13
12 A
11
10
4
20 30 40 50 60 70
m
g
Fig. 4.2
(ii) The graph point that is labelled A does not lie on the graph line. (You can assume
that the graph line is correctly drawn.) Complete the following statements about the
value of θ and of m at the point A.
1. If the value of θ were .................... °C smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
2. If the value of m were .................... g smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
(iii) In (ii) above which is the most likely reason, 1 or 2, for the point A not being on the
line? Give a reason for your choice.
1.
2.
reason:
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
clamp
nichrome wire
Fig. 5.1
In each test the length of the pendulum is 30.0 cm. The period, T, is determined by obtaining
the total time, t, of a suitable number of oscillations. The period is given by T = t /N, where N
is the number of oscillations.
(a) For each test, determine the value T and record it in the table. [1]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of T /s ( y-axis) against d /mm (x-axis ). Start the T /s axis at T /s = 0.7.
Draw a neat thin curved line through the four points.
(ii) Label each plotted point with the correct test letter A, B, C or D.
0625/6 S00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Describe how the values of T change when the values of d, the diameter of the
wire, decrease.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[7]
(d) In the laboratory you have enough time to take another set of measurements for one
other value for the diameter of the nichrome wire. Study the shape of your graph line
and then suggest an approximate value for the diameter that you think should be used.
Give a reason for your choice.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 S00
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6 S00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
Monday 20 NOVEMBER 2000 Morning 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
clamp
block of wood weight
x depression
metre rule
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe how you would determine the value of x to the nearest mm. Your answer should
include the following points.
(i) How you would locate the position of the horizontal line from which the depression
is measured.
(ii) What apparatus you would use to help you measure the depression.
(iii) What practical steps you would take to improve the accuracy of your measurement.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 Nov00
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The free end of the loaded rule is now pushed down so that the depression is greater
than x, and then the rule is released. The rule performs vertical oscillations. How would
you determine the time, T, for one oscillation?
Your answer should include the following points.
(i) What measurements you would make and how you would use these measurements
to determineT.
(ii) What equipment you would use to make the measurements.
(iii) How you would avoid making errors.
(iv) How you would try to reduce errors.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
patch of light
beaker of water
I
sheet of paper
w width of patch of light
Fig. 2.1
A large sheet of paper is placed on the bench. A straight line is drawn along the centre of the
sheet.
A beaker is placed with its centre on the straight line. The beaker of water acts as a
cylindrical lens. A small lamp is placed on the line. The lamp acts as a bright object. The light
that emerges on the other side of the lens produces a patch of light on the sheet of paper.
The broken lines mark the edge of this patch of light. The width of the patch of light
decreases and shows a sharp focus at the point I. At different points along the central line
the width, w, of the patch of light is determined. The investigation is to discover how w
depends upon x, the distance from the centre of the beaker.
Fig. 2.2 is a full size copy of the patch of light obtained in one experiment.
(a) On Fig. 2.2, at the points denoted by X1, X2, X3 and X4, take measurements of the
width, w, of the patch of light and the distance, x, from the centre of the lens. Record the
values for w and x in a table.
Determine the values of the product wx, and include these values in your table.
[5]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 Nov00
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
X4 X3
X2
X1
centre of beaker
Fig. 2.2
boiling water
plastic cup
cold water
50 g brass cooling for t seconds
HEATER
Fig. 3.1
A 50 g mass of brass is heated in boiling water for at least five minutes. The mass is then
removed from the boiling water and given a very quick shake to remove any hot water
remaining on the mass. A time t, after the brass has been removed from the boiling water,
when the temperature of the brass has cooled to θH, the 50 g mass is placed into 50 cm3 of
cold water. The initial temperature of the cold water is θC. The temperature of the cold water
rises and the maximum temperature θM is determined.
θH is then calculated using the following equation.
θH = 11θM – 10θC
90
H
°C
80
Y
X
70
60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
t /s
Fig. 3.2
0625/6 Nov00
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Why is it important to remove any water remaining on the brass as soon as it is lifted
from the boiling water?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) You do not have a partner helping you with this experiment. How would you measure
the cooling time t, using the clock shown in Fig. 3.3?
.................................................................................... re-set
.................................................................................... 55
60
5
10
start
50
....................................................................................
45 15
55 60 5
.................................................................................... 40
50
45
10
15 20
40 20
35 30 25
stop
35 25
30
....................................................................................
................................................................................[2]
Fig. 3.3
(c) Describe how you would perform the experiment in order to obtain the values that will
enable you to plot the point labelled X on the graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The point labelled Y does not lie close to the graph line and it is to be repeated.
(i) How would you ensure that the initial temperature of the cold water in the plastic
cup is the same as in the previous trial?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Measuring cylinders are not very accurate for measuring small volumes of water.
How would you obtain 50 cm3 of water with more accuracy than that obtained by
using a measuring cylinder?
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Why is it a good procedure to stir the cold water after adding the brass mass?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
fixed resistor
V=2V V
R = 1Ω
Fig. 4.1
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Why is it important that the value of the variable resistance may be changed
smoothly?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
Diagram
0625/6 Nov00
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) If the current in the nichrome wire becomes 2.0 A, then the wire becomes very hot
and has a temperature of about 300 °C. The wire is then dangerous to touch.
A safe current to use in the circuit is about 0.6 A. To obtain a current of 0.6 A, the
total resistance in the circuit should be about 3.3 Ω. The length of resistance wire
in use is then 23 cm.
What could you do to the apparatus you have been given in (b)(i) to prevent
anyone using a length of resistance wire that is less than 23 cm?
You may draw a diagram if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
magnetic N
waxed cardboard
disc floating on water
W E
A B
N
N S
S
cylindrical glass x
vessel
S
Fig. 5.1
disc A
N
B wood
S N
water S
0 5 6
1 2 3 4
scale y
x
S
Fig. 5.2
The data obtained from the experiment are given in the table.
0625/6 Nov00
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Plot a graph of y /mm (y-axis) against x /mm (x-axis). Draw a smooth curve through the
points. [5]
x / mm y / mm
x1 170 y1
x2 600 y2
x1/x2 y1/y2
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/6 Nov00
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001 1 hour
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may use a calculator.
TOTAL
pointer
spring
0 10
20
180 170 16 30
01
50 40
14
0
5 0 120
13
60
0
70
110
protractor
80 90 100 110
100 80 7
pulley
0 6 0 13
0
12
50
40
0
14 30
0 20
15 10 0
01
60 1
70 180
load
Fig. 1.1
The load is attached to the spring by a length of thread which passes over a pulley. The
protractor is fixed in position. It is assumed that the angle through which the pointer
moves when the load is increased is proportional to the extension of the spring.
A student recorded the angle θ through which the pointer moved for a range of loads, L,
as shown in the table.
L /N θ / °
0 0
1 3
2 14
3 27
4 43
5 57
Draw the best fit straight line for loads from 1 N to 5 N. [6]
0625/6/M/J/01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The student expected the graph to show a straight line through the origin. Suggest
a reason why the results were not as expected.
.................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................[1]
rigid support
rigid
support
load
(i) On Fig. 1.2, show clearly lo, the length of the unloaded spring.
(ii) On Fig. 1.3, show clearly l1, the corresponding length of the spring with a load of
1 N.
(iii) Write down the equation you would use to calculate e, the extension produced by
adding the 1 N load.
e =.........................
[2]
0625/6/M/J/01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Some students were asked to carry out a simple experiment to compare different heat
insulation materials.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
(a) One student measured the temperature of hot water in insulated beakers (all the same
size), waited for 5 minutes for the water to cool and then measured the temperatures
again. Fig. 2.1 shows how one student recorded the results.
A B
79° C start
67° C after
150cm³ 5 minutes
water
Fig. 2.1
beaker A ..........................................................
beaker B ..........................................................
beaker C ..........................................................
If you had only these results and no information about the way these results had
been obtained, which beaker would appear to be the best insulated?
.............................................................
(ii) Suggest a simple, practical way to overcome the problem of heat loss, by
evaporation and convection, from the surface of the water in the beaker.
.................................................................................................................................
(iii) Look at Fig. 2.1 again. Suggest one further improvement that you would make to
improve the reliability of the experiment.
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Another student carried out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables,
and took temperature readings every 4 minutes. Room temperature during the
experiment was 19 °C. He plotted a graph of temperature against time to show the
cooling of the water in each beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the graph obtained.
100
90
80
70
60
Temp/°C 50
A
40
B
30
C
20
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60
Time/Min
Fig. 2.2
(i) From the graph, which beaker, A, B or C, was best insulated ? .............................
(ii) The student extended graph line B with a dotted line as shown. Explain why this
does not show a realistic continuation of the cooling of the water.
.................................................................................................................................
0625/6/M/J/01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a circuit in which three resistors are connected to a d.c. power supply.
topicmagnet
power
source
R1 R2 R3
V1 V2 V3
Fig. 3.1
A 0 - 1 V voltmeter was used to measure the potential differences V1, V2 and V3.
Fig. 3.2 represents the face of the voltmeter when reading these values.
V1 V2 V3
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) Record the reading of each potential difference, shown in Fig. 3.2, in the table
below.
potential V/V
difference
V1
V2
V3
(ii) Using the values in your table, predict the voltmeter reading when a 0 - 5 V
voltmeter is connected across all three resistors together.
R1 = .................................................
R2 = .................................................
R3 = .................................................
[2]
(b) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing the same components as in Fig. 3.1
but with
• a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across all three resistors
[3]
0625/6/M/J/01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used to determine the maximum temperature rise of cold
topictensiontopicdispersion
water when a hot glass stopper is transferred to the cold water.
topicevaporation
topicresistance
string thermometer
boiling
water
at 100 °C
cold
glass water
stopper at 20 °C
heater
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.2, draw the mercury thread of the thermometer when it shows the
temperature of the cold water in the plastic cup shown in Fig. 4.1.
°C
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Fig. 4.2
[1]
(b) The glass stopper was heated for a long time in the boiling water. Suggest a reason for
this.
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Give one reason why the glass stopper should be transferred quickly from the boiling
water to the cold water.
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The maximum temperature that the cold water reached after the hot glass stopper was
transferred to the cold water was 30.5 °C.
Calculate
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) When the experiment is repeated with a larger glass stopper, the temperature rise of
the cold water was greater than with the smaller glass stopper. Why was this?
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an illuminated object, a lens and a screen set up for an experiment to
topicthermometer
topicradioactivity
topicpressure
topicconvection
investigate the size of the image produced by the lens. The lens is mounted on a rectangular
wooden block.
lens
u v
stiff card
lamp illuminated screen
object
wooden block
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2 shows the shape and height (x cm) of the object.
stiff card
thin wire
triangular hole in
the card is the illuminated
object
Fig. 5.2
(a) A student carried out the experiment, keeping the lens in the same position throughout.
He set the object at a distance u = 15.0 cm from the centre of the lens, moved the
screen until the image was sharply focused and then measured v, the distance from the
centre of the lens to the screen. Finally, he measured y, the height of the image on the
screen. He repeated the procedure using different values of u. The table below shows
the readings he obtained.
u / cm v / cm x / cm y / cm y / cm (by calculation)
y=vxx
u
Calculate the y values in this way and enter them in the table, giving the values to an
appropriate number of significant figures for comparison with the measured values. [2]
(b) Describe how you would measure as accurately as possible from the centre of the lens
to the screen. You may draw a diagram and assume that a metre rule is available and
other simple laboratory apparatus (e.g. set square and fine line marker pen).
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) In Fig. 5.3 below, draw a full-size diagram of the image formed on the screen when
u = 15.0 cm. (Use the student’s measured value, not the calculated value.)
[2]
Fig. 5.3
(d) State one precaution you would take when setting up the apparatus in order to obtain a
clear image on the screen.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
load, L
Fig. 1.1
A student investigates how the bending of the strip of wood depends on the load hung from
the loop of string. The depression d of the strip at the centre is measured for each load L.
The readings obtained are shown in the table below.
L / N d / mm
0.0 0.0
1.0 11.5
2.0 23.0
3.0 34.0
4.0 46.0
5.0 57.5
(a) (i) Plot a graph of d / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit. [6]
(ii) From the graph, determine the depression that would be produced by a load of
2.5 N. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
(b) Draw a diagram in the space below to show how you would measure the depression
produced by a load. You may assume that simple standard laboratory apparatus is
available.
[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
d.c. power
supply
Fig. 2.1
Three lamps B, C and D are available and are connected in the circuit in turn. Each time the
potential difference V across the lamp and the current I through the lamp are measured. A
0 – 0.5 A ammeter is used to measure the current. Fig. 2.2 represents the face of the
ammeter when reading the current values.
AMP AMP
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4
0 .1 0 .1
0 0.5 0 0.5
AMP
0 2 0.3
. 0.4
0 .1
0 0.5
Fig. 2.2
0625/6/O/N/01
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) In the table below, record each ammeter reading shown in Fig. 2.2.
C 2.1
D 1.9
[3]
(ii) Using the values in the table and the equation R = V / I, calculate the resistance of
each lamp.
[3]
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to measure h, the height in mm of the pile of slides.
h = .............................................................
t = ..............................................................
[2]
(iii) The surface area A of each slide is 1200 mm2. Calculate the volume V of one slide
using the equation
V = A x t.
V = .............................................................. [2]
(iv) The mass of one microscope slide is 3.7 g. Calculate the density d of the glass, in
g/mm3, using the equation
d = m /V.
Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures.
d = ............................................................. [2]
0625/6/O/N/01
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the pile of microscope slides being used in a balancing experiment. The
metre rule is to be balanced, at the 50.0 cm mark, on the pivot. The pile of slides has a
mass of 55.5 g and is placed with its centre of mass on the rule at a distance 20.0 cm
from the pivot.
On Fig. 3.2, show clearly the approximate position of a 100 g mass placed on the rule
to make it balance. (You are not expected to carry out a calculation.)
microscope slides
metre rule
pivot
Fig. 3.2
[2]
A B C
Fig. 4.1
Each can contains water at room temperature. The outer surfaces of the cans are as follows:
A – painted white
B – painted black
C – polished metal (no paint).
(a) A student carries out an experiment to investigate how the colour of the surface affects
the rate of heating of the water when the cans are placed close to a radiant heater. Her
readings are shown below.
(i) Calculate the temperature change for each can and record the values in the table
above. [1]
(ii) The student realises that the variables have not been controlled, so that it is not
possible to draw reliable conclusions about the effect of the colour of the surface
on the rate of heating.
Suggest two changes you would make to obtain a more reliable set of readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...........................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Another student carries out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables,
and takes temperature readings every 60 s. All the cans reach a steady temperature
within 25 minutes of the start of timing. She plots a graph of temperature against time to
show the heating of the water in each can. Fig. 4.2 shows the graph obtained.
30 Q
R
temperature / °C
20
10
0 5 10 15 20 25
time/min
Fig. 4.2
(i) From the graph, which can, P, Q or R, reached its final temperature most quickly?
.................... [1]
(ii) Using the graph, determine the temperature of the water at the start of the
experiment. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
P1
P2
A E B
D N C
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 5.1
0625/6/O/N/01
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, draw a line through the positions of P3 and P4 and extend the line until
it meets CD. Mark this point as F.
Show the path of the ray of light through the block by joining point E to point F. [1]
i = ........................................................... [1]
(b) Give two precautions that you would take to obtain an accurate path for the ray of light.
You should consider the positioning of the pins P3 and P4 and how they are viewed. You
may assume that simple laboratory apparatus is available, if required.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
NF = ..............................
EF = ...............................
n = .........................
[4]
0625/6/O/N/01
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6/O/N/01
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials required.
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
TOTAL
cm
30
20
eye
10
h 0
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete Fig. 1.2 to show the correct method to read the height h using the metre rule.
[2]
Fig. 1.2
(b) (i) Use your rule to measure the height marked h on Fig. 1.2.
h = ................................................
t = .................................................
[5]
0625/6/M/J/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) A student set up a circuit in order to measure the current through a lamp when different
potential differences were applied. Fig. 2.1 below shows the diagram that the student
drew. The diagram is incomplete. A voltmeter and an ammeter are required.
power source
meter
Fig. 2.1
0.2 0.3
0.1 0.4
0 0.5
A
Fig. 2.2
(i) On Fig. 2.2, draw the position of the pointer when the ammeter reading is 0.46 A.
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) When the current is 0.46 A, the voltmeter reading is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of
the lamp filament, using the equation V = IR.
resistance = ..................[3]
For each test the student added water to some sugar in a beaker, stirred the mixture briefly,
and recorded , its temperature, and t, the time taken for all the sugar to dissolve. The
readings are shown below.
20 450
25 240
31 145
36 90
39 72
46 45
50 24
(a) List three possible variables that this student should keep constant throughout the
experiment.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/6/M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Plot the graph of t/s (y-axis) against /°C (x-axis). Start both axes at zero. Draw the
best-fit curve.
[5]
(c) (i) When the temperature of the water is increased, what is the effect on the time
taken for sugar to dissolve?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
ratio = ................................
ratio = ................................
(iii) Use your answers from part (ii) to predict a possible value for the ratio
ratio = ............................[4]
sheet of
plain paper
mirror
cork mat
P
B
Fig. 4.1
The student viewed the image of the object pin P in the mirror. He placed two pins A and B
some distance apart so that the image of P and pins A and B were exactly in line, one
behind the other.
Then, without moving the object pin P, he viewed the image from a different position
and repeated the experiment with pins C and D. The student’s ray trace sheet is shown in
Fig. 4.2.
mirror
C
A
P
D
Fig. 4.2
0625/6/M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) On Fig. 4.2
.........................................................................................................................................
Justify your answer by reference to the lines you have drawn in part (a).
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
BLANK PAGE
0625/6/M/J/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 In an experiment to study the effect of increasing pressure on the volume of air, the IGCSE
class used the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
scale
air
to foot pump
Fig. 5.1
air
tube
20 cm3
30 cm3
oil
Fig. 5.2
220
p / kPa
200
180
160
140
120
100
0 10 20 30 40 50
V / cm3
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.3 shows the graph that one student plotted from the readings. She drew a best-fit
curve.
Theory suggests that the relationship between pressure and volume is given by the
equation
p x V = constant.
(b) Why is it better to find the value of the constant using the graph than from a single
measurement of p and V?
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/02
11
(c) (i) Use these two examples, taken from the graph, to show that the readings from the
experiment support the theory.
V = ………cm3
pV = …………
p = …….. kPa
pV = …………
(ii) Using your answers from (c)(i), predict the pressure required to reduce the volume to
18 cm3.
p = …………………. kPa
[4]
0625/6/M/J/02
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
TOTAL
Method 1
The student measured the combined diameters of some beads and then calculated the
volume of one bead. The end view of the apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
bead
wooden block
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the side view of the same apparatus, drawn actual size.
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.2, use your rule to measure the distance x, in cm.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate d, the average diameter in cm of one glass bead. Show your working.
d = ............................................... cm
(iii) Calculate V, the volume of one glass bead using the equation
πd 3
V = ___ .
6
V = .................................................[6]
0625/6/O/N/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
Method 2
The student used a displacement method to determine the volume of a glass bead. Fig. 1.3
and Fig. 1.4 show how this was done.
measuring measuring
cm3 100 cylinder cm3 100 cylinder
80 80
60 60
water water
40 40
20 20
225 glass beads
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
volume = .........................................
V = .........................................
[3]
(c) Suggest which of the two methods will give the more accurate result for the volume of a
glass bead. Give a reason for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
power
pack
soft-iron core
paper clip
Fig. 2.1
Two students studied how the number of paper clips that an electromagnet can hold up
depends on the potential difference across the coil.
(a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by adding a voltmeter, connected to measure the p.d. across the coil.
[2]
(b) Student A used the control on the power pack to obtain set values of p.d. and recorded
the maximum number of paper clips that the electromagnet could hold at each p.d. The
results are shown below.
Student A
0 0
2 0
4 1
6 2
8 3
10 4
12 5
0625/6/O/N/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
Student B connected a variable resistor into the circuit and used it to change the p.d.
across the coil. She recorded the minimum p.d. required to hold 1 paper clip, then 2
paper clips, etc. The results are shown below.
Student B
0 0
2.2 1
4.5 2
6.6 3
8.7 4
11.0 5
(i) Which set of results gives the more accurate indication of the strength of the
electromagnet at different potential differences? Tick the correct box.
Student A
Student B
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
[1]
(d) On the diagram below, show the position of the pointer on the voltmeter when the
voltmeter reading is 8.7 V.
5 6 7
3 4 8
2
1 9
10
V
0
[1]
a b
unknown 50 cm 5.0 N weight
weight W mark
metre rule
pivot
Fig. 3.1
The student placed the unknown weight W at a convenient distance a from the pivot. He
found b, the distance from the pivot that the 5.0 N weight must be placed so that the rule
balanced horizontally. He then repeated the experiment using different values of a.
The readings are shown in the table below.
a/m b/m
0.100 0.122
0.200 0.238
0.250 0.302
0.300 0.360
0.350 0.435
0.400 0.470
0625/6/O/N/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Plot the graph of b / m (y-axis) against a / m (x-axis).
[6]
G = ....................................
W = XG
where X = 5.0 N.
W = ....................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Another student, who was performing this experiment, found that the unloaded metre
rule balanced on the pivot at the 50.3 cm mark, instead of the 50.0 cm mark.
Suggest what the student should do to obtain the correct value for W from the
experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
4 The IGCSE class was performing a heating experiment. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1.
The aim was to determine the rate at which the temperature of 200 cm3 of water increased
when heated with an electric immersion heater.
thermometer
beaker cable to
power supply
electric
water immersion
heater
Fig. 4.1
0625/6/O/N/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
The water was heated from room temperature up to 60 °C. The teacher measured the power
of the immersion heater and calculated (correctly) the time required to raise the temperature
of 200 cm3 of water from 21 °C to 60 °C.
The students found that the water must be heated for longer than the calculated time.
(a) (i) What is the most likely cause of the longer time recorded?
an inaccurate thermometer
(ii) Suggest two precautions that could be taken to obtain more accurate results.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The power P of the immersion heater is calculated using the equation P = V I
Calculate the power of an immersion heater in which the current is 5.5 A when the p.d.
across it is 12.0 V.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
u v
Fig. 5.1
The object is a triangular hole in a screen. Fig. 5.2 shows this, actual size.
1.5 cm
2.0 cm
Fig. 5.2
The student set the distance u at 35.0 cm and moved the screen to obtain a sharply focused
image. The image distance v was 72.3 cm.
m = v /u.
m = .................................................
0625/6/O/N/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Draw a diagram of the image, actual size, for a magnification m = 2.0.
[5]
(b) The image distance v is the distance from the screen to the centre of the lens.
Explain briefly how you would position a metre rule to obtain an accurate value for v.
You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
l0
l
load W
half-metre half-metre
rule rule
Fig. 1.1
The student recorded the unstretched length l0 of the spring. Then she added loads W to the
spring, recording the new length l each time. The readings are shown in the table below.
W/N l / mm e / mm l0 = 30 mm
0 30
1 32
2 33
3 36
4 39
5 40
6 42
(a) Calculate the extension e of the spring produced by each load, using the equation
e = (l – l0).
0625/06/M/J/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Plot the graph of e / mm (y-axis) against W / N (x-axis). [4]
(c) Draw the best-fit straight line for the points you have plotted. Calculate the gradient of
the line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
gradient = ………………………………..[4]
A
normal
i D
ray
box
B C
Fig. 2.1
i = …………………………….[1]
(b) The angle of refraction as the ray entered side AB of the prism was 22°.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw in the refracted ray from point D as accurately as possible.
(ii) Mark the point E, where the ray meets side AC. Draw the normal at point E.
[4]
(c) At point E the ray came out of the prism with an angle of refraction of 75°. On Fig. 2.1,
draw as accurately as possible the ray coming out of the prism. [1]
(d) Another student used four optics pins to trace the passage of a ray through a prism.
Fig. 2.2 shows the prism, the position of the student’s eye and the directions of the ray.
incident ray
eye
Fig. 2.2
On Fig. 2.2, show positions of the four optics pins, placed to obtain as accurate a result
as possible. Mark each position clearly with a cross (X). [2]
0625/06/M/J/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 In an electrical experiment, a student set up a circuit to measure current and potential
difference. Part of the circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1.
power
source
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Complete the circuit diagram by drawing in a voltmeter connected across the lamp.
(ii) Name the component labelled Y. ………………………………………. [2]
(b) The first reading on the voltmeter was 2.2 V. On the voltmeter face shown in Fig. 3.2,
show the position of the pointer giving the reading 2.2 V.
4 5 6
3 7
2 8
1 9
0 10
V
[1]
Fig. 3.2
(c) The readings of V and I obtained by the student are given in the table below.
V/ I/ R/
2.2 0.36
4.1 0.62
6.0 0.86
7.9 0.98
9.8 1.20
(i) Calculate the resistance R of the lamp filament for each set of V and I readings
and write the values in the table. Use the equation
V
R= .
I
(ii) Complete the column headings in the table. [6]
pointer
metal rod
pin
wooden block
heat
bench
Fig. 4.1
When the rod expands, it rolls the pin which moves the pointer. So a very small expansion
moves the pointer far enough to be seen clearly.
(a) One student wanted to find out how much longer the rod became when heated above
room temperature with a Bunsen burner. The rod was 0.750 m long at room
temperature.
To find the circumference of the pin, the student wrapped a piece of string 10 times
round the pin, marked the string at the beginning and end of the 10 turns, and then
measured the length of the string between the marks. Fig. 4.2 shows the string actual
size.
Fig. 4.2
(i) Use your rule to measure the distance x between the marks on the string on
Fig. 4.2.
x = ………………………………..
(ii) Calculate the circumference c of the pin.
c = ………………………………..
[3]
0625/06/M/J/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) A second student measured the diameter d of the pin using a micrometer screw gauge.
The diameter was 1.20 mm. When the rod was heated, the pointer moved through 90°.
c = πd.
c = ………………………………..[2]
(ii) Use this value of the circumference to calculate the increase e in the length of the
rod when heated.
e = ………………………………..[1]
l = ………………………………..[1]
(c) The micrometer screw gauge is a very accurate instrument. Suggest why the string and rule
method of finding the circumference, used by the first student, was inaccurate.
.................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................[1]
thermometer
water
insulation
Fig. 5.1
The student wrapped one of the insulators around the can, poured hot water into the can,
and then took temperature and time readings as the water cooled. This was then repeated
for each insulator. The graph in Fig. 5.2 shows how the student displayed his readings.
80
temperature / °C polystyrene
60
40
cotton wool
20
cardboard
0
0 5 10 15
time / min
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) Using the information on the graph, which material appears to be the best
insulator?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/06/M/J/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) In this experiment, it is important to control the variables. Suggest three variables that
the student should keep constant for this experiment.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
3. .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/06/M/J/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
c = d.
Describe how the student could have obtained a more accurate result with the
apparatus given. You may draw on Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.2, show where you would place two small rectangular blocks of wood to
help you make an accurate measurement of the overall length of the test-tube.
Fig. 1.2
(ii) The test-tube is shown actual size in Fig. 1.2. Use your rule to measure the length l
of the test-tube.
l = ..............................................
[2]
0625/06/O/N/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Using another test-tube, the student obtained these readings.
l = 14.5 cm
c = 5.3 cm
Calculate the approximate external volume V of the test-tube using the student’s
readings and the equation
c 2l
V = –– .
4
V = .................................................... [2]
(d) The equation used in (c) assumes the test-tube to be a cylinder with flat ends. It does
not allow for the rounded end of the test-tube.
(i) Estimate the volume Vm of the ‘missing’ part of the cylinder shown shaded in
Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3
Vm = ...........................................
(ii) Using your values for V and Vm , calculate the actual external volume Va of the
test-tube.
Va = ...........................................
[2]
mirror
M M'
B C E
D F
A
Fig. 2.1
The student looks into the mirror MM' and views the images of pins A and B. He then places
pins C and D so that pins C and D and the images of pins A and B appear to be in line.
i = ...............................................
[3]
0625/06/O/N/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The student moves pin B and then repeats the experiment, obtaining the reflected ray
EF.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, continue the lines CD and EF behind the mirror to find the point
where they meet. Label this point X.
(ii) Draw the line AX. Label with the letter Y the point where line AX crosses the
mirror MM'.
(iii) Use your rule to measure the distances AY and YX.
AY = ...........................................
YX = ...........................................
[2]
(c) According to theory, AY = YX. Suggest why, in spite of very careful work, the student’s
values may have been slightly different.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 A 1.0
Fig. 3.1
(b) The ammeter was used in the circuit shown in Fig. 3.2 to investigate the current in a
lamp.
Fig. 3.2
...................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The table shows the current I in the lamp for different values of the p.d. V across
the lamp.
V/ I/ R/
1.9 0.31
1.5 0.26
0.8 0.20
1. Calculate the values for the resistance R of the lamp, using the equation
V
R= – .
I
Write your answers in the table.
2. Complete the column headings in the table.
(iii) Suggest how the value of V could be varied.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[8]
(c) Fig. 3.3 shows a power source connected to three resistors labelled X, Y and Z.
power
source
Fig. 3.3
truck
Fig. 4.1
F/N a / (m / s2 )
0.5 0.35
1.0 0.72
1.5 1.02
2.0 1.44
2.5 1.74
(a) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against a / (m / s2 ) (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit through
your points. [6]
0625/06/O/N/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Theory suggests that the relationship between force and acceleration is given by the
equation
F = ma,
From the graph, determine the mass m of the truck. Show clearly how you obtained
the necessary information.
m = .................................................... [4]
The student’s apparatus at the beginning of each test is as shown in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
Each beaker is surrounded by a different insulating material. The water is allowed to cool
and the temperatures are recorded at different times. The student is unable to write a
correct conclusion because the variables have not been controlled.
(a) Study Fig. 5.1 and then state two ways in which you would improve the control of
variables.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the reading shown on the thermometer shown in Fig. 5.2.
°C
110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0
Fig. 5.2
0625/06/O/N/03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The graph of Fig. 5.3 shows the results obtained by the student.
90
80
70
temperature / °C
60
50
40 A
30 B
C
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
time / s
Fig. 5.3
........................................................... [1]
0625/06/O/N/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
power source
A
V
electrode
copper sulphate
solution
Fig. 1.1
During the experimental work, the students measure the volume of water, the mass of
copper sulphate that is dissolved in the water, the current in the solution, the potential
difference across the electrodes and the gap between the electrodes.
1
0.5 1.0
0.5 1.5
A V
0 1.5 0 2
copper
plastic sulphate empty plastic
dish dish
6.58 g 3.26 g
Fig. 1.4
cm3
200
180
160
140
water 120
100
80
60
40
20
Fig. 1.5
electrode
0 cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 1.6
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest a variable, which is not measured in Figs. 1.2 – 1.6, that might affect the value
of the current.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2004 0625/06/M/J/04 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A student is investigating the oscillation of a metre rule that has one end resting on the
laboratory bench. The other end is held above the level of the bench by a spring attached
at the 90.0 cm mark. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.1.
clamp
spring
metre rule
d
bench
Fig. 2.1
The period of oscillation is changed by moving a 200 g mass to different positions along the
rule. The student records the time t taken for 10 oscillations of the end of the rule for each
position of the mass. He measures the distance d from the end of the rule to the mark
under the centre of the mass. The readings are shown in the table.
d / cm t/s T/s
20.0 3.4
40.0 4.4
50.0 4.9
60.0 5.3
70.0 6.0
80.0 6.3
(a) Calculate the period T for each set of readings and enter the values in the table. [2]
0 20 40 60 80
(c) Using the graph, determine the period T when the distance d is 55.0 cm.
T = ............................................................ [2]
(d) The student suggests that T should be proportional to d. State with a reason whether
your results support this suggestion.
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
power
source
Fig. 3.1
The voltmeter and the ammeter have not been drawn in.
(a) Complete Fig. 3.1 by drawing in the voltmeter and the ammeter, using conventional
symbols. [2]
current I = 0.54 A
R = ........................................................... [2]
illuminated
object
lens screen
lamp
card
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance x from the illuminated object to
the centre of the lens.
x = ..................................................................
(ii) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance y from the centre of the lens to
the screen.
y = ..................................................................
(iii) Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus drawn to 1/5th of actual size. Calculate the actual
distance u between the object and the lens, and the actual distance v between the
lens and the screen.
u = ..................................................................
v = ..................................................................
v
(iv) Calculate the magnification m using the equation m = – .
u
m = .................................................................
[5]
Fig. 4.2
[1]
(c) State two precautions that the IGCSE class should take to obtain experimental readings
that are as accurate as possible.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
Fig. 5.1
(b) The student then transfers a small metal cylinder from beaker A of boiling water to the
beaker B of water at room temperature, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
string
metal water at
boiling cylinder room
water temperature
beaker A beaker B
Fig. 5.2
The student assumes that the metal is at a temperature of 100 °C when it enters the
water in beaker B.
Why is it important to transfer the metal between the beakers as quickly as possible?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
thermometer
string
beaker
hot water
Fig. 1.1
During the experiment, a student measures the temperature of the water, its volume, the
length of string wrapped round a beaker and the depth of water in the beaker.
(a) Write down the readings shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3. Include appropriate units.
Fig. 1.2
temperature = ............................
cm3
100
80
60
40
20
Fig. 1.3
mark
string
mark beaker
Fig. 1.4
string
cm 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
metre rule
Fig. 1.5
(i) Write down the length of the string between the marks.
length = ................................ cm
(ii) Calculate the circumference c of the beaker.
c = ........................................ cm
(iii) Suggest one source of error in this method of determining the circumference.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) Suggest one improvement to this method.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
beaker 3
2
water
1
cm
Fig. 1.6
d = ........................................ cm
(ii) Calculate the surface area A of the curved surface of the beaker up to the water
level using the equation A = dc.
A = ..................................
[2]
(d) State the other measurements that need to be taken to determine the rate of cooling of
the water.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
40
V / cm3
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
m/g
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Determine the gradient G of the line. Show clearly how you obtain the necessary
information.
G = ...................................
1.
(ii) Determine the density of the plasticine using the equation = —
G
= ....................................
[5]
(b) The student could calculate the density from one set of readings. Suggest why she
takes more than one set of readings and plots a graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
clamp
string
x
pendulum bob
Fig. 3.1
The student records the time t taken for 20 complete oscillations for a range of different
lengths x of the string. The readings are shown in the table.
x / cm l / cm t/s T/s
90.0 38.5
80.0 36.0
70.0 33.4
60.0 31.4
50.0 28.2
40.0 25.5
The length l of the pendulum is given by the equation l = x + r, where r is the radius of the
pendulum bob.
pendulum
bob
string
bench
Fig. 3.2
d = ....................................
(ii) Calculate the radius r of the pendulum bob.
r = .....................................
[2]
(b) (i) Complete the column for the length l / cm in the table using the equation l = x + r.
(ii) The period T is the time taken for one complete oscillation. Complete the column
for the period T / s in the table.
[3]
(c) Plot the graph of T / s (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). Start the T / s axis at T = 1.0 s.
[5]
(d) Using the graph, find the length la of the pendulum that would have a period of 1.50 s.
la = ............................ cm [1]
incident
ray
A
transparent
block
emergent
ray
eye
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the four pins, two on the incident ray and two
on the emergent ray. [1]
r = .....................................
(iii) Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the incident ray and the
normal.
i = .....................................
[4]
power
source
l
A B
bare
V resistance
wire
Fig. 5.1
The students record the current I in the circuit and then record the p.d. V across different
lengths l of the bare resistance wire. The length of wire from A to B is 100.0 cm. The
readings obtained by one student are shown in the table.
I = 0.84 A
V/ l/ R/
0.39 20.0
0.82 40.0
1.22 60.0
1.58 80.0
1.89 100.0
(a) (i) Calculate the resistance of each length l of wire using the equation R = V
—. Write
the resistance values in the table.
I
power
source
A B
bare
V resistance
wire
Fig. 5.2
wire 1, R = ..........................................
A wire with half the diameter has one quarter the resistance.
A wire with half the diameter has four times the resistance.
[1]
(c) What instrument would you use to measure the diameter of the wires as accurately as
possible?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Copyright Acknowledgements
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
The students are provided with 100 cm3 of hot water and a supply of cold water at room
temperature.
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 1.1 shows the temperature of the cold water.
Fig. 1.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A student records the temperature of the hot water. He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold
water into the beaker containing the hot water. He records the temperature of the
mixture of hot and cold water and the volume V of cold water added. He then repeats
the process four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water. The table
shows the readings.
V/ /
0 80.0
20 58.0
40 48.0
60 40.5
80 34.0
100 29.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
V / cm3
[5]
The theoretical line shows the results expected by the student after calculating the
values of . The student assumed that all the heat lost by the hot water was gained by
the cold water when the cold water was poured into the beaker.
80
/C
70
60
theoretical line
50
experimental line
40
30
0 20 40 60 80 100
V / cm3
Fig. 1.2
The student carried out the experiment with care. Suggest a practical reason why the
experimental line differs from the theoretical line.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
statement .........................................................................................................................
power
source
A B C D
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
V crocodile
clip metre rule
Fig. 3.1
The student measures the current I in the wire. She then measures the p.d. V across AB,
AC and AD.
AB 0.375 0.95
AC 0.375 1.50
AD 0.375 1.95
(a) Using Fig. 3.1, record in the table the length l of each section of wire. [1]
0.2 0.3
0.1 A 0.4
0 0.5
2 3
1 V 4
0 5
Fig. 3.2
[2]
(c) Calculate the resistance R of the sections of wire AB, AC and AD using the equation
V
R = –– .
I
Record these values of R, to a suitable number of significant figures, in the table. [2]
(d) Complete the column heading for the R column of the table. [1]
(e) Use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. Show
your working.
clamp
spring
mass
spring
clamp
Fig. 4.1
A 400 g mass m is attached between two springs, displaced a small distance downwards,
and then released so that it oscillates. The time t taken for 10 complete oscillations of the
mass is recorded. The experiment is repeated using values for m of 300 g and 200 g. The
readings are shown in the table below.
T s
m/g t/s T/s ––
m / ––
g
400 9.0
300 7.8
200 6.3
(a) Calculate the period T of the oscillations. T is the time for one complete oscillation.
Enter the values in the table. [2]
T
(b) Calculate and enter in the table the values of — . [2]
m
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) In this experiment, the mass oscillates rapidly so that it is difficult to take the times
accurately. A technique has been included in this experiment to obtain an accurate
value for the period T. State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved
to obtain the T value.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Another student carried out the same experiment using a wider range of masses.
Suggest why, when the mass was 900 g, it could not oscillate freely.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
He places the transparent block on a sheet of plain paper, largest face down, and draws a
line round the block. He draws a line to represent an incident ray and places two pins W
and X in the line. Fig. 5.1 shows the outline of the block and the incident ray.
X
A B
D C
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw a normal to line AB at the point where the incident ray meets the
block. The incident ray is drawn on the diagram. The positions of the two pins W and X
that mark the incident ray are shown. [1]
i = ........................................................ [1]
(c) Draw in the refracted ray with an angle of refraction of 20°. Continue this line until it
meets the line CD. [2]
(d) The ray emerges from the block in a direction that is parallel to the incident ray. Draw in
this emergent ray. [2]
(e) Two pins Y and Z are placed so that the pins W and X, viewed through the block, and
the pins Y and Z all appear exactly in line with each other. Mark on the diagram, with
the letters Y and Z, where you would place these two pins. [2]
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/05
12
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/05
Centre Number Candidate Number Name
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or 3
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. 4
clamp
metre rule
spring
bench
Fig. 1.1
The rule has the zero end taped to the bench so that it does not slip. The rule is attached to
a spring at the 40.0 cm mark. The students hang masses, starting with a 10 g mass, on the
rule at the 90.0 cm mark. For each mass, they measure the angle between the rule and
the bench.
m/ /
0 29
10 28
20 26
30 25
40 22
50 19
(b) A student suggests that should be directly proportional to m. State, with a reason,
whether the readings in the table support this suggestion.
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
80 90 100 1
70 10
12
60 0
13
50 0
14
40
0
15
30
0 1
20
60 1
10
180 190 20 70
350 0
40
0
03
210
33
22
0
32
0
0 23
31 02
40
250 300
260 270 280 290
Fig. 1.2
Explain how the student could use this protractor to measure the angle between the
metre rule and the bench. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The range of angles measured in this experiment may be quite small. Using the same
apparatus and with the masses and spring in the same positions, suggest another
method of investigating as reliably as possible the extent by which the rule is pulled
down by the masses. This method must not use a protractor but an additional rule may
be used. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 0625/06/O/N/05 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 An IGCSE student investigates the resistance of resistance wire ABCD in three different
circuit arrangements.
power
source
circuit (i)
A B
C D
power
source
circuit (ii) A B
C D
power
source
circuit (iii)
Fig. 2.1
On Fig. 2.1, complete the circuit diagram for circuit (iii) using the standard symbol for a
resistor to represent each section AB, BC and CD of the resistance wire. [3]
(b) The student measures and records the current I and the p.d. V in each circuit. The
student’s readings are shown in the table.
circuit I/ V/ R/
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance R for each circuit using the equation
V
R = –– .
I
Record in the table the values of R to an appropriate number of significant figures.
[2]
(c) Look at the resistance values for circuits (i) and (ii). The sections of resistance wire
AB, BC and CD are all of the same length. Suggest a value for the resistance of the
whole wire ABCD. Explain briefly how you obtained your value.
value ................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
thermometer thermometer
insulation
water water
bench
beaker A beaker B
Fig. 3.1
The students each have two glass beakers A and B. Beaker B is insulated. They also have
a supply of hot water.
A student pours hot water into beaker A until it is approximately two thirds full and then
measures the temperature of the hot water. He records this temperature in the table at
time t = 0 s. He then starts a stopwatch and records the temperature of the water at 30 s
intervals for a total of four minutes.
He repeats the experiment using beaker B. All the readings are shown in the tables below.
beaker A beaker B
t/ / t/ /
0 80 0 80
30 67 30 69
60 59 60 62
90 54 90 57
120 51 120 53
150 48 150 50
180 47 180 48
210 46 210 47
240 45 240 46
(b) Use the readings for beaker A to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against
time t (x-axis). Start the temperature scale at 40 °C. Draw the best-fit curve. [4]
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
t/s
(c) Use the readings for beaker B to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you
used in part (b). [2]
(d) The experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of insulation
on the rate of cooling. Suggest two improvements that could be made to the design of
the experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
M M'
A B
card
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, the line MM' shows the position of the mirror that is standing on a sheet of
paper. The reflecting surface of the mirror is vertical. AB is a card that is standing vertically
and is parallel to the reflecting surface of the mirror.
(a) Draw a normal to the mirror such that the edge B of the card lies on the normal. [1]
(b) Measure the distance x along the normal between the line MM' and the edge B of the
card.
x = ......................................................... [1]
(c) Draw a line from the edge A of the card to the point where the normal meets the line
MM'. This represents an incident ray from the edge of the card. [1]
(d) Measure the angle i between the incident ray and the normal.
i = .......................................................... [1]
(f) The angle of reflection is to be determined as accurately as possible. On Fig. 4.1, mark
with the letters X, Y and Z the points where the student would place three pins in order
to plot the reflected ray. [4]
(b) In an experiment to find the resistance of a wire, the students record the current in the
wire and the potential difference across it. They then calculate the resistance.
Underline any of the following variables that are likely to have a significant effect on the
current and/or potential difference readings. (You may underline one, two or all three of
the suggested variables.)
atmospheric pressure
temperature of the wire
length of wire [2]
(c) In an experiment, a short pendulum oscillates rapidly. A student is asked to find the
period of oscillation T of the pendulum using a stopwatch. The student sets the
pendulum swinging and records the time for one oscillation. A technique for improving
the accuracy of the value obtained for the period T should be used in this experiment.
State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the value
of T.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/05
12
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Total
Each student has a stack of ten pieces of card, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the height h of the stack of card.
h = ................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the average thickness t of one piece of card.
t = .................................................... [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l and width w of the top piece of card.
l = ..........................................................
w = ................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the volume V of one piece of card using the equation
V = ltw .
V = ................................................... [2]
m
d = ––
V
d = ................................................... [2]
(d) A sample of corrugated card of the same length and width as the card in Fig. 1.1
consists of two thin sheets of card with an air gap in between. The sheets of card are
separated by paper, as shown in the cross-section in Fig. 1.2. The thickness y of the air
gap as shown in Fig. 1.2 is between 2 mm and 3 mm.
card
paper y
card
Fig. 1.2
Estimate the volume Va of air trapped within the corrugated card shown in Fig. 1.2.
Va = ................................................. [1]
power variable
source resistor
lamp
0-2 V voltmeter
0-1 A ammeter
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
I/ V/ R/
0.24 1.39
0.45 1.30
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance R in each case using the equation
V
R = –– .
I
Enter the results in the table. [2]
P1
N
P2
A F B
D C
G
P3
N
P4
sheet of
plain paper
eye
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD.
Label this point H.
(ii) Measure the distance a between G and H.
a = ................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the line HF.
(iv) Measure the length b of the line HF.
b = ................................................... [1]
(v) Extend the straight line EF within the outline of the block to a point I. The
distance FI must be exactly equal to b.
(vi) From I draw a line that meets NN at a right angle. Label this position J.
(vii) Measure the length c of the line JI.
c = .................................................... [3]
(viii) Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
c
n = –– .
a
n = ................................................... [2]
(b) Suggest two improvements you would make to this experiment to ensure an accurate
result for the refractive index n.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
fixed voltage
power source
A
V
beaker A
beaker B
Bunsen burner
Fig. 4.1
Fig. 4.2
(b) The electrical heater and the Bunsen burner both have the same power and both
beakers were heated from room temperature for the same length of time. Suggest why
there is a difference in temperature rise between beaker A and beaker B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In order to keep the heating effect of the electrical heater constant throughout the
heating period, the student adjusts the current. Name the component in the circuit that
the student uses for this purpose.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
N
newton
meter
metre
pivot rule
bench
Fig. 5.1
A metre rule is supported at one end by a pivot through the 1.0 cm mark. The other end is
supported at the 91.0 cm mark by a newton meter hanging from a clamp.
(a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule is horizontal. You may draw a
diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
1 1
F/N d/m ––
d / ––
m
0.74 0.900
0.78 0.850
0.81 0.800
0.86 0.750
0.92 0.700
1
Calculate and record in the table the values of –– . [1]
d
1 1
(c) (i) On the graph grid below, plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against ––
Start the y-axis at 0.7 and the x-axis at 1.0. d / –– (x-axis).
m [2]
G = ................................................... [3]
(d) Calculate the weight of the metre rule using the equation
G
W = ––
k
where k = 0.490 m.
W = .................................................. [2]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
The students are provided with a bundle of wooden rods, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
l = ............................................... cm [1]
(b) A student winds five turns of string round the bundle and marks the beginning and the
end of the five turns. She then uses the metre rule to measure the distance x between
the marks. She records that x = 24.5 cm.
(i) Determine the circumference c of the bundle of rods.
c = ..........................................................
(ii) Calculate the volume V of the bundle of rods using the equation
2
V = c––l .
4
V = ................................................... [4]
Vr = ........................................................
(ii) Calculate the density d of the wood using the equation
m
d = ––
Vr
d = ................................................... [3]
pivot
metre
rule
d
load
Fig. 2.1
The load is attached to the metre rule so that its centre is 90.0 cm from the pivot. The rule is
displaced a small distance to one side and allowed to swing. The time t taken for
10 complete swings is recorded. This is repeated using different values of the distance d.
The readings are shown in the table.
d/ t/ T/
90.0 18.35
85.0 17.87
80.0 17.53
75.0 17.06
70.0 16.72
(b) Calculate the period T for each value of d. The period is the time taken for one
complete swing. Enter the values in the table. [2]
(c) On the grid below, plot a graph of T / s (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). Start the x-axis
at d = 70.0 cm and the y-axis at a suitable value of T / s to make best use of the graph
grid. [5]
(d) A student suggests that T is proportional to d. State whether or not the results support
this suggestion and give a reason for your answer.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for
one swing (the period), rather than just measuring the time for one swing.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
paper
G
E F
mirror
J K
eye
Fig. 3.1
i = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The student pushes two pins into the paper on line GJ, one at point A, and the other at
a point B nearer to the mirror. He views the images of the pins from the direction
indicated in Fig. 3.1. He then pushes in two pins on line GK between his eye and the
mirror so that these two pins and the images of the pins on line GJ appear exactly one
behind the other.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, mark suitable positions for the pins on lines GJ and GK. Label the
marks with letters B, C and D.
(ii) To obtain an accurate result for this experiment, would you view the tops, bases or
central parts of the pins when lining them up? Give a reason for your answer.
reason ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(a) The students start by measuring room temperature. Record the value of room
temperature as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 4.1.
Fig. 4.1
(b) The students are provided with hot water in beakers as shown in Fig. 4.2. Beaker A is
insulated and beaker B has a lid.
thermometer thermometer
lid
insulation
water water
Beaker A Beaker B
Fig. 4.2
The students measure and record the temperature θ of the water in each beaker every
30 s for a total of five minutes. One student’s readings are shown in the tables.
time / s θ / °C time / s θ / °C
0 83.0 0 82.0
30 82.0 30 82.0
60 81.0 60 81.0
90 79.5 90 80.0
(i) Look at the temperature readings in the tables. State whether the insulation round
beaker A or the lid on beaker B or neither is most effective in keeping the water
hot. By reference to readings in the tables, justify your answer.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable material for the insulation around beaker A.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) To obtain reliable results in this experiment, it is important that variables are
controlled. State three variables that should be controlled in this experiment.
variable 1 ..................................................................................................................
variable 2 ..................................................................................................................
lamp
resistor
ammeter
voltmeter
Fig. 5.1
(a) Draw the circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 5.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
(b) The student is using a lamp to show when the current is switched on.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student removes the lamp from the circuit. He is told that the resistance of a
conductor is constant if the temperature of the conductor is constant. He knows that
the current in the resistor has a heating effect. Suggest two ways in which the student
could minimise the heating effect of the current in the resistor.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(e) Fig. 5.2 shows a variable resistor with the sliding contact in two different positions.
Fig. 5.2
State which position, A or B, shows the higher resistance setting. Explain your answer.
statement ............................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4019966178*
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2007
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
(a) A student pours 50 cm3 of water into a beaker. He then measures the temperature 1
of the water in the beaker. Write down the value of 1 shown on the thermometer in
Fig. 1.1.
°C
–10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 1.1
1 = ................................................. [2]
(b) The student then measures the temperature 2 of some hot water. He pours 50 cm3
of this hot water into the beaker of water at room temperature. He then records the
temperature 3 of the water in the beaker. His readings are
2 = 76 °C,
3 = 42 °C.
Calculate
thermal energy lost by hot water = thermal energy gained by cold water
predicts a higher value for the temperature 3 than the value that is obtained by this
experiment. Suggest
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) two practical improvements that you could make to the procedure for this experiment
to obtain a result that is closer to the theoretical result.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
metre rule
stand pivot
pointer
card
h0
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
mass
0
Fig. 2.1
hole d / mm h / mm b / mm
1 140
2 135
3 132
4 128
5 124
6 120
[3]
(c) On Fig. 2.1 measure the height h0 of the pointer above the bench.
h0 = .....................................................
[1]
(d) A student hangs a 10 g mass from the hole 1 in the card. She records the height h of
the end of the pointer above the bench. She then repeats this procedure by hanging the
mass from each hole in turn. Her results are shown in the table above.
b = (h – h0)
45
b / mm
40
35
30
25
20
[4]
(g) The student suggests that b is directly proportional to d. By reference to your graph,
state whether or not the results support the student’s suggestion. Give a reason for your
answer.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Reason ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(h) It is important when recording the heights that the rule is vertical. State briefly how you
would check that the rule is vertical.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
power
source
A B
C D
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student uses the switches to connect the wire AB into the circuit and records the p.d.
V across the wire between A and B. He also records the current I in the wire.
The student then repeats the measurements using the wire CD in place of wire AB.
wire V/ I/ R/
AB 1.9 0.24
CD 1.9 0.96
[3]
R = V / I.
(i) Look at the results in the table. Below are four possible relationships between R
and the diameter d of the wire. Tick the relationship that best matches the results.
R is proportional to d
1
R is proportional to
d
R is proportional to d 2
1
R is proportional to
d2
(ii) Explain briefly how the results support your answer in part (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Following this experiment, the student wishes to investigate whether two lamps in parallel
with each other have a smaller combined resistance than the two lamps in series. Draw
one circuit diagram showing
(i) two lamps in parallel with each other connected to a power source,
(iii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference across the two lamps.
[3]
[Total: 8]
illuminated screen
object
lens
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object. She
adjusts the position of the lens until a clearly focused magnified image is formed on the
screen. She measures the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.
Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, she moves the lens towards the
screen until a second clearly focused (but diminished) image is formed on the screen.
She measures the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen. She repeats
the experiment with the distance d increased to 0.900 m. The readings are shown in the
table.
(i) For each set of readings calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation
xy
f= .
d
(b) Suggest two precautions that can be taken in this experiment in order to obtain an
accurate result.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
Fig. 4.2
In the space below, sketch the appearance of one of the images on the screen.
[1]
[Total: 7]
clamp
l0
set of ten
0.1 N weights
Fig. 5.1
Consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column
headings, with units, in the table below.
l 0 = 25 mm
0.0 25 0
0.1 30 5
0.2 36 11
0.3 43 18
0.4 50 25
[4]
(b) The student decides to repeat the experiment using a spring made of a different metal
in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the spring
is made. To make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. Suggest
three variables that the student should keep constant.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ................................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/07
12
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6786650342*
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2007
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
(a) A student measures room temperature. Write down the value of room temperature θ0
shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.1.
°C
–10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 1.1
θ0 = ................................................. [1]
(b) He then pours hot water into a beaker until it is about two-thirds full. He measures and
records the temperature θ of the hot water and at the same time starts a stopwatch.
As the water cools, he records the temperature every 30 s for a total of five minutes. His
readings are shown in the table below.
t/ θ/
0 68.0
30 53.0
60 45.0
90 40.0
120 36.5
150 33.5
180 32.0
210 30.0
240 29.0
270 28.5
300 28.0
(ii) Calculate the temperature fall T1 in the first minute of the experiment.
T1 = ....................................................
(iii) Calculate the temperature fall T2 in the final minute of the experiment.
T2 = ....................................................
[3]
(i) State and explain whether your answers in (b) support this theory.
Statement .................................................................................................................
Explanation ..............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Suggest three variables that you would attempt to keep constant if this theory were
to be investigated further.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Suggest one addition you could make to the apparatus provided in order to reduce the
rate of evaporation of the water in the beaker.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
metre rule
stand pivot
pointer 150 mm
hook 140 mm
130 mm
paper 120 mm
clip 110 mm
100 mm
card
90 mm
80 mm
70 mm
60 mm
50 mm
40 mm
30 mm
20 mm
10 mm
0 mm
Fig. 2.1
(a) A student records the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. She then hangs a paper
clip on the hook and records the new height h of the pointer above the bench. Next she
records the heights of the pointer above the bench using different numbers N of paper
clips. The readings are shown in the table below.
h0 = 100 mm
N h / mm d / mm
1 108
2 114
3 120
4 125
5 134
6 141
d = (h – h0)
(ii) Use your graph to predict the value of d if a nail with the same mass as 4.6 paper
clips were to be hung from the hook in place of the paper clips. Show clearly on the
graph how you obtained your value.
d = ................................................. [6]
[Total: 8]
power
source
lamp 1
lamp 2
lamp 3
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student uses the ammeter to record the current I in the wire connecting the power
source to the rest of the circuit. He then moves the ammeter to new positions in the
circuit and measures the current in each lamp in turn. The positions of the pointer on the
ammeter scale are shown below.
(i) (ii)
(iii) (iv)
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Reason ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) To test the theory further, you would need to vary the value of I. State how you would
vary I.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student uses a voltmeter to measure the potential difference V across the lamps.
(i) Calculate the resistance R of the lamps arranged in parallel, using the equation
R = V / I,
R = .....................................................
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, add the symbol for the voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the lamps. [3]
[Total: 8]
eye
transparent
block
h
optics pin
sheet of x
paper
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student looks down through the transparent block at the image of a line drawn on the
sheet of paper. She carefully places the point of the optics pin exactly in line with the
image.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, measure the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin.
x = .....................................................
h = .....................................................
(iii) Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
h
n = ––––– .
h –x
n = ................................................ [5]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
cm3 cm3
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40 rock sample
20 20
V1 V2
Fig. 5.1
V1 = .....................................................
V2 = .....................................................
V = .....................................................
density = .....................................................
[4]
B 193 84 50 34
C 130 93 50 43
[4]
(c) Explain briefly how you would determine the density of sand grains.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4130189347*
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2008
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) T40877/4
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
1 An IGCSE student is determining the density of a solid metal cylinder using a balancing For
method. Fig. 1.1. shows the apparatus. Examiner’s
Use
metre
rule cylinder
a b
bench
pivot
Fig. 1.1
He places the cylinder on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark.
The rule is placed on the pivot so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
He measures and records the distance a from the centre of the rule to the pivot and the
distance b from the centre of the cylinder to the pivot. He repeats the experiment with the
same cylinder at different positions on the rule.
Table 1.1
a/ b/ M/
12.6 27.4
11.0 24.0
9.5 20.5
(ii) For each set of readings, calculate the mass M of the cylinder using the equation
ka
M= .
b
The value of k is the mass of the rule which is 108 g.
(b) The cylinder completely covers the marks on the metre rule. Describe, with the aid of For
a diagram, how you would judge that the centre of the cylinder is directly above the Examiner’s
10.0 cm mark. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Use your answers in Table 1.1 to calculate and record the average of the three values
for M. Show your working.
(d) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder placed flat on the bench and viewed from one side. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 1.2
(i) On the diagram, measure the diameter d and the thickness t of the cylinder.
d = ......................................................
t = ......................................................
V = πd t .
2
V = ......................................................
ρ = M.
V
ρ = .................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
BLANK PAGE
2 The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of resistors in different circuit For
arrangements. The first circuit is shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
power
source
V A
A B
Circuit 1
Fig. 2.1
(a) The current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the three resistors are measured and
recorded. Three more circuit arrangements are used. For each arrangement, a student
disconnects the resistors and then reconnects them between points A and B as shown
in Figs. 2.2–2.4.
A B
Circuit 2
Fig. 2.2
A B
A B
Circuit 3 Circuit 4
The voltage and current readings are shown in the Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Circuit V/ I/ R/
1 1.87 1.68
2 1.84 0.84
3 1.87 0.37
4 1.91 0.20
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the V, I and R columns of Table 2.1.
(ii) For each circuit, calculate the combined resistance R of the three resistors using For
the equation Examiner’s
Use
R = V.
I
(b) Theory suggests that, if all three resistors have the same resistance under all conditions,
the combined resistance in circuit 1 will be one half of the combined resistance in
circuit 2.
(i) State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this
theory. Justify your answer by reference to the results.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one precaution you could take to ensure that the readings are as accurate
as possible.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
3 A student is investigating the effect of surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling For
of hot water. Examiner’s
Use
thermometer
thermometer
100 cm3
beaker water
A B
Fig. 3.1
The student is provided with two containers. The beaker is labelled A and the measuring
cylinder is labelled B. Each container contains 100 cm3 of hot water. He records the
temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. Table 3.1 shows the
readings of time t and temperature θ.
Table 3.1
container A container B
(beaker) (measuring cylinder)
t /s θ / °C θ / °C
0 85 85
30 76 79
60 68 74
90 63 69
120 59 66
150 56 63
180 54 61
210 52 59
240 51 58
(a) (i) Use the data in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t /s (x-axis) for the For
beaker. Draw the best-fit curve. Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Use the data for the measuring cylinder to plot another curve on the same graph
axes that you used for part (a)(i).
(b) The experiment is designed to investigate the effect of the surface area exposed to the
air on the rate of cooling. State briefly the effect of a larger surface area on the rate of
cooling. Justify your answer by reference to your graph.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
4 A student is determining a quantity called the refractive index of the material of a transparent For
block. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1 shows the ray-tracing sheet that the student is producing. ABCD is the outline of the
transparent block, drawn on the ray-tracing sheet.
A B
D C
P3
P4
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Draw the normal NN' to side AB, extended to cross side DC, so that the normal is
2.0 cm from A. Label the point F where NN' crosses AB. Label the point G where
NN' crosses DC.
(ii) Draw the line EF at an angle of 30° to the normal and to the left of the normal NN'.
E is a point outside the block and above AB on the ray-tracing sheet.
[3]
(b) Read the following passage, taken from the student’s notebook and then answer the For
questions that follow. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD.
Label this point H.
a = ......................................................
b = .................................................. [3]
(c) Extend the straight line EF through the outline of the block to a point J. The point J must
be at least 5 cm from the block. The line EJ crosses the line CD. Label this point K.
c = ......................................................
d = ......................................................
(iii) Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
cb
n= .
ad
n = .................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
5 An IGCSE student has carried out a timing experiment using a simple pendulum. She plotted For
a graph of T 2/s2 against l /m. T is the time for one swing of the pendulum and l is the length Examiner’s
of the pendulum. The graph is shown below. Use
T 2 / s2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.1
l /m
(a) (i) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained
the necessary information.
G = ......................................................
g = ...............................................m/s2
(iii) The student could have calculated the acceleration of free fall g from just one set of
readings. State the purpose of taking sufficient readings to plot a graph.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2008 0625/06/M/J/08
13
(b) The student next studies the relationship between the mass m of the pendulum and the For
time for one swing T. The readings are shown in Table 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
Table 5.1
m /g T /s
50 1.58
100 1.60
150 1.61
200 1.57
250 1.59
(i) Suggest two variables that must be kept constant to make the experiment a fair
test.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii) Study the readings in the table and complete the following sentence.
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the readings show that the mass m of
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2092097264*
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2008
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) T73783/6 R
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
2
1 An IGCSE student is determining the density of the metal from which a load is made. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1. Use
metre rule
spring
S0
beaker
water
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student records the scale reading S0 on the metre rule at the bottom of the spring,
as shown in Fig. 1.1.
S0 = 37.4 cm
Describe briefly how the student can avoid a parallax error when taking the scale
reading.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) He then hangs the load on the spring as shown in Fig. 1. 2. He records the new scale For
reading S1. Examiner’s
Use
0 metre rule
spring
S1
load
bench
Fig. 1.2
S1 = 40.5 cm
e1 = (S1 – S0).
e1 = ......................................................
The student carefully raises the beaker under the load until it is completely under water.
The load does not touch the sides or base of the beaker. He records the new scale
reading S2.
S2 = 39.8 cm
(ii) Calculate the extension e2 of the spring using the equation e2 = (S2 – S0).
e2 = ......................................................
[2]
(c) Calculate the density ρ of the material of the load using the equation For
Examiner’s
e1 Use
ρ= ×k
(e1 – e2)
where k = 1.00 g/cm3.
ρ = ................................................... [3]
(d) A second load, made from the same material and with the same mass, is too long to be
completely submerged in the water.
Suggest whether
(i) the value obtained for e2 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in
part (b) (ii),
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the value obtained for ρ would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in
part (c).
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
2 The IGCSE class is investigating the potential difference across, and the current in, wires. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
power source
A S B
C D
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the apparatus. Use standard circuit symbols.
(The circuit includes two identical resistance wires AB and CD. Use the standard symbol
for a resistance to represent each of these wires.)
This circuit is called circuit 1.
[3]
For circuit 1, the student places the contact S on the resistance wire AB at a distance of For
0.500 m from A. He measures the p.d. V across the wire between A and S and the current I Examiner’s
in the circuit. Use
The student then records the measurements for circuits 2 and 3, shown in Fig. 2.2 and
Fig. 2.3.
power source
A S B
C D
circuit 2
Fig. 2.2
power source
A S B
C D
circuit 3
Fig. 2.3
The voltage V and current I for all three circuits are shown in Table 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Table 2.1 Use
Circuit V/ I/
1 0.83 0.53
2 0.75 0.95
3 0.41 0.28
2. the value of potential difference V in circuit 3 will be half that in circuit 1 or circuit 2.
(i) State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, the results support these
predictions.
Prediction 1 ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
Prediction 2 ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason, other than a change in temperature of the wires, why the
results may not support the theory.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
3 The IGCSE class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is For
added to the hot water. Examiner’s
Use
A student measures and records the temperature θ of the hot water before adding any of the
cold water available.
He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. He measures
and records the temperature θ of the mixture of hot and cold water.
He repeats this procedure four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water.
The temperature readings are shown in Table 3.1. V is the volume of cold water added.
Table 3.1
V/ θ/
0 82
68
58
50
45
42
(ii) Enter the values for the volume of cold water added.
[2]
(b) Use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume (x-axis). For
Draw the best-fit curve. Examiner’s
Use
[4]
(c) During this experiment, some heat is lost from the hot water to the surroundings. Also,
each time the cold water is added, it is added in quite large volumes and at random
times.
Suggest two improvements you could make to the procedure to give a graph that more
accurately shows the pattern of temperature change of the hot water, due to addition of
cold water alone.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
screen
x y
lens
illuminated
object
Fig. 4.1
(a) The student places the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. She
places the screen close to the lens and then moves it away from the lens until a sharply
focused image is formed on the screen. She measures and records the distance y
between the lens and the screen.
y = 37.1 cm
f = ................................................... [2]
(b) She then repeats the procedure with the lens at a distance x = 30.0 cm from the
illuminated object.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, measure the distance xs between the lens and the illuminated object.
Also on Fig. 4.1, measure the distance ys between the lens and the screen.
xs = ......................................................
ys = ......................................................
(ii) Calculate the actual distance y between the lens and the screen. For
Examiner’s
Use
y = ......................................................
(iii) Calculate the focal length f using the new values of x and y.
f = ......................................................
Draw a diagram to show the appearance of the focused image in (b) on the screen.
[1]
[Total: 10]
5 (a) Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second For
column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline Examiner’s
the value most likely to be correct. Use
Table 5.1
(b) (i) A student is to find the value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. Potential
difference V and current I can be recorded. The resistance is then calculated using
the equation R = V/ I.
The student knows that an increase in temperature will affect the resistance of the
wire. Assuming that variations in room temperature will not have a significant effect,
suggest two ways by which the student could minimise temperature increases in
the wire during the experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the circuit component that the student could use to control the current.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2009
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use your rule to measure, in cm, the external diameter d of the test-tube.
d = ....................................... cm
(ii) Use your rule to measure, in cm, the length x of the test-tube. For
Examiner’s
x = ............................................ Use
(iii) Draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood
and your rule to measure the length x of the test-tube as accurately as possible.
[4]
(i) Calculate the external volume Ve of the test-tube using the equation
πd 2X .
Ve =
4
Ve = ............................................
(ii) The student then fills the test-tube with water and pours the water into a measuring For
cylinder. Fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder. Examiner’s
Use
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
water
30
20
10
Fig. 1.2
Record the volume reading Vi from the measuring cylinder. This is the internal
volume of the test-tube.
Vi = ............................................
(iii) Calculate the density ρ of the glass from which the test-tube is made using the
equation
m
ρ= .
(Ve − Vi)
ρ = ....................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
BLANK PAGE
2 The IGCSE class is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different conditions. For
Examiner’s
The students are provided with two thermometers A and B. Thermometer B has cotton wool Use
thermometer A
stand
water
Fig. 2.1
The students measure the temperature θ of the hot water in the beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the
thermometer reading.
thermometer A
Fig. 2.2
(a) Record in Table 2.1 at time t = 0 s the temperature θ shown in Fig. 2.2.
(b) The students remove the thermometer from the water, starting the stopclock at the same
time. Table 2.1 shows the temperature of the thermometer bulb at 30 s intervals. The
experiment is repeated using thermometer B which has cotton wool wrapped around
the thermometer bulb.
Complete Table 2.1 by inserting the appropriate unit in the time and in the temperature For
column headings. Examiner’s
Use
Table 2.1
Thermometer A Thermometer B
t/ θ/ θ/
0 81
30 51 72
60 43 58
90 37 49
120 34 43
150 30 38
180 28 34
210 27 31
[2]
(c) Suggest which thermometer cooled more quickly at first. Justify your answer by reference
to the readings.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the two thermometer bulbs
under different conditions (in this experiment one thermometer bulb is covered with cotton
wool), it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two conditions that
should be controlled in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
power
source
A
x
A B
C
Fig. 3.1
AB is a resistance wire. The students place the sliding contact C on the resistance wire AB
at a distance x = 0.100 m from A. They switch on and measure the p.d. V across the wire
between A and C. They also measure the current I in the wire. The value of I is 0.38 A.
They repeat the procedure several times using different values of x. The readings are shown
in Table 3.1. The current I is 0.38 A for each value of x.
Table 3.1
x/m V /V R/Ω
0.100 0.21
0.300 0.59
0.500 1.04
0.700 1.42
0.900 1.87
[2]
(a) Calculate the resistance R of the section AC of the wire for each value of x using the
equation R = V– . Record the values of R in the table.
I
(b) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R / Ω (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). Draw For
the best fit line. Examiner’s
Use
[5]
(c) Within the limits of experimental accuracy, what do you conclude about the variation of
resistance with distance along the wire? Justify your conclusion by reference to your
graph.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Using your graph, determine the value for R when x = 0.750 m. Show clearly on your
graph how you obtained the necessary information.
R = ....................................... [2]
(e) A variable that may be difficult to control in this experiment is the heating effect of the
current, which affects the resistance of the wire. Suggest how you would minimise the
heating effect.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
lens and then moves the screen away from the lens until a sharply focused image of the
object is formed on the screen.
illuminated
u v
object screen
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using your rule, measure on Fig. 4.1 the distance u, in cm, from the centre of the lens to
the illuminated object and the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.
u = ...........................................
v =............................................ [2]
(b) (i) Fig. 4.1 is drawn one fifth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from the
illuminated object to the centre of the lens and the actual distance y from the centre of
the lens to the screen.
Record these values in Table 4.1. The first pair of readings obtained by the student
has already been entered in the table.
Table 4.1
x / cm y / cm f / cm
57.0 15.0
[3]
(ii) Calculate for both pairs of readings the focal length f of the lens using the equation
xy .
f=
(x + y )
(d) State two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable
measurements.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
pivot bench
Fig. 5.1
First, the student balances the metre rule, without loads, on the pivot. He finds that it does
not balance at the 50.0 cm mark, as he expects, but it balances at the 49.7 cm mark.
Load Q is a metal cylinder with diameter a little larger than the width of the metre rule, so
that it covers the markings on the rule. Load Q is placed carefully on the balanced metre rule
with its centre at the 84.2 cm mark. The rule does not slip on the pivot.
(a) Draw on Fig. 5.1 the metre rule with load Q on it. [2]
(b) Explain, using a labelled diagram, how the student would ensure that the metre rule
reading at the centre of Q is 84.2 cm.
[2]
(c) Calculate the distance between the pivot and the centre of load Q.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2009 0625/06/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8413808010*
PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2009
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
1 The IGCSE class is investigating the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 1.1 shows the set-up. Use
bob
d
floor
one complete
oscillation
(a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the
pendulum bob.
d = ......................................................
(ii) Fig. 1.1 is drawn one twentieth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from
the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob. Enter this value in the top row of
Table 1.1.
The students displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. They
measure and record in Table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum
(see Fig. 1.2).
Table 1.1
x / cm t/s T/s T 2 / s2
20.0
20.0 19.0
30.0 17.9
40.0 16.8
50.0 15.5
[4]
(b) (i) Calculate the period T of the pendulum for each set of readings. The period is the For
time for one complete oscillation. Enter the values in Table 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
(c) Use your values from Table 1.1 to plot a graph of T 2 / s2 (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis).
Draw the best-fit line.
[5]
(d) State whether or not your graph shows that T 2 is directly proportional to x. Justify your For
statement by reference to the graph. Examiner’s
Use
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
BLANK PAGE
2 An IGCSE student is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different For
conditions. Examiner’s
Use
He places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water and records the temperature h of the hot
water.
Fig. 2.1
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. Write down the value of h that it shows.
h ................................................ [1]
He then moves the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is just above the surface of the
water (position A) and immediately starts a stopclock.
He records the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Position A Position B
t/ / /
30 65 56
60 58 47
90 54 40
120 52 35
150 50 32
180 48 30
The student replaces the thermometer in the hot water and then moves the thermometer For
15 cm away from the beaker to position B and immediately starts the stopclock. He records Examiner’s
the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1. Use
(c) State in which position the thermometer bulb cooled more quickly. Justify your answer
by reference to the readings.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the thermometer bulbs in
the two positions, it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two
conditions that should be controlled in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
3 The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of lamps arranged either in series For
or in parallel. Examiner’s
Use
power
source
Fig. 3.1
A student measures and records the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the two
lamps.
0.2 0.3
0.1 0.4
0 0.5
A
2 3
1 4
0 5
V
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) Write the voltage and current readings in Table 3.1, below. For
Examiner’s
(ii) Complete the column headings in Table 3.1. Use
[3]
(b) The student then sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.3 and records the readings. These
readings have already been entered in Table 3.1.
power
source
Fig. 3.3
For each set of readings in the table, calculate the combined resistance R of the two
lamps using the equation R = V / I. Record the values of R in Table 3.1. [2]
Table 3.1
V/ I/ R/
(c) Using the values of resistance you have obtained, calculate the ratio y of the resistances
using the equation
resistance of lamps in series
y= .
resistance of lamps in parallel
y = ......................................................
[2]
(d) Fig. 3.4 shows a circuit including two motors A and B. For
Examiner’s
Use
power source
ammeter
motor A
A
variable resistor
motor B
Fig. 3.4
(i) Draw a diagram of the circuit using standard circuit symbols. The circuit symbol for
a motor is:
the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
4 An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a lens by two different methods. For
Examiner’s
The set-up for Method 1 is shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
object
illuminated screen mirror
object f
lens
Fig. 4.1
The student moves the lens and the mirror slowly towards the object screen until a sharply
focused image is obtained on the object screen as shown in Fig. 4.2.
image
Fig. 4.2
(a) On Fig. 4.1, use your rule to measure the distance f between the lens and the object
screen. This is the focal length of the lens.
f = ................................................ [2]
(b) For Method 2, the student takes measurements of the diameter d and maximum
thickness t of the lens. Use your rule to take measurements on Fig. 4.3.
Fig. 4.3
(i) Determine an average value for the diameter d of the lens. Record your readings in For
the space below. Examiner’s
Use
d = ......................................................
t = ......................................................
(iii) Draw a diagram to show how, in the laboratory you would use two rectangular
blocks of wood and a metre rule to measure the thickness of the lens as accurately
as possible.
(iv) Theory shows that, for a perfectly formed lens, the focal length is given by the
formula
d2
f= where k = 4.16.
kt
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using this formula.
f = ......................................................
[7]
(c) Explain whether your results from Methods 1 and 2 support the theory in part (b)(iv). For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
screen.
(a) Complete the diagram below to show the apparatus you would use. Include a metre rule
to measure the distances between the object and the lens and between the lens and
the screen. The illuminated object is drawn for you.
illuminated
object
lamp
card
[3]
(b) State two precautions that you would take to obtain accurate results in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5429162966*
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2010
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
DC (KN/SW) 17179/5
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
clamp
spring A spring B
l l
200 g mass
200 g mass
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student hangs a 200 g mass on each spring, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
l = ..................................... mm
(ii) Calculate the extension eA of the spring using the equation eA = (l – lA).
eA = ..................................... mm
l = ..................................... mm
(iv) Calculate the extension eB of the spring using the equation eB = (l – lB).
eB = ..................................... mm
[2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/61/M/J/10
3
(b) The student then sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
spring A
l l spring B
rod
load
Fig. 1.2
(i) On Fig. 1.2 measure the new length of each of the springs.
spring A: l = ..................................... mm
spring B: l = ..................................... mm
(ii) Calculate the extension of each spring using the appropriate equation from
part (a).
spring A: e = ..................................... mm
spring B: e = ..................................... mm
(iii) Calculate the average of these two extensions eav . Show your working.
eav = ......................................mm
[3]
(c) It is suggested that (eA + eB)/4 = eav .
State whether your results support this theory and justify your answer with reference to
the results.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Describe briefly one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate length
measurements.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 0625/61/M/J/10 [Turn over
4
thermometer
hot
water
Fig. 2.1
Hot water is poured into the beaker and temperature readings are taken as the water cools.
Table 2.1
t /s θ / °C
0 85
30 78
60 74
90 71
120 69
150 67
300 63
(a) (i) Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T1 of the water
in the first 150 s.
T1 = ...........................................
(ii) Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T2 of the water For
in the final 150 s. Examiner’s
Use
T2 = ............................................
[3]
(b) Plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis) for the first 150 s. [5]
(i) Describe briefly how the results that you have calculated in part (a) show this
trend.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe briefly how the graph line shows this trend.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
3 The IGCSE class is investigating the effect of the length of resistance wire in a circuit on the For
potential difference across a lamp. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit without the voltmeter. Complete the circuit diagram to show the
voltmeter connected in the circuit to measure the potential difference across the lamp.
power
source
l
A B
sliding
contact
Fig. 3.1
[2]
(b) A student switches on and places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance
l = 0.200 m from end A. He records the value of l and the potential difference V across
the lamp.
He then repeats the procedure using a range of values of l. Table 3.1 shows the
readings.
Table 3.1
V
l/m V /V –
l /
0.200 1.67
0.400 1.43
0.600 1.25
0.800 1.11
1.000 1.00
(i) For each pair of readings in the table calculate and record in the table the value
of V
–.
l
(ii) Complete the table by writing in the unit for V
–.
l [3]
(c) A student suggests that the potential difference V across the lamp is directly proportional For
to the length l of resistance wire in the circuit. State whether or not you agree with this Examiner’s
suggestion and justify your answer by reference to the results. Use
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State one precaution that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings of V in
this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
E G F
P2 P5
P6
P1
sheet of
paper
J K
H
Fig. 4.1
The student is using a sheet of plain paper on a pin board. Fig. 4.1 shows the sheet of paper.
The straight line EF shows the position of the reflecting surface of a plane mirror standing
vertically on the sheet of paper. Line GH is a normal to line EF. Line JG marks an incident ray
and line GK is the corresponding reflected ray. The student marks the position of the incident
ray with two pins (P1 and P2) and uses two more pins (P3 and P4) to find the direction of the
reflected ray.
(a) (i) On Fig. 4.1 mark with two neat crosses, labelled P3 and P4, suitable positions for
the pins to find the direction of the reflected ray.
i = ............................................
r1 = ............................................
[3]
(b) (i) On Fig. 4.1 draw a line E'GF' such that the angle θ between this line and the line For
EGF is 10°. Start with E' below the line EGF. The straight line E'F' shows a new Examiner’s
position of the reflecting surface of the plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet Use
of paper.
The points labelled P5 and P6 mark the positions of two pins placed so that P5, P6
and the images of P1 and P2 appear in line with each other. P1 and P2 have not
been moved since the original set-up.
(ii) Using a ruler, draw a line joining the points labelled P5 and P6, and continue this
line to meet the line E'F'.
(iii) Measure the angle of reflection r2 between line GH and the line joining the points
labelled P5 and P6.
r2 = ............................................
(iv) Calculate the angle α through which the reflected ray has moved.
α = ............................................
(c) Theory suggests that if the mirror is moved through an angle θ then the reflected ray will
move through an angle of 2θ.
State whether your result supports the theory and justify your answer by reference to
the result.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
5 The IGCSE class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule. For
Examiner’s
The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1. Use
pivot at 10 cm mark
metre rule
load at 90 cm mark
Fig. 5.1
A student displaces the rule a small distance to one side and allows it to swing. The time t
taken for 10 complete swings is recorded. She calculates the time T taken for one swing. She
repeats the procedure using different values of the distance d.
Table 5.1
(b) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for For
one swing, rather than just measuring the time for one swing. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student tries to find a relationship between T and d. She first suggests that T × d is
a constant.
(i) Calculate the values of T × d and enter the values in the final column of the table.
(ii) State whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your
answer.
Statement .................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010 0625/61/M/J/10
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
*0199664493*
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2010
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
DC (LEO/DJ) 25086/5
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
1 A student is determining the position of the centre of mass of an object using a balancing For
method. Examiner’s
Use
50.0 cm
mark
mass m d load of mass x
pivot
75.0 cm
mark
Fig. 1.1
A load of mass x is taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the
75.0 cm mark. The student places a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjusts its position so
that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the
pivot, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
The student records the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on
the rule. He then repeats the procedure using different masses. The readings are shown in
Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
1 1
m /g d / cm
d cm
30 45.0
40 34.0
50 27.0
60 22.5
70 19.3
(a) For each value of d, calculate 1/d and enter the values in the table. [2]
1 1
(b) Plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against (x-axis). For
d cm Examiner’s
Use
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = .................................................. [2]
(d) Determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of
mass of the load using the equation
z = G – k,
where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g. x
z = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
2 The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of heating and cooling of a thermometer bulb. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
thermometer
lid
water
Fig. 2.1
θr = ................................................. [1]
(b) For the cooling experiment, a student places the thermometer into hot water as shown in For
Fig. 2.1. When the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, she records the Examiner’s
temperature θ at time t = 0 s. She removes the thermometer from the water, immediately Use
For the heating experiment, the student takes another thermometer and records the
temperature θ shown on the thermometer at time t = 0 s. She places the thermometer in
the beaker of hot water, immediately starts the stopclock, and records the temperature
shown by the thermometer at 10 s intervals. The readings are shown in Table 2.2.
t/ θ/ t/ θ/
0 74 0 25
30 60 10 69
60 52 20 80
90 45 30 81
120 39 40 81
150 35 50 82
180 33 60 82
(ii) Estimate the time that would be taken in the cooling experiment for the thermometer
to cool from the reading at time t = 0 s to room temperature θr .
(c) State in which table the initial rate of temperature change is the greater. Justify your
answer by reference to your readings.
justification .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
3 The IGCSE class is investigating the current in a circuit when different resistors are connected For
in the circuit. Examiner’s
Use
The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. The circuit contains a resistor X, and there is a gap in the
circuit between points A and B that is used for adding extra resistors to the circuit.
power source X
A
A B
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student connects points A and B together, switches on and measures the current I0 in
the circuit.
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 A 1.0
Fig. 3.2
I0 = .................................................. [1]
(b) The student connects a 3.3 Ω resistor between points A and B, switches on and records For
the current I. He repeats the procedure with a 4.7 Ω resistor and then a 6.8 Ω resistor. Examiner’s
Use
Finally he connects the 3.3 Ω resistor and the 6.8 Ω resistor in series between points A
and B, and records the current I.
R/ I/
3.3 0.23
4.7 0.21
6.8 0.18
0.15
(ii) Write the combined resistance of the 3.3 Ω resistor and the 6.8 Ω resistor in series
in the space in the resistance column of the table. [1]
(c) Theory suggests that the current will be 0.5 I0 when the total resistance in the circuit
is twice the value of the resistance of resistor X. Use the readings in the table, and the
value of I0 from (a), to estimate the resistance of resistor X.
(d) On Fig. 3.1 draw two resistors in parallel connected between A and B and also a
voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across resistor X. [3]
[Total: 8]
4 The IGCSE class is investigating the reflection of light by a mirror as seen through a For
transparent block. Examiner’s
Use
mirror
A B
N
transparent
block
E
D P3 C
P4
N'
F
eye
sheet of
paper
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student draws the outline of the transparent block ABCD on the ray-trace sheet. He For
draws the normal NN' to side CD. He draws the incident ray EF at an angle of incidence Examiner’s
i = 20°. He pushes two pins P1 and P2 into line EF and places the block on the sheet Use
of paper. He then observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block from
the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1 so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one
behind the other. He pushes two pins P3 and P4 into the surface, between his eye and
the block, so that P3, P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appear in
line. (The plane mirror along side AB of the block reflects the light.)
(i) On line EF, mark with neat crosses (x) suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2.
(ii) Continue the line EF so that it crosses CD and extends as far as side AB.
(iii) Draw a line joining the positions of P4 and P3. Continue the line so that it crosses
CD and extends as far as side AB. Label the point G where this line crosses the
line from P1 and P2. [4]
θ = ......................................................
(θ – 2i ) = ................................................. [2]
(b) The student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence i = 30° and records the
value of θ as 62°.
(θ – 2i ) = ......................................................
(ii) Theory suggests that θ = 2i . State whether the results support the theory and justify
your answer by reference to the results.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) To place the pins as accurately as possible, the student views the bases of the pins.
Explain briefly why viewing the bases of the pins, rather than the tops of the pins,
improves the accuracy of the experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010 0625/61/O/N/10 [Turn over
10
5 The IGCSE class is investigating the time taken for ice cubes to melt when placed in water. For
Examiner’s
Each student is able to use Use
glass beakers,
a thermometer,
a stopclock,
a measuring cylinder,
an electronic balance,
a supply of ice cubes of different sizes,
a supply of cold water,
a stirrer,
a method of heating the water
and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful.
A student decides to investigate the effect of the mass of ice cubes on the time they take to
melt in water.
(a) Suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) In the table below, write the names of three items of apparatus that are necessary in
order to take readings in this investigation. In the second column of the table write the
quantity that the item measures.
[3]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 9 0 9 6 7 1 7 3 6 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2011
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
DC (LEO/SW) 28913/4
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
1 An IGCSE student is determining the position of the centre of mass of a triangular card. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1. Use
pin or nail
cork
A
stand
card
C
plumbline
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student hangs the card on the nail through hole A. He checks that the card is able
to swing freely and then hangs the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to, but not
touching, the card. When the card and plumbline are still, he makes a small mark at the
edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge. He removes the card and draws
a line from the mark to hole A.
For
Examiner’s
Use
A
C B
Fig.1.2
On Fig.1.2, the position of each of the marks the student makes is shown with a small
cross. On Fig. 1.2, draw in the lines between the positions of the holes A, B and C and
the corresponding crosses on the card. [2]
(b) If the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position
where the three lines meet. On Fig. 1.2, judge the best position for the centre of mass,
marking it with a small cross. Draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of
the card and measure the distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled
corner of the card.
a = ........................................[3]
(c) In this experiment, it is important that the card is able to swing freely. For this reason, the
plumbline should not touch the card but be a small distance from it. This could cause an
inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position. Describe how you would minimise
this possible inaccuracy. You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
thermometer
beaker
water
Fig. 2.1
°C
–10
100
110
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Fig. 2.2
θR = ........................................[1]
(b) The beaker contains 200 cm3 of hot water. A student takes temperature readings as the
water cools, as shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
t/ θ/
0 79
30 65
60 58
90 55
120 53
150 52
180 51
T1 = ............................................
T2 = ........................................[3]
[5]
(d) (i) State how the rate of cooling in the first 30 s differs from that in the final 30 s.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
3 The IGCSE class is measuring the currents in lamps in different circuits. For
Examiner’s
The first circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. Use
power
source
lamp 1
A
lamp 2
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I in
lamp 1. She rearranges the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with
lamp 2 and again records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I
in lamp 2.
Table 3.1
V/ I/ R/
V
(i) Calculate the resistance R of each lamp, using the equation R = , and enter the
I
results in the table.
(ii) Add together the two values of R to calculate RS, the sum of the resistances of the
two lamps.
RS = ............................................
[3]
(b) The student rearranges the circuit so that the lamps and the ammeter are in series. She For
does not change the position of the voltmeter. Examiner’s
Use
voltmeter reading.......1.9 V
ammeter reading.......0.23 A
(i) Draw a circuit diagram of the rearranged circuit using conventional symbols.
(ii) Use the voltmeter and ammeter readings to calculate RT , the combined resistance
of the two lamps in series.
RT = ........................................[3]
(c) A student suggests that the values of RS and RT should be equal. State whether the
results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the calculated
values.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, without reference to the values of resistance that you have calculated, one piece
of evidence that the student can observe during the experiment that shows that the
temperature of the lamp filaments changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
4 The IGCSE class is investigating reflection of light using a plane mirror. For
Examiner’s
A student has set up a ray trace sheet and this is shown in Fig. 4.1. The line MR shows the Use
mirror
N
M R
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 4.1
(ii) Draw a line 10 cm long that is parallel to line MR and 12 cm below it. The ends of
this line must be at the same distance from the edges of the page as the ends of
line MR. Label this line CD with C directly below M. [3]
(b) The student places a pin P1 so that it stands vertically at C. He places another pin P2 as
close as possible to the point N.
(ii) Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the line CN and the normal.
i = ........................................[2]
(c) The student views the image in the mirror of the pin P1 from the direction indicated by For
the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P3 and P4 some distance apart so that pins P4, Examiner’s
P3, P2 and the image of P1 all appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P3 Use
(i) Draw in the line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets
the normal.
(ii) Measure and record the angle of reflection r between the normal and line P3P4.
r = ........................................[2]
(d) Several students found that, in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable
care, the measured value of the angle of reflection r was not exactly the same as the
value obtained from theory.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
5 Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second column For
shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline the value most Examiner’s
likely to be correct. Use
Table 5.1
[Total: 5]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 1 3 1 3 1 3 5 5 9 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2011
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (SJF/CGW) 34182/5
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
d x y
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
X
pivot
Fig. 1.1
X is a 1.0 N load.
The student places the load X on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of
the rule, as shown in Fig.1.1. He adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to
being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.
He measures and records the distance x from the centre of the load X to the pivot, and the
distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. He repeats the procedure using d values
of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm. The readings of d, x and y are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
d / cm x / cm y / cm
5.0 23.7 21.3
10.0 21.0 19.1
15.0 18.5 16.3
20.0 16.0 14.1
25.0 13.9 12.0
(a) Plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). You do not need to include the origin
(0,0) on your graph.
[4]
(b) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the weight W of the metre rule using the equation W = L , where L = 1.0 N.
G
W = .......................................................... [1]
(d) The calculation of W is based on the assumption that the centre of mass of the rule is at the
50.0 cm mark.
(i) Describe briefly how you would determine the position of the centre of mass of the rule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how you would modify the experiment if the centre of mass was at the 49.7 cm
mark.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
2 The IGCSE class is investigating temperature changes when cold water and hot water are mixed.
(a) A student records the temperature θc of 100 cm3 of cold water and the temperature θh of
100 cm3 of hot water.
Fig. 2.1
θc = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The student adds 100 cm3 of the hot water to the cold water. She records the temperature θm
of the mixture of hot and cold water, θm = 48 °C.
State two precautions (other than repeating the experiment) that the student could take to
ensure the reliability of her value of the temperature θm.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Suggest a practical reason in this experiment for the temperature of the mixture θm being
different from the average value θav , even when the student has taken the precautions you
suggested in (c).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Suggest a modification to the experiment which should reduce the difference between θm
and θav.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(f) The student decides to repeat the experiment to check the readings. Suggest one possible
variable that she should keep constant.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
power
source
A A D
B
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student measures the current IA at the position A shown by the ammeter, and then at
positions B (IB), C (IC) and D (ID).
IB + IC = ...............................................................
(ii) State whether the experimental results support the theory. Justify your statement by
reference to the readings.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The student suggests repeating the experiment to confirm her conclusion. She connects a
variable resistor (rheostat) in series with the switch. State the purpose of the variable resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student connects a voltmeter and records the potential difference V across the
combination of the three resistors.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected as described, using the standard symbol for
a voltmeter. [1]
4 5 6
3 7
2 8
1 9
0 V 10
Fig. 3.2
V = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the resistance R of the combination of the three resistors using the equation
V
R= .
I
R = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
ray trace
sheet
M R
P2
P3
eye
Fig. 4.1
(i) Draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. Label the normal NL. Label the
point at which NL crosses MR with the letter B.
[1]
(ii) Draw a line 8 cm long from B at an angle of incidence i = 40 ° to the normal below MR
and to the left of the normal. Label the end of this line A. Record the angle of incidence i
in the first row of Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
i /° r /°
34 33
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the mirror which is made of polished metal and has a vertical line drawn on it.
mirror
line
Fig. 4.2
The student places the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on MR. The lower end of the
line on the mirror is at point B. He places a pin P1 at A. He views the line on the mirror and
the image of pin P1 from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P2
and P3 some distance apart so that pins P3, P2, the image of P1, and the line on the mirror all
appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P2 and P3 are shown.
(i) Draw the line joining the positions of P2 and P3. Continue the line until it meets the
normal.
(ii) Measure, and record in the first row of Table 4.1, the angle of reflection r between the
normal and the line passing through P2 and P3.
[2]
(c) The student draws a line parallel to MR and 2 cm above it. He places the mirror on this line
and repeats the procedure without changing the position of pin P1. His readings for i and r are
shown in the table.
In spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values
of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory.
Suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The student was asked to list precautions that should be taken with this experiment in order
to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible. Table 4.2 shows the suggestions.
Place a tick (✓) in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested
precaution.
Table 4.2
suggested precaution
avoid parallax (line of sight) errors when taking readings with the protractor
use only two or three significant figures for the final answers
[3]
[Total: 10]
5 The IGCSE class is carrying out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air.
Fig. 5.1 indicates the method used. The experiment is conducted outside the school building.
student A student B
drum stopwatch
Student A strikes a drum once as loudly as possible. Student B stands some distance away from
student A and starts a stopwatch when she sees the drum being hit. She stops the stopwatch
when she hears the sound. She records the time interval t in Table 5.1. The experiment is repeated
several times. She calculates the speed of sound v and enters the values in the table.
Table 5.1
t/s v / (m / s)
0.87 344.83
0.92 326.09
0.84 357.14
0.83 361.45
0.86 338.84
(a) Suggest a suitable distance d for students to use when carrying out this experiment.
d = .......................................................... [1]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the average value vav for the speed of sound from the results in the table. Show
your working.
(d) The student has recorded the values for the speed of sound v to five significant figures.
State whether this is a suitable number of significant figures for the speed of sound in air in
this experiment. Give a reason for your answer.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 4 4 6 8 1 0 1 8 2 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2012
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 42235/7
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
1 An IGCSE student is determining the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. Use
d x y 50.0 cm mark
metre rule
M
pivot
Fig. 1.1
Mass M is placed on the rule. The position of the pivot is adjusted until the rule balances.
(a) The student chooses a mass M which is similar to the mass of the metre rule. Suggest a
suitable value for the mass.
(b) The mass is cylindrical and has a diameter slightly larger than the width of the metre rule.
Describe briefly how you would place the mass so that its centre of mass is exactly over
the 90.0 cm mark on the metre rule. You should draw a diagram and mark the position of
the centre of mass on the cylinder.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From your experience of carrying out balancing experiments of this type, suggest one
difficulty that you are likely to come across that could make the final result inaccurate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student takes a reading of x and the corresponding reading of y. He then calculates For
the mass of the metre rule. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest how you would improve the reliability of the value of the mass of the metre rule,
using this method.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Another student carries out a similar experiment to determine the mass of a 50 cm metal
strip. She calculates the mass and writes down “mass = 234.872 g”.
She checks the mass on an accurate balance. The value is 235 g. She thinks she must
have made a mistake in her experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
thermometer
card
metre rule
lamp
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
θ R = ................................................. [1]
(b) A student switches on the lamp and places the thermometer so that its bulb is a horizontal
distance d = 100 mm from the surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.1. She records the
distance d between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp. She also records
the temperature θ shown on the thermometer. She repeats the procedure using values
of d of 80 mm, 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm. The temperature readings are shown
in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
d / 00 θ / 00
52
56
61
67
75
86
[2]
(c) The student moves the thermometer away from the lamp and waits for about a minute For
for the thermometer to cool. She places the thermometer so that its bulb is a vertical Examiner’s
distance d V = 100 mm from the top surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.3. Use
thermometer
dv
lamp
Fig. 2.3
θ V is ................................................. [1]
(d) A student suggests that θ V will be higher than the thermometer reading θH because
thermal energy will travel by infra-red radiation and convection to the thermometer bulb
above the lamp but by infra-red radiation only when the bulb is to one side of the lamp.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a
reliable result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
3 The IGCSE class is determining the resistance of a fixed resistor in a circuit. For
Examiner’s
The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. Use
power
source
A
resistance
R d wire
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance d = 10.0 cm
from point A. He measures the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the resistor
R. He repeats the procedure using d values of 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm.
Table 3.1
V/V I/A
(ii) Plot a graph of V / V (y-axis) against I / A (x-axis). You do not need to include the For
origin (0, 0) on your graph. Examiner’s
Use
[5]
(iii) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained
the necessary information.
G = ................................................. [3]
(b) The gradient G of the graph is numerically equal to the resistance R of the resistor R.
Write a value for the resistance R to a suitable number of significant figures for this
experiment.
R = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
illuminated
object screen
lens
x
d
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places the lens between the object and the screen and close to the object.
She moves the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused, enlarged image is
formed on the screen.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance d between the object and the screen.
d = ......................................................
(ii) On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and
the screen.
x = ......................................................
[2]
1. Calculate the actual distance D between the object and the screen.
D = ......................................................
2. Calculate the actual distance X between the centre of the lens and the screen.
X = ......................................................
[1]
(b) Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, the student moves the lens towards
the screen until a clearly focused, diminished image is formed on the screen. She
measures the distance Y between the centre of the lens and the screen: Y = 19.0 cm.
XY
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f = .
D
f = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 0625/61/M/J/12
9
(c) The student turns the lens through an angle of 180° and repeats the procedure obtaining For
a value for the focal length f = 14.7 cm. Examiner’s
Use
Theory suggests that the two values of the focal length f should be the same. State
whether the results support this theory and justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a
reliable result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
5 The IGCSE class is determining the internal volume of a test-tube using two displacement For
methods. Examiner’s
Use
cm3 cm3
100 100
measuring
90 cylinder 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 test-tube 50
40 40
water 30 30
20 20
10 10
(a) (i) Fig. 5.1 shows water in a measuring cylinder. Record the volume V1 of the water.
V1 = ................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate
volume reading. [2]
(b) (i) A student lowers a test-tube, closed end first, into the water in the measuring
cylinder and pushes the tube down until it is filled with water. From Fig. 5.2, record
the new water level V2.
V2 = ......................................................
(ii) Calculate the volume VG of the glass of the test-tube using the equation VG = (V2 – V1).
VG = ......................................................
[2]
(c) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and empties the water For
back into the measuring cylinder. He then puts the test-tube, open end first, into the Examiner’s
water in the measuring cylinder and carefully pushes it down with his finger until it is Use
finger
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50 test-tube
40
30
20
10
Fig. 5.3
V3 = ......................................................
(iii) Calculate the volume VA of air in the test-tube using the equation VA = (V3 – V1) – VG.
VA = ......................................................
[1]
(d) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and fills the test-tube For
with water from a beaker. He pours the water from the test-tube into an empty measuring Examiner’s
cylinder and records the volume VW of water: Use
18 cm3
VW = ......................................................
The student has attempted to determine the internal volume of the test-tube by two
methods. His two values for the internal volume are VA and VW.
Assuming that the experiments have been carried out correctly and carefully and that
the measuring cylinder scale is accurate, suggest two reasons why the value VA may be
inaccurate and two reasons why the value VW may be inaccurate.
VA:
reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
VW:
reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
er
s
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
.c
om
* 1 1 7 9 4 6 4 0 8 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2012
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total
DC (CW/SW) 50194/4
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
clamp
spring
d0
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring
and the surface of the bench.
d0 = .......................................... mm [1]
(b) The diagram is drawn 1/10th actual size. Calculate the actual distance D0, in mm,
between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.
D0 = .......................................... mm [1]
(c) A student hangs a 1.0 N load on the spring. He measures and records the distance D
between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench, and the value of the
load L.
He repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The distance
readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Calculate the extension e of the spring, for each set of readings, using the equation
e = (D0 – D). Record the values of L and e in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
L/N D / mm e / mm
199
191
179
171
160
[2]
[4]
(e) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = .................................................. [2]
(f) When making measurements, the student is careful to avoid a line-of-sight error.
Suggest one other precaution that the student should take when measuring the distance
D between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
2 The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
110 °C
100
90
80
70
60
50
thermometer
water 40
30
20
10
0
–10
(a) Record the value of room temperature θR shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.2.
θR = .................................................. [1]
(b) A student pours 150 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. She measures the temperature θ of For
the water at time t = 0 and records it in a table. Examiner’s
Use
She starts a stopclock and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until
she has a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
volume of water
t/ θ/ θ/
0 84 85
30 79 79
60 74 75
90 70 72
120 68 70
150 66 68
(ii) State whether the rate of cooling is significantly faster, slower, or about the same
when using the larger volume of hot water. Justify your answer by reference to the
readings.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) If this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important
to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions that should be controlled.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
3 The IGCSE class is investigating the potential differences across circuit components. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used. Use
power
pack
ammeter
lamp N
lamp L lamp M
voltmeter
Fig. 3.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1, using standard symbols.
[3]
(b) A student records the current IA, the potential difference VL across lamp L and the
potential difference VM across lamp M.
0.65 A
IA = ......................................................
0.9 V
VL = ......................................................
1.0 V
VM = ......................................................
(i) Calculate the potential difference VA across lamps L and M using the equation
VA = VL + VM.
VA = ......................................................
(ii) Calculate RA, the combined resistance of lamps L, M and N, using the equation For
V Examiner’s
RA = A .
IA Use
RA = ......................................................
[2]
0.4 0.6
0.2 0.8
0 1.0
A
(c) The student rearranges the circuit so that the three lamps are in series with each other.
He records the potential difference across each lamp in turn.
0.6 V
VL = ......................................................
0.7 V
VM = ......................................................
0.7 V
VN = ......................................................
Calculate the potential difference VB across the three lamps using the equation
VB = VL + VM + VN.
VB = ......................................................
State whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference
to the results.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
4 The IGCSE class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block. For
Examiner’s
The apparatus and ray-trace sheet are shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
A B
D C
P3
P4
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet. She For
draws the outline of the block ABCD. Examiner’s
Use
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw a normal at the centre of side AB. Label the point E where the
normal crosses AB.
(ii) Draw a line FE to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30° to the
normal. [2]
(b) The student places two pins P1 and P2 on the line FE, placing one pin close to E. She
observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the images of P1
and P2 appear one behind the other. She places two pins P3 and P4 between her eye
and the block so that P3 and P4, and the images of P1 and P2 seen through the block,
appear one behind the other.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2. [1]
(ii) Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD
and label this point G.
(c) (i) Measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line GE and the normal.
r = .................................................. [1]
i
(ii) Calculate the ratio r .
i
r = .................................................. [1]
(d) The student repeats the procedure but with the angle of incidence i = 40°. The angle of
refraction r = 26°.
i
(i) Calculate the ratio r .
i
r = .................................................. [1]
i
(ii) A student suggests that the ratio r should be a constant.
State and explain briefly whether your results support this suggestion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
5 (a) The IGCSE class has a range of apparatus available. Here is a list of some of the For
apparatus. Examiner’s
Use
ammeter
barometer
beaker
electronic balance
manometer
measuring cylinder
metre rule
stopwatch
tape measure
thermometer
voltmeter
Complete Table 5.1 by inserting the name of one piece of apparatus from the list that is
the most suitable for measuring each quantity described.
Table 5.1
volume of water
a distance of about 50 m
[5]
(b) The IGCSE class is carrying out a lens experiment. This involves using an illuminated For
object, a screen and a lens. Examiner’s
Use
Firstly, the distance between the illuminated object and the lens is measured with a
metre rule. Next, a clearly focused image is obtained on the screen.
(i) Explain briefly how you would avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when using the
metre rule.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State a precaution that you would take to ensure that the image is well focused.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice November 1999
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice May/June 2000
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice November 2000
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice May/June 2001
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice October/November 2001
Back to questions
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003 0625 1
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 B 22 D
3 B 23 B
4 C 24 B
5 D 25 B
6 C 26 D
7 A 27 A
8 D 28 A
9 B 29 B
10 B 30 D
11 A 31 C
12 C 32 D
13 B 33 A
14 D 34 A
15 B 35 C
16 A 36 B
17 A 37 D
18 A 38 A
19 B 39 D
20 D 40 B
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 D 21 A
2 C 22 D
3 A 23 C
4 C 24 B
5 C 25 A
6 B 26 B
7 C 27 B
8 A 28 B
9 C 29 B
10 D 30 D
11 D 31 C
12 B 32 C
13 D 33 B
14 D 34 B
15 D 35 B
16 A 36 C
17 D 37 A
18 A 38 A
19 B 39 C
20 B 40 A
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 D 21 C
2 A 22 B
3 D 23 D
4 A 24 C
5 D 25 C
6 D 26 C
7 C 27 B
8 A 28 B
9 B 29 A
10 C 30 B
11 A 31 C
12 A 32 A
13 A 33 A
14 C 34 A
15 C 35 D
16 D 36 A
17 D 37 D
18 A 38 D
19 C 39 B
20 D 40 C
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 C
2 B 22 C
3 D 23 B
4 C 24 B
5 D 25 A
6 D 26 D
7 D 27 C
8 C 28 C
9 D 29 D
10 A 30 C
11 D 31 A
12 A 32 C
13 C 33 A
14 B 34 B
15 C 35 C
16 B 36 C
17 C 37 A
18 B 38 D
19 B 39 C
20 A 40 C
Back to questions
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 A
2 D 22 A
3 C 23 B
4 D 24 B
5 B 25 B
6 B 26 C
7 A 27 A
8 C 28 C
9 C 29 D
10 D 30 C
11 B 31 D
12 B 32 B
13 D 33 B
14 C 34 D
15 D 35 B
16 D 36 A
17 C 37 B
18 A 38 A
19 D 39 C
20 C 40 C
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 A
2 B 22 B
3 A 23 D
4 D 24 B
5 D 25 C
6 B 26 C
7 B 27 D
8 D 28 C
9 B 29 B
10 D 30 A
11 A 31 A
12 B 32 C
13 A 33 A
14 D 34 A
15 B 35 B
16 B 36 A
17 A 37 A
18 C 38 B
19 C 39 B
20 D 40 A
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 B
2 C 22 C
3 C 23 C
4 B 24 B
5 B 25 B
6 D 26 C
7 A 27 B
8 A 28 B
9 B 29 D
10 A 30 A
11 B 31 C
12 D 32 C
13 B 33 D
14 D 34 C
15 C 35 A
16 A 36 A
17 B 37 C
18 A 38 D
19 D 39 C
20 D 40 D
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 D
2 B 22 B
3 D 23 A
4 D 24 C
5 B 25 A
6 C 26 C
7 C 27 A
8 A 28 C
9 B 29 B
10 D 30 A
11 A 31 D
12 B 32 B
13 D 33 A
14 C 34 A
15 D 35 D
16 C 36 B
17 B 37 A
18 C 38 B
19 D 39 D
20 C 40 C
© UCLES 2006
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 01
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 B
2 B 22 B
3 A 23 A
4 D 24 B
5 B 25 D
6 C 26 B
7 B 27 B
8 C 28 C
9 B 29 C
10 B 30 B
11 D 31 A
12 B 32 D
13 D 33 B
14 A 34 C
15 B 35 A
16 D 36 C
17 D 37 D
18 C 38 C
19 A 39 D
20 C 40 A
© UCLES 2007
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 01
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 B
2 A 22 C
3 A 23 C
4 D 24 C
5 B 25 A
6 B 26 C
7 C 27 C
8 C 28 B
9 A 29 C
10 C 30 C
11 C 31 B
12 D 32 B
13 D 33 B
14 D 34 A
15 A 35 B
16 B 36 D
17 B 37 D
18 C 38 C
19 B 39 A
20 D 40 C
© UCLES 2007
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 01
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 D
2 B 22 C
3 C 23 A
4 C 24 C
5 B 25 A
6 C 26 D
7 B 27 A
8 D 28 B
9 C 29 B
10 D 30 A
11 C 31 B
12 C 32 A
13 A 33 B
14 C 34 A
15 B 35 B
16 D 36 C
17 D 37 C
18 A 38 A
19 B 39 B
20 A 40 B
© UCLES 2008
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 01
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 D
2 D 22 C
3 B 23 A
4 B 24 C
5 B 25 C
6 A 26 B
7 A 27 C
8 C 28 B
9 A 29 B
10 A 30 C
11 D 31 C
12 B 32 D
13 C 33 B
14 C 34 B
15 C 35 A
16 B 36 B
17 D 37 C
18 C 38 B
19 B 39 C
20 D 40 D
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 D
2 C 22 B
3 B 23 A
4 B 24 C
5 D 25 C
6 A 26 A
7 A 27 C
8 B 28 A
9 C 29 B
10 C 30 C
11 B 31 D
12 A 32 A
13 C 33 B
14 A 34 C
15 D 35 B
16 A 36 B
17 A 37 A
18 C 38 B
19 C 39 C
20 D 40 C
© UCLES 2009
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 11
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 B
2 A 22 C
3 C 23 B
4 D 24 D
5 A 25 D
6 B 26 D
7 A 27 C
8 D 28 B
9 D 29 D
10 C 30 A
11 B 31 D
12 D 32 C
13 B 33 A
14 D 34 C
15 C 35 D
16 B 36 A
17 A 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 C 39 B
20 B 40 B
© UCLES 2009
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 11
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 A
2 A 22 D
3 B 23 C
4 B 24 D
5 B 25 A
6 A 26 B
7 D 27 D
8 C 28 B
9 B 29 B
10 A 30 D
11 A 31 C
12 A 32 B
13 D 33 C
14 D 34 A
15 C 35 D
16 C 36 A
17 C 37 D
18 A 38 B
19 D 39 B
20 C 40 B
© UCLES 2010
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 11
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 D 22 B
3 D 23 C
4 D 24 D
5 D 25 A
6 B 26 D
7 C 27 C
8 B 28 C
9 C 29 C
10 C 30 A
11 B 31 C
12 D 32 C
13 A 33 A
14 C 34 C
15 A 35 A
16 D 36 A
17 A 37 B
18 B 38 D
19 B 39 C
20 B 40 D
© UCLES 2010
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2011 0625 11
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 B 22 D
3 A 23 C
4 D 24 C
5 A 25 A
6 A 26 A
7 C 27 B
8 D 28 B
9 B 29 D
10 D 30 D
11 C 31 A
12 D 32 B
13 D 33 C
14 C 34 A
15 C 35 D
16 A 36 B
17 A 37 C
18 B 38 B
19 B 39 C
20 C 40 C
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 B 21 B
2 D 22 C
3 D 23 D
4 B 24 D
5 C 25 C
6 A 26 C
7 C 27 B
8 B 28 A
9 C 29 B
10 C 30 D
11 D 31 C
12 C 32 B
13 D 33 D
14 C 34 B
15 C 35 C
16 D 36 B
17 A 37 A
18 A 38 B
19 C 39 B
20 A 40 A
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 C 22 A
3 B 23 C
4 D 24 C
5 B 25 C
6 D 26 D
7 A 27 A
8 C 28 D
9 C 29 C
10 B 30 D
11 C 31 C
12 B 32 D
13 A 33 B
14 A 34 C
15 D 35 B
16 A 36 D
17 D 37 C
18 A 38 B
19 D 39 B
20 B 40 B
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 C
2 A 22 A
3 B 23 D
4 A 24 B
5 C 25 C
6 C 26 A
7 A 27 B
8 D 28 A
9 D 29 B
10 C 30 B
11 B 31 B
12 B 32 B
13 D 33 B
14 B 34 A
15 D 35 C
16 D 36 A
17 D 37 D
18 A 38 D
19 B 39 C
20 B 40 D
2 (a)(i) W1 1
(ii) towards pivot, or equivalent 1
(b) pivot between W & W1 1
closer to W 1
4
4 (a) chemical 1
heat (or equiv.) 1
light (or equiv.) 1
(b) motion OR kinetic 1
position OR potential 1
(c) geothermal 1
6
9 (a)(i) volume = l x w x h 1
3
volume of paper = 0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 OR 0.003 (m ) 1
(ii) density = mass/volume in any form 1
OR 2.4 or 2.4(stated)
0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 candidate's volume 1
800 allow e.c.f. if working shown 1
-1-
3
kg/m 1
(b) 24N 1
(c) 24 OR candidate's weight substituted at top 1
0.3 x 0.2 OR 0.06 substituted at bottom 1
400 allow e.c.f. if working shown 1
2
N / m OR Pa 1
(d)(i) half (NOT “less”) 1
(ii) same 1
(iii) half (allow ecf from (i)) 1
(iv) half (allow ecf from (i)) 1
15
11 (a)(i) ON DIAGRAM
tube, closed at top 1
reservoir 1
mercury at suitable levels in tube & reservoir 1
appropriate meniscus on mercury (x3) 1
LABELLING
any 2 from: tube, reservoir, mercury, vacuum, scale 2
(ii) atmospheric pressure 1
(iii) h indicating mercury column 1
clear & correct indication of distance 1
(b)(i) 5 (cm) 1
(ii) idea of excess pressure 1
(iii) less 1
L.H. mercury higher than R.H. mercury 1
(iv) LH down, RH up BOTH 1
(v) bigger 1
15
12 (a)(i) A and H 1
(ii) G and F 1
(iii) B and E 1
(b)(i) any waveform 1
reasonably constant “period” (by eye) 1
reasonably constant amplitude (by eye) 1
(ii) vertical line 1
(c) different spacing 1
lady’s “waves” closer together than man’s “waves” 1
(allow 1 only for: man’s “waves” more irregular shape) 9
-2-
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory November 1999
1 (a) volume = l x b x h 1
= 8 x 5 x 2 1
3
= 80 (cm ) 1
(b) line shown at 80 mark 1
4
3 (a) attraction 1
(b) repulsion 1
(c) attraction 1
(d) nothing 1
4
4 (a)(i) BC 1
(ii) had to lift own weight / overcome gravity 1
(b)(i) greater 1
(ii) same ( or greater) work 1
less time / faster / power = work/time 1
5
-1-
ray from top of O through F’ (± _ mm), not shown
parallel to axis after lens (by eye) 4
(Additional incorrect rays subtract 1 for each)
Both rays bending at centre line / refraction
at both surfaces 1
(ii) image in correct position 1
(iii) ecf for own image drawn
real 1
inverted 1
larger 1
13
-2-
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory May/June 2000
1 (a) weight 1
(b) mass 1
(c) greater density OR less air gaps between potatoes 1
3
2 (a) Any three from:
conduction
convection
radiation
evaporation 3
(b)(i) suitable procedure 1
(ii) correct form of heat loss for candidate’s procedure 1
5
1
(b) Any two from:
waves
tides
steam
geothermal 2
6
8 (a)(i) 320 1
(ii) candidate’s value correctly plotted ± _ small square 1
(b)(i) 160 1
(ii) candidate’s value correctly plotted ± _ small square 1
(c) points plotted at (60,80)and (80,40) ± _ small square 1
(d) smooth curve through candidate’s points, by eye 1
(e) either of last two boxes ticked 1
(f) randomness OR idea of background 1
8
9 (a)(i) D 1
(ii) large(st) area 1
least pressure / pressure more spread out 1
(b) increases decreases stays the same
length AB √
width BC √
thickness CD √ 1
area touching the
horizontal surface √ 1
mass of sheet √ 1
weight of sheet √ 1
density of metal √ 1
pressure on surface √ 1
9
11 (a) sound 1
(b) infra-red 1
(c) X-rays 1
(d)(i) no air / vacuum on the moon implied 1
1. sound needs a medium/air 1
2. radio waves don’t need a medium/air 1
(ii) radio / _ wave 1
7
12 (a)(i) B 1
(ii) greater force / weight / heavier 1
reference to formula or constancy of length 1
(b)(i) B 1
2
(ii) greater weight / force / heavier 1
reference to formula or constancy of height lifted 1
(c) weight (of hammer) OR mass OR force 1
time (to lift) 1
(d)(i) energy of motion OR K.E. 1
(ii) Any two from:
heat. OR frictional
sound
K.E. of nail 2
11
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory November 2000
3 (a)(i) 31 (m/s) 1
(ii) 6 OR 11 0R 22 (m/s) 1
(iii) 10 (s) 1
(b) distance = area under graph OR distance = average speed x time 1
_ x l0 x 15 1
75 (m) 1
6
4 (a) A, D, E, H ticked 4
(b)(i) E or H 1
(ii) evaporates more rapidly/easily 1
6
-1-
(c) no e.c.f. 1
(d) brass OR sensible deduction from candidate’s (b) 1
(e) aluminium 1
6
1 2
9 (a) R=R + R 1
60 (_) 1
(b)(i) p.d./current OR voltage/current OR volt/amp OR V/I OR 6/I etc 1
(ii) correct rearrangement 1
6/60 or candidate’s answer to (a) 1
0.1 ecf 1
A OR amp(s) 1
(c) (b)(ii) x 40 1
4 OR candidate’s correct evaluation 1
V or volt(s) 1
(d) answer to (c) or 4 (V) 1
11
10 (a)(i) 6 1
(ii) 90/6 OR 90/ candidate’s answer to (b)(i) 1
15cm e.c.f. 1
(iii) 1. (arcs of) circles 1
2. constant depth 1
same speed in all directions (or equiv.) OR same wave spacing 1
(iv) indication of vertical motion 1
up and down OR circles 1
(b)(i) transverse 1
longitudinal OR pressure 1
(ii) indication of motion along KL 1
backwards and forwards OR back and forth 1
12
-2-
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory May/June 2001
1
6 (V) 1
(ii) 6 (V) 1
(iii) 0 (V) OR "it won't work" 1
7
10 (a) same 1
(b) greater 1
(c) (i) chemical 1
(ii) food 1
(d) potential OR PE OR gravitational OR position 1
(e) PE decreases 1
KE increases 1
energy turned to sound 1
idea of energy losses OR idea of sound becoming heat 1
9
2
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory October/November 2001
1 (a) 16 (cm) 1
(b) 16/8 e.c.f. 1
2 (cm) e.c.f. 1
3
2 wider base 1
idea of lowering C of M e.g. heavier base, make it shorter 1
2
3 (a) heat it 1
(b) increases 1
(c) any suitable example 1
(d) any suitable example 1
4
1
becomes a different atom / nucleus / nuclide / element 1
(b)(i) 5 (min) 1
(ii) 4 OR 20/candidate’s half-life correctly evaluated 1
(iii) 25 ± 5.... only 1
(c) 022 2
100 (NOT –1) 2
10
10 (a)(i) aluminium 1
greatest density OR "because mass increases as density
increases 1
(ii) aluminium OR candidate’s (a) (i) 1
(iii) aluminium OR candidate’s (a) (i) 1
(b) A 1
smallest area 1
(c)(i) small area OR "because pressure increases as area
decreases" 1
great pressure (on sand) 1
(ii) any sensible suggestion involving larger area in contact with
sand (must involve chair and sand) 1
9
2
draughts
opening door/ window
NOT switching on air conditioning 1
5
3
om
s.c
er
ap
eP
em
tr
.X
w
w
w
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003 0625 2
TARGET
QUESTION SCHEME MARK
GRADE
1 (a) 8 F B1
(b) EITHER OR
greater smaller
AND AND F B1
Thickness of rule thread stretched when 2
on rule
OR overlap at ends OR worn rule ends
2 (a) (i) 10 F B1
0.46 F A1
(b) (i) 15 F B1
EITHER OR OR
reasonably horizontal line at any temp for > half the C M1 mark
time along-
side
horizontal from zero time as far as dotted line (ignore C graph
anything to R. of line) A1
(b) (i) 0 C B1
(ii) mention of 6V F B1
on current/current-carrying conductor C A1
(ii) focus C B1
(b) (i) R1 + R2 F C1
12 F A1
6/12 e.c.f. C C1
0.5 or 12 e.c.f. C A1
TARGET
QUESTION SCHEME MARK
GRADE
1 (a) (i) G within block, to left of vertical through midpoint or AB F B1
(ii) Vertical line shown through A C B1
(b) A F M1
more stable (or equivalent statement) e.g. less likely to F A1
topple or “weight within base”
(c) so it does not topple over (or equivalent) F B1
5
2 reference mark on wheel *“(use stopwatch to)
time…” gets only one
datum line (could be “top” or “bottom”)
of these
*start timing/stopwatch as mark passes datum line
time a number of rotations (accept 1 here) 5C B5
time at least 20 rotations any 5
*stop stopwatch
divide time by number of rotations
repeat
make sure stopwatch at zero 5
3 gravitational OR potential OR PE OR GPE F B1
motion OR KE OR kinetic
heat/internal/thermal any order (–1 eeoo) 3F B3
sound
heat (accept potential) C B1
OR internal/thermal
NOT strain potential/NOT chemical potential
NOT sound, even as an extra 5
4 (a) vehicle 2 F M1
large(r) area (in contact with ground) C A1
low/less pressure C A1
less likely to sink/get stuck F A1
(b) (i) small area F C1
large pressure F B1
(ii) (weight spread over) large(r) area NOT body area C B1
small/less pressure C B1
reference to weight somewhere in (b) C B1
9
5 (a) (i) ray perpendicular to surface at A (by eye) F B1
(ii) normal at B correct (by eye) F B1
(iii) ray refracted down at B, but NOT along surface C B1
(iv) normal at D correct (by eye) F B1
(v) ray refracted up at D, but NOT along surface C B1
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
PHYSICS – NOVEMBER 2003 0625 2
TARGET
QUESTION SCHEME MARK
GRADE
1 (a) 10 F B1
2.0 OR 2 c.a.o C A1
20 c.a.o C A1
5
(i) 20 × 50 F C1
1000 F A1
(ii) ½ × 20 × 50 OR ½ × his(i) C C1
500 C A1
correct evaluation F A1
10
accelerates C B1
(b) longitudinal F B1
transverse C B1
transverse F B1
8 A magnet OR magnetised F B1
B magnet OR magnetised F B1
C iron OR unmagnetised C B1
D aluminium C B1
4
correct substitution F C1
10 F A1
(iii) 1. decreases F B1
B )
E ) (3 marks for any 3)
A ) (2 marks for any 2) 3C B3
D ) (1 mark for any 1) 9
24 c.a.o F A1
Ω OR ohm C B1
(ii) 1. decreases F B1
(iii) virtual C B1
6 (a) aluminum F B1
copper F B1
gold F B1
(b) insulator NOT non-conductor F B1
(c) (i) copper OR aluminum OR gold F B1
(ii) any of the insulators F B1
(d) convection F B1
(e) intelligent mention of convection currents C B1
(accept “to make sure always covered by water”
NOT “heat rises”)
8
7 (a) (i) speed = distance/time in any form F C1
correct substitution in his equation OR 1600/5 F C1
320 c.a.o. F A1
(ii) light travels instantaneously/very fast OR
reference to reaction time
NOT just faster than sound C B1
(b) explosion heard sooner/less than 5s )
second sound/echo/reflection (from ) any 2 B1,
2C
rock face) ) B1
louder )
6
8 repulsion F B1
repulsion F B1
attraction F B1
attraction C B1
attraction C B1
5
9 (a) (i) 3 )
F B1
3 ) both
(ii) 10 + 10 F C1
20 F A1
(b) (i) 1 1.5A ticked F B1
2 3A OR 3.0A C B1
(ii) 5 Ω ticked C B1
6
10 (a) electrons F B1
(b) neutrons OR atoms F B1
(c) electrons F B1
(d) electrons F B1
(e) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
(f) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
8
11 (a) (i) A or E F B1
(ii) CE or AC or 2.5 cm F B1
(b) real )
) B1,
inverted ) mark in pairs using ✓ + ✗ = 0 2f, 1C B1,
) B1
enlarged )
(c) any ray from 0’ to I’ refracting at mid-line of lens or
F B1
refractions at both surfaces
6
MARK
[4]
2 (a) distance/time C1
25/2 C1
12.5 A1
m/s B1
[6]
3 (a) skate M1
4 (a) 40 or 160 B1
(b) 720 B1
(c) W=Fxd C1
720 x 0.2 C1
144 A1
J OR joule B1
(d) his(c)/1.2 C1
[10]
(b) air has expanded (could be scored in (a), but not twice)
OR Kinetic Theory application to pressure B1
[7]
[6]
[6]
9 (a) 1 correct C1
2 correct C1
4 correct A1
(iii) both B1
(iv) 0.5 B1
(v) current stops OR ammeters read zero OR other bulb goes out B1
[8]
10 (a) 10 x 4 x 6.5 C1
260 (cm3) A1
0.96 ecf A1
[7]
11 (a) electrons B1
(b) A B1
(c) (i) D B1
[7]
12 (a) (i) time taken for (B0 for half the time) B1
activity/count-rate/mass etc. B1
(b) (i) 80 – 25 C1
55 cao A1
2. 52.5 ecf B1
(iii) 15 ± 1 ecf B1
[12]
TARGET
GRADE MARK
1 (a) larger area F B1
smaller pressure F B1
3 (a) P and Q F B1
(b) R and S F B1
(ii) 57.5/25 C C1
2.3 C A1
g/cm3 C B1
6
(c) potential F B1
(d) chemical C B1
7
(ii) red C B1
(iii) violet C B1
(allow B1,B0 if red and violet both written but interchanged) 6
(b) repulsive F B1
(ii) disappears F B1
5
9 (a) strontium-90 F M1
decays most slowly OR longest half-life F A1
(b) (i) points correctly plotted ± ½ small square -1 each error or omission 3F B3
(ii) filament F B1
(iv) line along axis (by eye) OR conical beam along axis F B1
(b) 75/2.5 C C1
30 (m/s) C A1
(c) accelerated F B1
12 L1 joined to R3 or R1 F B1
L2 joined to R4 F B1
L4 joined to R1 F B1
3
1 (a) 55 (s) B1
3 (a) OP accelerating B1
PQ accelerating B1
QR constant speed B1
RS slowing down (however expressed) B1
(b) O and S (both) B1
(c) 6 (m/s) B1
(d) 70 (s) B1
(ii) conduction B1
© UCLES 2006
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 2
(ii) F1 + F 2 + W B1
(iii) F B1
6
correct substitution C1
© UCLES 2006
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 2
(ii) (group) 2 B1
charge B1
experiences a force B1
7
9 (a) good straight line through first 5 points, drawn with a rule B1
(c) 67 – 40 C1
27 (mm) A1
11 (a) 92 B1
(c) 146 B1
(d) nucleus B1
(e) decreases M1
by 2 A1
6
© UCLES 2006
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 2
© UCLES 2006
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 02
TARGET MARK
GRADE
(c) 4 minutes 20 s F B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 02
(b) greater F B1
the same F B1
(b) molecules breaking free (of surface) NOT turns into a gas F M1
mention of higher energy/faster/mols near surface C A1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 02
8 (a) 50 F B1
(ii) 12 (Ω) F B1
(ii) C or clear mark positioned below A but not lower than bottom of C B1
the word contact”
allow e.c.f. only if 6 and 0 in (i) are reversed
[Total: 12]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 02
11 (a) dot to right of S: horiz. line from end/pole, to right (must not curve) F B1
dot to left of N: horiz. line from end/pole, to left (must not curve) F B1
dot by top LH corner: smooth curve from end/pole, above magnet,
to equivalent point at south end F B1
dot below magnet: smooth curve between N and S F M1
curve leaving & entering side of magnet, not ends C A1
[Total: 6]
(b) protons: 11 F B1
neutrons: 13 C B1
electrons: same as his protons F B1
(c) (i) 0 C B1
(ii) -1 C B1
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 02
1 (a) 60 (cm3) B1
(c) less B1
[Total: 4]
(c) decreases M1
air expands OR density decreases A1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 02
(ii) arrow labelled F, down slope, between either boat and slipway B1
[Total: 6]
o
5 (a) C B1
[Total: 5]
(ii) 9 (m/s) B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 02
(ii) circle centred on X, outside printed circle (circle need not be drawn
with a compass, but must be carefully drawn) M1
diameter 4.5 cm by eye A1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 02
[Total: 8]
[Total: 4]
12 (a) electrons B1
(b) move M1
towards P1 A1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 02
(ii) Centre of mass at centre of rod anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘i’
and the and a line vertically above the left hand ‘1’ in ‘Fig. 1.1’, anywhere across
diameter including the surface but NOT outside the surface [B1]
(b) Centre of mass clearly to left of centre, inside the rod [M1]
anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘t’ in ‘to’ and a line vertically above the ‘t’
in the first ‘the’ AND on axis (by eye) [A1]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) (i) suitable scale, probably 5 small squares = 10 s, no awkward ratios [B1]
[Total: 10]
anticlockwise: F1 [B1]
F2 [B1]
(b) c [M1]
clockwise moment (accept moment on RH side) was too big [A1]
reduce moment by reducing distance [A1]
note: moment must be mentioned in both of the last 2 marks; accept turning effect,
torque and leverage as alternatives to moment
(c) any value bigger than 29 g and less than 30 g, but NOT 29 g or 30 g [B1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 02
[Total: 4]
[Total: 6]
(a) straight ray through centre of lens (±1 mm on axis by eye) (ignore any arrows) [B1]
(ii) (condone image not labelled if it is clear where it is; condone image labelled as
‘object’ if image line clearly drawn)
image located at his intersection, even if intersection of incorrect rays [C1]
image drawn between axis and his intersection, and not beyond either [A1]
(c) clear indication of screen at candidate’s image, using vertical line [B1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 02
7 (a) gas )
solid ) any 1 correct [B1]
liquid ) remaining 2 both correct [B1]
i.e. gas, solid, liquid: 2 marks gas, liquid, solid: 1 mark liquid, solid, gas: 1 mark
liquid, gas, solid: 0 marks solid, liquid, gas: 0 marks solid, gas, liquid: 1 mark
(ii) idea that molecules/particles gain energy OR move faster (condone ‘vibrating’) [B1]
idea of molecules/particles becoming gaseous/breaking free [B1]
(iii) boiling, at one temperature only AND evaporation at any temperature [B1]
boiling throughout liquid AND evaporation at surface only [B1]
(ii) 660 (°C) allow 659 (°C) NOT –660 (°C) [B1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) (i) 1 ice point OR freezing point of water OR melting point of ice NOT just ‘freezing
point’ [B1]
2 ice OR freezing water [B1]
pure or melting or ice-water mix [B1]
3 0 (°C) OR 273 K OR 273 °K [B1]
(b) thermal capacity OR heat capacity, allow specific heat capacity [B1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 02
(b) D A C B all 4 in correct order (allow B1 for any 2 in correct place) [B2]
(c) (note: mark 1 and 2 together) (1 mark max from any one line below)
too great a current might flow )
fuse might not melt NOT fuse won’t work ) any 2 [B1,B1]
fuse won’t protect OR appliance might be damaged )
wiring might overheat/melt or equivalent )
fire might be caused )
NOT circuit broken, NOT short circuit, NOT electric shock
[Total: 5]
(b) voltmeter correctly shown between X and Y (or equivalent), must be correct symbol [B1]
[Total: 11]
(ii) idea of straightening out ABC OR rotate ABC (on its axis)
OR connect G across AB or CB [B1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 02
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 02
2 (a) L×B×H C1
2 × 1.5 × 1 C1
3 (m3) A1
(b) M=V×D C1
3000 (kg) e.c.f. A1
correct units in both (a) and (b) B1 [6]
(iii) increases B1
4 (a) radio OR TV B1
ultra-violet B1
(d) red B1
violet (NOT blue, purple, mauve) B1 [8]
© UCLES 2008
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 02
(ii) distance/time C1
his(i)/1.6 C1
300 (m/s) e.c.f. A1
(b) i=r B1
© UCLES 2008
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 02
(c) attract B1
9 (a) a B1
(b) B B1
(c) I = V/R C1
6/4 A1
1.5 A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
(d) connection 2 B1
both receive full voltage OR both run at full brightness B1
if one blows/switched off, other will continue working B1 [9]
© UCLES 2008
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 02
11 (a) core B1
(b) a.c. B1
12 (a) 84 B1
(b) 218 B1
(c) (i) 2 B1
(ii) 4 B1
allow both marks for interchanged answers for (i) and (ii),
if answers to (a) and (b) were interchanged
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 02
1 (a) 35 B1
weight ÷ mass
3 (a) 1500 B1
4 (a) 88 – 92 B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 02
(c) (i) 12 – 14 B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 02
(iii) V B1
(iv) none B1
(b) S S N B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 02
9 Apply max 1 un. pen. in (a) and (b) together. Apply at first instance of unit penalty.
(a) (i) 6 V B1
(ii) 50 mA OR 0.05 A B1
(d) (i) infinite OR very large (if figure quoted, must be [25 A)
NOT just “higher” B1
(ii) 0.036 – 0.038 OR his correct value ± 0.0005 (B0 if ridiculous scale) B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 02
11 For (a), (b) and (c), mark the names, not the box
(d) battery shown connected across heater filament, any recognisable symbol
ignore extra wires if it would work B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 02
[Total: 4]
(d) weight /mass (of athlete) AND height/distance (of bar) B1 [1]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 02
[Total: 7]
[Total: 8]
6 (a) same B1
greater at B B1
greater at B B1 [3]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) q B1 [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 02
(b) first M1
second one suffers absorption,dispersion A1 [2]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 11]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 02
11 no exposed wires )
)
no worn insulation )
)
no loose wires/connections )
)
no short circuits )
) any 3
plug correctly wired )
)
any idea about continuity check )
)
no sharp bends in cable ) B1 x 3 [3]
[Total: 3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 21
(ii) distance = speed × time in this form only, words, letters or numbers C1
66 × 20 OR 66 × ⅓ OR 66 × 20/60 C1
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 21
(b) Y marked anywhere to right of X, but not beyond R.H. tip of parrot B1
© UCLES 2010
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 21
(ii) radiation B1
8 (a) 10 (cm) B1
(ii) idea of cord insulating you from electricity OR cord not a conductor
OR idea of separates you from the electrics/live parts B1
© UCLES 2010
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 21
10 (a) V1/V2 or N1/N2 or V1/N1 or V2/N2 in any form Allow full credit for use C1
substitution correct and seen of 25 turns to give 12V, M1
25 turns with working seen
A1
Y and Z (either order) B1
(c) core B1
iron NOT steel B1
(ii) idea that radiation (from watch) can enter the body B1
© UCLES 2010
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 21
(ii) 6 × 5 × 2 ecf C1
60 (cm3) ecf A1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) tidal B1
wave B1
hydroelectric accept waterfall B1
(any order)
[Total: 6]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 21
(b) gamma B1
(c) radio B1
(d) alpha B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) conduction B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 21
9 (a) (i) N at left end and S at right end (inside or outside magnet outline) M1
both N and S within magnet outline A1
(iii) nothing B1
(b) (i) pass current through coil/wire OR connect a battery across coil B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) parallel B1
(d) parallel B1
[Total: 8]
(b) (i) S and M on door and frame (either way) so they would be next to each other when door
closed B1
S on frame and M on door edge/door face close to edge B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 21
12 (a) yes B1
yes B1
no B1
(b) nucleus B1
(ii) 8 ± 1 (mins) C1
108 ± 1 (mins) C1
100 ± 2 (mins) e.c.f. if working shown A1
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2011 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(c) reduce/prevent heat coming in from outside NOT cold getting out B1
reduce/prevent conduction NOT convection/radiation B1
(d) idea that heat gained from outside = heat removed by refrigeration unit B2
allow B1 for idea of thermostatic control [7]
6 (a) ray bent down at 1st surface, but not beyond/along normal B1
ray bent down at 2nd surface, but not beyond/along surface B1
MAX 1 mark if any suggestion of a spectrum shown
(b) spot/dot/line AND of one colour accept a single named colour e.g. red B1
(b) 2 complete cycles, any shape (if full-wave rectified, must be 4 humps) B1
cyclical and equal amplitude above & below axis B1
uniform spacing B1
intention of sinusoidal shape accept sinusoidal full-wave rectification B1 [6]
(b) (i) S2 OR 2
any 1 correct B1
(ii) S1 OR 1 ignore mention of S2 B2
all 3 correct B2
(iii) S3 OR 3 ignore mention of S1 and/or S2
(ii) 84 ± 1 (s) B1
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2011 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures
specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1 (a) (i) BC B1
(ii) AB B1
2 (a) tape measure OR trundle wheel OR laser measure IGNORE metre rule B1
5 (a) 150 × 3 C1
450 (Hz) A1
6 (a) ultrasound B1
(iii) infra-red B1
(ii) freely suspend/pivot and see which end points N (or equivalent)
OR see which end is repelled by N pole of a magnet B1
(b) 4+ smooth curves leaving one end and going to the other (ignore any arrows) B1
no lines crossing or meeting, even at ends B1 [6]
(ii) power supply connected between filament & anode (no e.c.f.) B1
(ii) 2 half-lives C1
(candidate’s 2 – candidate’s 1)/2 C1
7.5–8.6 (days) e.c.f. A1 [8]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 21 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2012 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
2 (a) 84 – 53 C1
31 (cm3) A1
(ii) idea of unbalanced force e.g. forward force > backward force
NOT just forward force is bigger A1
[Total: 7]
(ii) increases B1
[Total: 6]
6 (a) EITHER
ray from tip of object through optical centre of lens M1
straight on after lens A1
OR
ray from tip of object through F2 and on to lens M1
parallel to axis after lens A1
(d) smaller B1
closer to lens/to the left B1
[Total: 8]
7 (a) infra-red B1
(b) infra-red B1
(c) X-rays B1
(d) microwaves B1
[Total: 4]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2012 0625 21
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
1 (a) moment/torque
ignore turning force B1
(c) kinetic B1
ignore heat
(b) (i) blue light refracted from same point at first surface B1
blue shown with greater refraction B1
blue light always below red light B1
(c) (i) two resistors shown in parallel (accept any symbol here) B1
condone faint lines through resistors (where attempted to rub out wire)
(ii) increases/higher/greater M1
condone greater than zero
any indication of gradual increase A1
(c) remains the same OR decreases/goes back to zero (very) slowly i.e. ignore B1 [5]
decreases/getting smaller on their own.
10 (a) copper B1
(b) core B1
(c) (10mm) lead / Pb stops all β OR only γ gets through (10 mm) lead / Pb B1
still some count rate with lead / Pb B1 [6]
240 240
(c) (i) 94 Pu OR Pu OR 94 B1
250 250
(ii) 98 Cf OR 98 NOT just Cf B1 [6]
(ii) Some of the heat supplied does not end up in the water 1
Takes longer for same temperature rise 1
More heat supplied in longer time 1
7
1
3 (a) Scale, full size 1
Line at object height, refracted through lens to pass through focus 1
Ray through focus produced back to pass through “3 cm line” 1
Line through centre to locate object and image 1
Distance of object from lens, 2.5 cm to 2.9 cm 1
Distance of image from lens ,7.5 cm to 8.7 cm 1
6
(c)(i) Equation E = V It or = V q 1
E = 10000 x 2.1 x 600 (J) 1
7
= 1.3x10 (J) 1
(ii) Equation P = E/t 1
7
P = 1.3 x l0 /600 1
4
2.1 x 10 (W) 1
6
5 (a)(i) lonisation means creating positively charged and negatively charged ions 1
from the air molecules between the gauze and the wire 1
The wire and the gauze are charged, one positively and the other negatively 1
The ionised air molecules (atoms) move to the opposite charge 1
Create a “surge” of current seen as a spark 1
(ii) Alpha, a huge amount, any quoted figures 1
2
Beta, a small amount compared to alpha, any quoted figures 1
Gamma, virtually none at all 1
6 (max)
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory November 1999
1 (a)(i) PE (for one fall) is mgh 1
= (200 x 10 x 6) 1
= 12 000 J 1
(ii) PE (lost) = KE (on impact) or v = 2gh or s = 2at 1
12000(J) or answer to (i) = _ mv or v = 2 x 10 x 6 or t = 1.1 s 1
v = 120 or v = gt 1
v = l0.95 or 11 m/s 1
7
1
4 (a) any 2 from:
random
collides with or bounces off sides
hits or bounces off other molecules
other relevant points/explanations 2
2
(b) velocity/speed/wavelength 1
increases at F,decreases at D 1
2
o
(c) correct angle marked / value 45 2
2
o
(d) refractive index = 1/sin 45 1
= 1.4(1) 1
2
2
(c)(i) use of VIt 1
= 19(.2) J 1
(ii) resistance = 1.2/0.4 1
= 3 ohm 1
4
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory November 2000
1 (a) downward force through centre of mass 1
upward force along wire 1
downward force/weight = 5 N 1
upward force/tension = 5 N 1
4
(c)(i) copper 1
(ii) small increase in length per degree/high melting point etc 1
2
(b) use of F = pA 1
(= 45 000 x 0.015) = 680 N 1
2
(b) 20s 1
1
(d)(i) yes
(ii) no 1
1
(c) any two of: bigger movements / faster movements / air molecules faster 2
2
1
= 3.3 1
J/(g K) 1
5 (max)
(b)(i) any two of: heat lost to atmosphere / temperature rise less / bigger by
reference to equation 2
(ii) any one of: lagging / lid etc 1
3
(b)(i) pressure varies along sound wave / some particles closer than others 1
(ii) very few particles at P / P is a rarefaction 1
(iii) many particles at Q / Q is a compression 1
2 (max)
(d) 40 mm 1
1
(c) energy = l x l x R x t or V x l x t 1
= 0.6 x 0.6 x 5 x 20 1
= 36 J 1
3
2
(ii) no change in magnetic field 1
energy not transferred from primary to secondary 1
5 (max)
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory October/November 2001
1 (a)(i) 10 m/s 1
(ii) 14 s 1
(iii) (distance is area under graph ) = 140 m 1
3
3 (a) ruler on pivot with one mass hanger on each side of the pivot 1
ruler, pivot and masses labelled 1
2
(b) any indication that masses and lengths from pivot measured 1
any indication of adjustment to achieve balance 1
2
1
(c)(i) sensitivity, change in length / volume per degree or similar 1
(ii) range, lowest (temperature measured) to highest (large) or similar 1
(iii) linear scale, same distance between all degree intervals or similar 1
3
7 (a) A and B joined by (straight) line, all above the centre line 1
exterior loop A to B 1
arrow (internal) A to B and
arrow (external) B to A or one or more correct arrows on the loop 1
3
(b) attempt to use parallel resistance formula or Ohm’s law on full circuit 1
resistance = 64 ohm 2
3
(d)(i) any point e.g. lamps require 240 V or voltage divided in series 1
one reference to values worked out by candidate 1
(ii) parallel circuit / switch in each line affects only 1 lamp etc 2
4
2
(b)(i) curve to positive 1
(ii) electron charge negative 1
negative attracted to positive 1
3
3
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003 0625 3
(c) at S - stronger B1
at T - same (strength) B1
at W - same (strength) B1 3
[8]
TOTAL 80
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003 0625 3
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004 0625 3
2 (a) 750 N A1 1
8 (a) 1.52 kW A1 1
(b) Push magnet into coil / pull out / move near end of coil B1 1
(d) (i) Pull magnet out of coil / reverse effect to answer (b) B1
(ii) Move magnet faster or effect in (a) faster B1 2
[7]
(c) (mass) 4 B1 1
[6]
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
(Extended Theory)
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – November 2004 0625 3
(ii) 1.
rebound/bounce back or many hits per unit area or per unit
time or collisions create force 1
2.
(av) k.e./speed of molecules increases 1
more hits(/sec) or harder hits 1 5
(b) (i) 1
10(Ω)
(ii) 2(Ω) 1 2
(ii) 6(V) 1 2
(7)
9 (a) (i) two coils on continuous core (not allow coils joined) 1
primary coil to 240 V, secondary coil to 6 V 1
iron core, primary/input and secondary/output labelled 1
(iii) 5/6 cm 1
IGCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
Extended
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – JUNE 2005 0625 3
(d) (i) split rings and brushes or equivalent (e.g. leaning wires) B1
(ii) every half turn current passes from one ring to the other B1
so current flows opposite way around coil or commutates B1 3
[8]
(c) (i) 2N B1
left B1
(ii) F = ma or 2 = 0.5 a C1
a = 4.0 m/s2 A1 [4]
Total [10]
(c) 0.5 N B1
downwards B1 [2]
Total [6]
4 (a) turn on heater and wait until water starts dripping in beaker B1
empty beaker & replace, start watch B1
stop watch & remove beaker at same time B1
record time B1
find and record mass of water in beaker B1 [M4]
(c) (i) ice gains heat from surroundings/ice falls through funnel B1
(ii) virtual B1
any one of upright, same size, same distance from mirror B1
[4]
(b) (i) ray 1 correct B1
ray 2 correct B1
image correctly located B1
(c) q = It or 0.06 = I x 30 C1
I = 0.002 A or 2 mA A1 [2]
(d) E = Vit C1
= 1500 x 0.008 x 10 C1
= 120 J A1 [3]
Total [9]
10 (a) (i) a.c. input causes constantly changing current through coil B1
magnetic field formed in or around coil B1
constantly changing magnetic field B1 [M2]
[8]
(ii) 6V A1 2
(ii) 4 ohm A1 2
[9]
(c) (i) 18 W A1
(ii) 540 J A1 2
[8]
[Total: 11]
[Total: 5]
(c) some p.e. changed to heat/sound/either one/work done against air resistance air/resistance acts
against the motion B1 [1]
[Total: 6]
(c) outline correct, two wires with clear junction and a meter/datalogger/computer M1
labels, hot and cold junctions or clear, two different metals A1 [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2006
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 03
[Total: 6]
(e) angle of incidence = 45°, so angle of reflection = 45°, so ray turns through 90°
OR angle i> angle c B1
so totally internally reflects B1 [2]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 6]
(e) (i) parallel circuit/all lamps connected separately across the 12V B1
(ii) 4A A1 [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2006
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 03
[Total: 8]
(b) C B1 [1]
[Total: 6]
(ii) much greater mass or size/slower speed/more ion pairs/cm/larger charge B1 [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2006
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 03
[Total: 10]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 03
[Total: 6]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 03
(ii) dull black box temp > white box temp OR black is hotter etc. B1 [1]
(b) (i) large expansion/change in reading for small change in temp B1 [1]
NOT detect/respond to small temp changes
(ii) temperature rise small and/or small difference between them B1 [1]
[Total: 6]
6 (a) (i) refracted ray, angle < i, emergent ray approx parallel to incident B1
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 03
7 (a) source of sound (e.g. gun/hooter), tape (100 m), stopwatch B1 [1]
NOT clock, metre rule (unless lab method)
(b) distance and time between “flash and bang” (must be clear) B1 [1]
[Total: 6]
(iv) 1080 J e.c.f. from (i) & (ii) if working shown B1 [1]
© UCLES 2007
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 03
(d) brushes connect to other split ring every half turn/coil vertical B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 03
1 (a) (i) 1.6s to 1.8s ALLOW 4.2 – 6s ALLOW 4.4 – 6s NOT 2s NOT 4.0 – 6s B1
(ii) 6 – his (i), evaluated ALLOW 0 – 4.2s ALLOW 0 – 4.4s NOT 0 – 4s e.c.f. B1
[Total: 11]
(b) (PE lost =) 1.2 × 0.5 OR 0.6 (J) OR 0.12 × 10 × 0.5 OR mgh OR wt × dist C1
i.e. evidence of mgh
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 03
[Total: 5]
(c) 75 × 3200 OR ml C1
240 000 J OR 240 kJ OR 2.4 × 105J A1
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 03
(iii) lens image enlarged AND mirror image same size c.a.o.
OR (different) size OR (different) distance OR different side B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 03
(ii) 24W B1
[Total: 10]
current/e.m.f caused B1
(b) solenoid ends connected to meter/lamp note: any sign of a cell gets B0 B1
magnet indicated in suitable position on axis of solenoid B1
© UCLES 2007
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 03
[Total: 6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
First variant Mark Scheme
(iii) 15 m/s B1
(b) (plastic ball larger so) upward force/air resistance/drag more (or vice versa for rubber ball)
IGNORE wind resistance B1
rubber ball, this force not big enough to balance weight/gravity (force) B1
plastic ball, upward force/air resistance big enough to balance/equal weight/gravity
(force) B1
2 (a) fusion (of nuclei) CARE: NOT fission or fision ACCEPT fussion B1
condone radiation as an extra
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
6 (a) (for all rays, ignore any arrows, -1 for each incorrect extra ray)
correct ray through F1 ± 1mm on axis )
)
correct ray through F2 ± 1mm on axis ) any 2 B1, B1
)
ray through lens centre ± 1mm on axis )
image drawn between his intersection and axis B1
mirror:
equally spaced reflected waves, approx. same spacing as incident (by eye) B1
IGNORE reflected waves to left of arrowhead
correct angle to surface, by eye B1
block:
reduced wavelength in block B1
ACCEPT refracted waves to left of arrowhead
at sensible angle of refraction B1
CONDONE reflected waves shown as well as refracted
one switch for 2 lights in living room AND one for bathroom
AND one for bedroom B1
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
10 (a) correct symbol, must show 3 connections, condone rounded “nose”, ignore width of the
shape, allow OR gate followed by NOT gate, correctly drawn B1
(b) if truth table is shown, mark the truth table and ignore the rest
either input 1, output 0 AND both inputs 1, output 0 B1
both inputs 0, output 1 accept high/low, on/off for both B1
(ii) 1. on B1
2. off B1
[6]
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
(b) alpha, beta, gamma words or symbols, any order NOT gamma particles B1
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
(ii) 8.35 × 105 Pa OR his (a)(i) + 1.0 × 105 accept N/m2 for Pa B1
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
(b) air molecules hit dust particles in all directions/move it in all directions B1
just as likely to be up as down B1
(allow marks scored on diagram)
5 (a) (i) funnel no longer giving heat to ice OR ice at M.P./constant temp
OR heater reached max temp B1
(c) ray at angle >30° and <60° to normal, by eye, correct way NO e.c.f. B1
Ignore any angles or labelling
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
8 (a) changes a.c. to d.c. OR rectifies a/c OR allows current to flow one way only
OR prevents current flowing backward B1
(c) I2R B1
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
© UCLES 2008
First variant Mark Scheme
(b) steel M1
(steel) expands at same rate / has same expansion (as concrete) A1
different expansion AND cracks / breaks / damages / destroys concrete A1 [4]
(b) (i) decreases OR acceleration slows (down) NOT ‘it slows down’ C1
© UCLES 2009
First variant Mark Scheme
(ii) [If ecf from (i) and no other errors, maximum mark is 2]
mass: ½ OR correct sub in ½mv2 C1
speed: ½ OR 6750 (J) C1
fraction = ⅛ / 0.125 / 1:8 ? 12.5 % (c.a.o.) A1 [10]
(ii) 84 N OR 84.0 N B1
7 (a) Total penalty for use of ‘particles’ rather than ‘molecules’ is 1 mark.
© UCLES 2009
First variant Mark Scheme
(b) air: light travels faster in less dense medium OR air: air is less dense / rarer B1
(c) 42°–43° B1
© UCLES 2009
First variant Mark Scheme
(ii) 12 V B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 31
(b) 2.73 mm B1
[5]
(c) good straight line through origin and candidate’s remaining points B1
© UCLES 2009
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 31
[8]
(b) changes direction / causes acceleration / stops straight line motion / keeps object
from leaving circle / keeps path circular / pulls object into circle B1
(ii) ma OR 60 × 2.5 C1
150 N A1
(iv) same as his (c) (i) 2 accept 600 N if no value given in (c) (i) 2. B1
[8]
(b) (P =) E/t C1
360/60 C1
6W 352.8 J gives 5.88 W 353.16 J gives 5.886 W (minimum 2 s.f.) A1
[6]
© UCLES 2009
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 31
(ii) no change B1
(iv) increases B1
[12]
7 (a) EITHER OR
copper constantan
copper constantan
constantan copper B1
[3]
(b) any two standard rays correctly drawn (no extrapolation needed) B1
correct rays extrapolated back to intersect B1
virtual image drawn at candidate’s intersection of extrapolated rays
(condone no I, if clear) B1
[4]
© UCLES 2009
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 31
(iii) 1512 = 0.05 × c × 77.1 in any form e.c.f. from (c) (i) and/or (c) (ii) C1
392 J/kg K (N.B. must be to 3 sf ; A0 for wrong s.f.) e.c.f. A1
[10]
© UCLES 2009
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 31
[10]
(b) (accept 1 or ON for HIGH, and 0 or OFF or NOT HIGH for LOW throughout)
(c) (i) B cannot provide enough power / current for lamp, or equiv.
OR allows remote lamp B1
(ii) the second one / dark and warm / HIGH, HIGH e.c.f. from (b) B1
(iii) warning if temperature in a closed / dark space (e.g. refrigerator, kiln) reaches
too high a value
N.B. “to switch on a lamp when it is dark and warm” not accepted B1
[8]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 31
(d) chemical B1
(e) idea of energy loss / heat / sound / inefficiency / energy used within car /
possibility of increase in P.E. Ignore work done against against friction B1 [7]
3 (a) 2nd statement re-written to include force in first gap and inversely
proportional to mass in second gap. NOT indirectly proportional B1
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 31
on black side or on left greater expansion of air / greater pressure of air B1 [4]
5 (a) energy / heat required to change state / phase / any example of change of
state / phase M1
(b) any time or range of time between 1.6 (min) and 14.0 (min) inclusive [no UP] B1
(iii) reduced B1
© UCLES 2010
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 31
(c)
(c)
light waves sound waves
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
–1 e.e.o.o. i.e. 1 mark subtracted from 3 for each error or omission B3 [9]
© UCLES 2010
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 31
8A A1 [10]
© UCLES 2010
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31 Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to
score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
Final If the final answer to a numerically worked question is correct, with the correct unit and
answers an acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are awarded.
The points which could have gained C marks need not be examined, even if wrong.
Ecf means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by ecf. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind any earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question.
No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly
in the working.
Arithmetic Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is an arithmetic one.
errors
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by the mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
(b) 98 N – 102 N B1
(accept value found by calculation)
[Total: 6]
(b) (i) if no force, then constant velocity in straight line OR force is needed
to change direction B1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
(c) (i) 1212.9 or 1200 or 1210 or 1213 or 1214 J/(kg °C) or J/(kg K) B1
[Total: 10]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
(b) v = fλ OR λ = v/f B1
3.0 × 108/2.5 × 108 OR 3.0 x 108 = 2.5 × 108 λ C1
1.2 m A1
[Total: 6]
8 (a) capacitor/capacitance/condenser B1
(b) (i) 5 Ω B1
(c) EITHER OR
ammeter reading falls (to zero) no current/reading M1
[Total: 10]
(iii) idea that each electron leaves behind an equal unbalanced proton
in nucleus/B has no net charge/B is neutral/idea that B has not
gained or lost any charges B1
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 31
B gamma OR γ M1
gamma undeflected (by magnetic field) A1
uncharged/neutral OR electromagnetic radiation A1
C beta OR β B1
deflection is big/more deflection than alpha B1
low mass/much smaller than alpha B1
OR
beta OR β B1
negative B1
deflects according to left-hand rule B1
[Total: 10]
a.c. supply alternating trace, any shape one or more cycles, at least
4 squares wide M1
above and below centre line, need not be symmetrical A1
a.c. supply only humps or only troughs seen, minimum 2 humps or troughs
+ diode M1
horizontal lines, approximately same width as humps or troughs,
separating humps or troughs A1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 31
11 (a) (i) 4 Ω B1
A2 = ¼A1 OR A2 = 0.25A1 C1
R2 = (0.45/0.3) × R1 OR (3/2) x R1 C1
⅜ OR 0.375 OR 37.5 % A1
OR
R = ρL/A OR R ∝ L/A OR R ∝ L and R ∝ 1/A or 1/d2 or 1/r2 C1
Ratio: L of thinner wire / L of thicker wire = 6.0 / 16 = 3/8 = 0.375 = 37.5 % A1 [8]
© UCLES 2010
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical May 1999
1 (a) Accurately drawn straight lines passing through all the relevant points 1
Pencil work, neat with thin lines not thicker than (circle line) 1
Correct labels 1
o o o
(b) Using candidate’s lines, d and e to nearest degree, d = 86 and e = 14 ± 1 2
(c) Candidate’s value accurate to 2 / 3 s.f. {6. 14} 1
(d)(i) E on reflected ray beyond P4 1
(ii) To prevent light from objects “behind” I reaching the eye {at E} 1
8
5 (a)(i) Correct axes (h along y axis) labelled and with suitable scales 1
All plots to nearest 1/3 small square 1
Good line judgement. neat and thin line 1
(ii) Candidate uses the graph values correctly 1
(b) any two from:
reduces the chance of error / mentions parallax / reading can easily be
repeated or checked by someone else / can be made rigid allowing reading
1
to be taken at leisure 2
(c) So that the straw moves freely in the water / effect of meniscus on straw
always the same 1
(d) Straw would stick to the side of the container at the top of the meniscus 1
8
2
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31 Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2011 0625 31
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate’s answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question.
(b) (i) candidate’s correct value with unit (± 0.2), (expect 1.2 N) B1
(c) Correct data from candidates graph for ∆F and ∆m, used in ∆F/∆m B1
(ii) candidate’s (i) + 1.0 × 105 Pa correctly evaluated with unit (correct value
2.2 × 105) B1
special case: heaters in series with supply and one switch shorting out one
resistor AND another switch in series with supply B2 [6]
6 (a) A and C B1
(iii) idea of insignificant change in activity during stated time up to 5 × 109 years
OR experiment time insignificant c.f. 1.4 × 1010 years OR long half life
OR long time to decay B1 [4]
7 (a) idea of fine ray/beam shone into (glass) block / pins appropriately placed
shown in diagram or described B1
angles i & r or C measured OR correct i & r or C marked on diagram B1
sini/sinr OR sinr/sini OR 1/sinC OR sinC B1
n = speed in air/speed in glass OR c/v = sini/sinr OR n = 1/sinC OR c/v = 1/sinC B1
(b) (i) bends easily/less likely to break (ignore stronger) OR smaller pixels/
more detail/greater resolution/see smaller objects/wider field of view B1
(ii) (E=) VIt OR VQ in any form, words, symbols, numbers (accept t=5s) C1
190 J OR candidate’s I × 100 000 correctly evaluated A1 [9]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31 Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2011 0625 31
M marks are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate
fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks: are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s
answers.
A marks In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final
numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally
awarded.
It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong
approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C
marks on their merits.
C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be
scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it.
For example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down
the actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew
the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two points which contradict each
other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may
in particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf
may be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the
earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a
particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general,
accept numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be
right.
Units Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per
question. No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is
shown correctly in the working.
Arithmetic errors Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one.
Transcription Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
errors previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
energy changes:
PE to KE matched to a process B1
KE to electricity energy for turbine / power station B1
4 (a) surfaces shown at realistic levels in dish and tube AND vertical height h between
levels clearly shown B1
top label: vacuum / mercury vapour B1
bottom label: mercury B1
(ii) because change of pressure (also) causes volume change (in a gas) B1
NOT ‘gas can be compressed’
(ii) make (capillary) tube narrower (and longer) / thinner / smaller diameter B1
make bulb larger (and tube longer) B1
allow ‘bore’ for tube ignore ‘smaller’ ignore narrow thermometer
(ii) ray with smaller angle of refraction than red in block i.e. violet ray under red ray B1
emerging ray parallel to incident ray B1 [9]
(ii) 7 V B1
(b) to switch on a warning light when temperature (required for a process) becomes
too low
OR to switch off a warning light when temperature (required for a process)
becomes high enough B1 [6]
example (e.g. freezer or incubator) not needed, but if given, explanation required
(b) (i) p.d. / voltage / battery / power supply applied between / across plates B1
upper plate positive and lower plate negative B1
(ii) sketch showing: straight vertical lines from top plate to bottom plate B1
arrows pointing downwards / from + to – B1 [8]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31 Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2012 0625 31
M marks are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score
a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to be scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s answers.
A marks In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions.
If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally
awarded.
It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong
approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C marks on
their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain all the
marks available.
C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be
scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities, accidental
or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction /
diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and does
not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be
awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier
mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular
mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Significant Figures
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Accept
answers that round to give the correct answer to 2 s.f. Any exceptions to this general rule
will be specified in the mark scheme.
Units Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from a final answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question. No
deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly in
the working.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic one.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
[Total: 5]
[Total: 8]
OR
½ mv2 = 1.61 OR
v2 = 2 × 1.61 / 0.14 = 23 OR v2 = 2 × 1.6 / 0.14 = 22.86 (C1)
(h =) v2/2g = 23/20 = 1.15 m OR (h =) 22.86/20 = 1.14 m (A1)
[Total: 9]
[Total: 7]
(ii) No change B1
[Total: 9]
(ii) Heat flows through glass to water OR Water receives heat / thermal energy
from / conducted by glass OR Water temperature rises OR Water molecules
move faster / gain K.E. B1
Water expands / Water molecules move further apart B1
[Total: 6]
(b) (i) At least 3 circular arcs, angular spread greater than 90° (symmetrically above
and below slit B1
Centre of arcs at centre of slit and with same spacing (by eye) as incident
waves B1
(ii) Diffraction B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 9]
9 (a) (i) I1 = I2 + I3 B1
(ii) I1 = I4 OR same B1
[Total: 9]
(b) (i) Geiger (counter) / Geiger (tube) (+ scaler / ratemeter) / photographic plate /
scintillation counter / cloud chamber / luminescent or phosphorescent plate B1
[Total: 6]
11 (a) Transistor B1
[Total: 6]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31 Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2012 0625 31
M marks are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to
score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s answers.
A marks In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final
numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally
awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely
wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C
marks on their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain
all the marks available.
C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be
scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities,
accidental or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection /
refraction / diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may
be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier
mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular
mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general, accept
numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be right.
Units Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question.
No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown
correctly in the working.
Arithmetic Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
errors one.
Transcription Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
errors previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
Crossed out Work which has been crossed out and not replaced but can easily be read, should
work be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
Use of NR (# key on the keyboard) Use this if the answer space for a question is completely blank
or contains no readable words, figures or symbols.
(b) Vectors towards East and North with arrows correct by eye B1
Complete triangle or rectangle for candidate’s vectors B1
Resultant with correct arrow B1
Resultant 94 to 96 m/s by scale OR 95 m/s by calculation *Unit penalty applies B1
Angle measured 13.5° – 15.5° OR 15° by calculation *Unit penalty applies B1 [6]
Either order
4 (a) (The point in the body) where (all) the mass / weight / gravity acts / appears to act B1
(owtte)
5 (a) (i) (Force exerted when) molecules hit wall / surface / solid (and rebound) B1
Allow (force) due to momentum change in collision
6 (a) Heat required to change state of / melt 1 kg / 1 g / unit mass of solid (with no
change of temperature) B1
8 (a) (i) Diagram to show – boundary, normal and ray bending towards normal B1
Angle of incidence labelled i or 51° B1
Angle of refraction labelled r or 29° B1
Both required
(c) (In fire) temperature of thermistor rises and its resistance falls B1
Current (through thermistor and relay coil) rises / flows B1
OR voltage / p.d. across / of relay coil rises
Magnetic field of relay closes switch (and bell rings) B1 [7]
(ii) beta or β
(iii) gamma or γ B2
Nucleus is positive / contains protons OR Nucleus has (all) the positive charge
of the atom
Nucleus is heavy OR Nucleus has most / all of the mass of the atom B2 [6]
Ignore neutrons
2 (a) Four acceptable symbols (i.e. can be found in text books) and in series 1
Power-supply polarity labelled, correct diode connection 1
Open switch 1
(b)(i) Polarity of ammeter compatible with diode connections 1
Ammeter anywhere in series with other components 1
(ii) Yes box ticked plus current is same at every point in circuit 1
(c)(i) 3/100 A, 0.03 A or 30mA (unit required) 1
(ii) no other resistance in circuit / 3 volt across 100 _ / max resistance
is 100 _ 1
8
4 (a)(i) reduce/prevent conduction of “heat” into (the solution) / insulates the can 1
(ii) produce a uniform temperature 1
(iii) assists in accurate temperature measurements 1
0
(b)(i) 18.7 or 18.8 C 1
8.9 or 9 1
unit with one of the three temperatures 1
(ii) Any ONE point from
assists accuracy
helps avoiding parallax
1
more certain when the thread reaches the scale division 1
(c) Take the reading with the line of sight perpendicular to the scale,
marked on a diagram 1
8
2
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical May/June 2000
3 (a) 0-10 1
(b) correct position (between 6.2 and 6.4) 1
(c)(i) 3.4 _ 1
(ii) 0.2 _ 1
(d) correct symbol 1
1
scales labelled with quantity or unit 1
all plots correct to nearest square 2
(ii) ABCD labelled 1
(iii) T increases, 1
increase is greatest for larger values of d 1
(d) 1.l (+) 1
increased range OR largest difference in T value with larger d values 1
11
2
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical November 2000
1 (a)(i) use metre rule (or other straight edge) held horizontally
at height of rule near clamp 1
and measure height from floor 1
(OR measure height from floor near clamp 2)
(i.e. appreciation that even without weight, free end of rule is depressed)
(ii) metre rule and some means to ensure it is vertical (e.g. set-square) 1
(iii) means to more easily locate reading on vertical rule
(e.g. short rule, set-square)
OR fixing vertical rule in clamp & stand
OR convincing avoidance of parallax (action AND reason) 1
NOTE: (i), (ii) and (iii) may be scored directly from the diagram(s).
(b)(i) Take time (t) for several oscillations (N)
Calculate T from t/N 1
(ii) stopclock / stopwatch 1
(iii) make N as large as possible
OR repeat readings 1
(iv) use of fiducial mark at centre of oscillation
OR explanation of what fiducial mark means
OR shown on diagram 1
(mere use of word fiducial is not sufficient)
8
1
OR use thermometer to measure temperature and adjust 1
(ii) use 50 g – measure on balance 1
(e) ensure temp same throughout liquid 1
8
(b)(i) 1.
1
2. move slider along line 1
3. to ensure good electrical contact 1
(ii) insulate 23 cm 1
correct end clear 1
OR
23cm
tape
7
5 (a) graph:
scales 1
labelled 1
plots correct to the nearest half square 2
line 1
(b)(i) y1 to the nearest half square 1
y2 to the nearest half square 1
ratios correct to 2/3 s.f. 1
(ii) force increases as separation decreases 1
x ratio is < 1; y ratio > 1 1
10
2
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical May/June 2001
1 (a) Graph:
Axes, labelled, y against x 1
Scales suitable 1
plots 6 correct 3
(OR 5 correct = 2, OR 4 correct = 1)
line judgement 1
string slipped on pulley / other sensible point 1
(b) lo and l1 clear and from same points 1
e = l1 – lo 1
9
o o o
2 a)(i) 7 C, 16 C, 12 C 2
C 1
(ii) lid 1
(iii) same volume / same initial temperature 1
(b)(i) A 1
(ii) would not have gone below room temperature 1
(iii) goes down to room temperature 1
8
1 (a)(i) Graph:,
3 (a)(i) h = 18(mm) 1
(ii) t = 1.2mm 1
(iii) correct arithmetic 1
unit 1
(iv) d correct arithmetic 1
2/3 s.f. 1
(b) mass on correct side 1
approximately twice as far from pivot (by eye)
(between 35 and 40) 1
8
1
use a third pin 2
(c)(i) 2.4 ± 0.1 cm 1
(ii) 6.8 ± 0.1 cm 1
(iii) n = 1.3 - 1.5 (from correct arithmetic) 1
no unit and 2/3 s.f. 1
8
2
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003 0625 6
(b) Graph:
Scales, labelled, suitable size 1
Axes, right way round 1
Plots to ½ sq (-1 each error) 2
TOTAL 10
TOTAL 8
(c) V 1
A 1
W 1
correct R at 9.8V = 8.16666 (any sf) 1
all R to 2/3 sf 1
consistent 2 sf or consistent 3 sf 1
TOTAL 9
(ii) 6.8 1
unit, mm 1
(iii) 0.75094/0.75095 1
TOTAL 8
TOTAL 5
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003 0625 6
TOTAL 8
TOTAL 6
TOTAL 12
4 (a) Scales: y-axis 1N = 4 cm; x-axis 1m/s2 = 4/5 cm right way round 1
Both axes labelled with quantity and unit 1
Plots to ½ sq (-1 each error or omission, minimum mark zero) 2
Line thickness less than 1 mm and no 'blob' plots 1
Well judged best fit single straight line 1
TOTAL 10
(c) B 1
TOTAL 4
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004 0625 6
TOTAL 9
2 (a) All T values correct (0.34, 0.44, 0,49, 0.53, 0.60, 0.63) 1
All T values to 2 sf OR all to 3sf 1
(b) Graph:
Scales suitable 1
Scales labeled and with units 1
Plots correct to ½ sq (-1 each error) 2
Line judgement 1
Line thickness (and small, neat plots) 1
(d) Statement: NO 1
Reason: line not through origin (or equivalent) 1
TOTAL 11
TOTAL 7
Precaution 1 1
Precaution 2 1
(e.g. repeats, use mark on block supporting lens to show centre of
lens, place metre rule on bench to take readings or clamp rule in
position, use a dark area, explanation of how to avoid parallax
error, vertical screen/lens/both, centres of lens and object in line)
TOTAL 8
5 (a) 22 1
TOTAL 5
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – November 2004 0625 6
1 (a) (i) 84 1
(ii) 50 1
o
both units correct C and cm3 (or ml) 1
(b) (i) 75 1
(ii) 15 (ecf) 1
(d) time 1
another temperature 1
TOTAL 11
correct readings to ½ sq 1
G = 0.37 – 0.39 1
TOTAL 6
(ii) all correct T values, 1.93, 1.80, 1.67, 1.57, 1.41, 1.28 1
3/4sf for T 1
(c) Graph:
line judgement 1
line thickness 1
(d) 58 cm 1
TOTAL 11
r = 19 – 21 1
i = 31 – 33 1
TOTAL 5
2/3 sf for R 1
(ii) V, cm, Ω 1
(ii) answer 4 1
(iii) 72 1
(c) micrometer 1
TOTAL 7
GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – June 2005 0625 6
[total: 8]
(d) Ω [1]
[total: 8]
4 (a) 0.90; 0.78; 0.63 (-1 each error, ignore sf) [2]
(c) NO [1]
T/m increases as m decreases (wtte) - if statement (no) correct [1]
[total: 9]
(b) i = 29 - 31 [1]
(c) refracted ray correct side of normal and at angle < i [1]
r = 18 - 22 [1]
(d) ray displaced and parallel to incident ray (by eye) [1]
all correct lines drawn neatly, not too thick, and forming
continuous path [1]
[total: 8]
0625 Physics
0625/06 Paper 6 Maximum mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. Any
substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be recorded in the published
Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’
scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with these
mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005 0625 6
TOTAL 7
(b) I in A, V in V, R in Ω 1
1.98 or 2.0; 4.00 or 4.0; 1.06 or 1.1 1
all to 2 sf or 3 sf 1
TOTAL 8
3 (a) θ in oC, t in s 1
TOTAL 9
TOTAL 10
TOTAL 6
0625 PHYSICS
These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements
of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks.
They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2006 0625 06
TOTAL 9
TOTAL 6
TOTAL 9
TOTAL 5
(c) (i) Axes suitable and labelled, false origin as instructed [1]
Plots correct to ½ small sq [1]
TOTAL 11
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2006 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 06
[Total: 8]
[Total: 10]
3 (a) (i) normal correct (by eye) (single, thin line) [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2006
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 0625 06
(b) B [1]
smaller temp drop [1]
(OR neither, insignificant difference)
[Total: 8]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2006
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 6
1 (a) θ1 = 23 [1]
unit oC correctly written [1]
[Total: 7]
(e) correct values for b 40, 35, 32, 28, 24, 20 (ecf) [1]
(f) Graph:
correct d axis labelled with symbol / unit [1]
plots to nearest ½ sq (-1 each error or omission) [2]
best fit straight line [1]
single line, thin and best fit [1]
(g) no
line not through origin
OR when b increases, d decreases
OR negative gradient [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 6
[Total: 8]
(b) precautions:
any two from:
use darkened area (wtte)
metre rule on bench or clamped
object and lens same height from bench
mark on lens holder to show position of lens centre
take more readings
choosing mid point between acceptable positions
parallax, action and reason
lens/screen perpendicular to bench [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2007 0625 6
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2007 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 06
1 (a) 24 [1]
(b) s, °C [1]
23, 1 (-1 each error) [2]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2007 0625 06
(b) two equal heights from bench (or other valid method) [1]
[Total: 6]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2007
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2008 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 06
(ii) 49.66 (or 49.7), 49.50 (or 49.5), 50.05 (or 50.0) [1]
consistent significant figures (3 or 4) [1]
[Total: 9]
2 Table:
[Total: 6]
3 Graph:
Temperature axis labelled θ/°C [1]
Suitable scales (plots occupy at least ½ grid) [1]
Plots correct to nearest ½ square (–1 each error) [2]
Lines well judged curves [1]
Lines thin [1]
(b) Statement:
larger surface area increases rate of cooling [1]
Justification:
Correct reference to gradients of lines or readings [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2008 0625 06
4 Trace:
(a) all lines present, thin, neat and in correct area [1]
normal at 90° (by eye)
and EF at 30° to normal (by eye) [1]
line KJ to at least beyond P4 [1]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2008 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 6
1 (a) view perpendicular to (or straight in front of rule)/use of set square [1]
(b) (i) correct e1 value 3.1 and correct e2 value 2.4 [1]
e in cm [1]
[Total: 8]
Resistance at connections
Internal resistance of source/other sensible suggestion [1]
[Total: 7]
3 Table
θ in °C, V in cm3 [1]
correct V 0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 [1]
(c) 1. sensible comment about heat loss to the surroundings, e.g. use of insulation/lid [1]
2. sensible comment about adding water in a regulated, timed flow (including smaller
volumes/set time intervals/shorter intervals [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2008 0625 6
[Total: 10]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2009 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 06
[Total: 8]
[Total: 6]
(b) Graph:
Axes labelled and scales suitable (must include origin) [1]
Plots correct to ½ square (–1 each error or omission) [2]
Well judged str. line taking account of all points and reaching an axis [1]
Thin line [1]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2009 0625 06
[Total: 12]
(c) average f 11.9, 11.94, 11.95, 12.0, 12 (cm) ecf allowed [1]
2/3 significant figures [1]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/06 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 06
(b) (i)–(iii)
table: T 1.0, 0.95, 0.895 (0.90, 0.9), 0.84, 0.775 (0.78) [1]
T2 1.00, 0.903, 0.801, 0.706, 0.601 (if T correct) [1]
(c) graph:
axes labelled [1]
scales suitable, plots occupying at least half grid [1]
plots all correct to ½ square [1]
well judged line [1]
thin line, 5 neat plots [1]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 5]
3 (a)–(c)
table:
V, A, Ω [1]
V 1.8 [1]
I 0.25 [1]
R values 7.20, 3.46(3.5) [1]
consistent significant figures for R (2 or more) [1]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2009 0625 06
(e) (i) correct symbols and circuit (ignore power source symbol) [1]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 61
1 (a) (i) l = 29 (mm) and l = 31 (mm) (allow 2.9 cm, 3.1 cm) [1]
eA = 14 (mm) and eB = 15 (mm) (ecf) (ignore minus signs) [1]
[Total: 8]
(b) graph:
y-axis labelled [1]
plots occupying at least half of grid on suitable scale [1]
all plots correct to ½ square [1]
well judged single, smooth curve line, not ‘point-to-point’ [1]
thin line [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 61
(b) table:
V / l values correct 8.35, 3.58, 2.08, 1.39, 1.00 [1]
consistent 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
unit V/m [1]
[Total: 8]
(ii) i = 30 [1]
(iii) r1 = 31 [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2010 0625 61
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 61
1 (a) correct 1/d values 0.0222, 0.0294, 0.0370, 0.0444, 0.0518 [1]
all to 2 significant figures or all to 3 consistent significant figures [1]
(b) graph:
axes suitable and labelled [1]
all plots correct to ½ small square [1]
good line judgement (position) [1]
thin line, single, no blobs (quality) [1]
[Total: 10]
2 (a) θr 26 [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2010 0625 61
(b) Ω, A [1]
10.1 [1]
(d) diagram:
resistors in parallel [1]
voltmeter symbol [1]
voltmeter position [1]
[Total 8]
o
(b) (i) 2 and unit ( ) present at least once [1]
[Total: 10]
[Total 6]
© UCLES 2010
w
w
w
.X
tr
me
eP
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2011 0625 61
[Total: 6]
(b) t in s, θ in ºC [1]
T1= 14 [1]
T2 = 1 [1]
(c) Graph:
Axes the right way round, both labelled with quantity, ignore unit [1]
Use of the scale temperature 50 – 80 and time 0 – 200 or 0 – 250, using the whole grid [1]
All seven plots correct to ½ small square [1]
Good line judgement [1]
Thin line [1]
[Total: 11]
3. (a) (i) 5.4 or 5.43 or 5.429 AND 5.9 or 5.94 or 5.938 [1]
R values both to 2 significant figures OR both to 3 significant figures, in table [1]
(iii) V, A , Ω [1]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 9]
5. 1.5 cm [1]
100 cm3 [1]
0.07 m2 [1]
0.12 A [1]
23 cm [1]
[Total: 5]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2011 0625 61
1 (a) graph:
axes: the right way round, labelled x and y with unit cm [1]
scale: both 10 small squares = 2 cm
(either or both 20 small squares = 5 cm also acceptable) [1]
plots: all correct to ½ small square [1]
line: well-judged, best-fit, straight, thin, continuous line [1]
(b) correct triangle method using at least ½ candidate’s line, with method clearly indicated
on graph [1]
G = 0.94 – 1.00, no ecf [1]
[Total: 9]
2 (a) θc = 24 [1]
o
C [1]
[Total: 8]
(c) (i) voltmeter symbol correct and correctly connected across all three resistors [1]
[Total: 8]
(b) (i) continuous, thin line that reaches normal and at least touches P2 and P3 dots [1]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 5]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – May/June 2012 0625 61
[Total: 6]
(b) Table:
mm, °C [1]
Correct d values 100, 80, 60, 40, 20, 10 [1]
[Total: 7]
(ii) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around [1]
Suitable scales – plots occupy at least half the grid [1]
All plots correct to ½ small square [1]
Good line judgement (ecf for curve if d plotted) [1]
Single, thin, continuous line [1]
(iii) Triangle using at least half of candidate’s line clearly indicated on graph [1]
Evidence of subtraction seen [1]
G value 1.5 when rounded to 2 significant figures [1]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 8]
5 (a) V1 = 74 [1]
Line of sight perpendicular to scale [1]
Perpendicular line continues to measuring cylinder at surface level [1]
[Total: 9]
ap
er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
s.c
om
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61 Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
IGCSE – October/November 2012 0625 61
(d) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around [1]
Suitable scales [1]
All plots correct to ½ small square
Good line judgement and a single, thin, continuous line [1]
[Total: 11]
[Total: 6]
[Total: 8]
4 (a) Trace:
Normal at 90° in correct position [1]
Angle of incidence = 30° ( ± 2°) [1]
(d) (i) i/r value 1.54 and both i/r values with no unit and to 2 or 3 significant figures [1]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]